V BBGAXIOBEIBBe PUBLICATIONS OF THE , * AMERICAN BOOK^ COMP'ANY. ANCIENT L^GUAGES. GREEK GRAMMARS AND READE}fcSit_ Adams's (F. A.) Gr^k. Prepositions f^- * $0 60 .4,jipld's First Greek'^ook (J. A. Spencer). ^ 87 Greek Prose Composition (J. A. Spencer) 1 05 Boise's 'ExVrcises^n Greek Prose Composition 1 05 Coy's First Greek Reader vj^^ " • • ^^ Greek for Beginners ^. ^it^i'. 1 00 Crosby's Greek Grammar . T^^^i .(Q^j^. 1 40 Greek Lessons ' TyfUX . .r 75 Greek Tables j _. 50 Hadley and Allen's Greek Grammar. Revised Edition 1-^ Hadley's Greek Grammar. Old Edition ; . . 1^0 Elements of Greek Grammar ?«Jk»m^ ' 1 05 Greek Verbs ..../.. 21 Harkness's First GrceE Book. With a Greek Reader 1 06 Harper and Waters' Irfductivo Grecl^ Method 1 00 Keep's Greok Lessons /-r-^ 1 20 Kendrick's Greek Ollendorff .T. ^J^, ...... 1 22 Kiihner's Greek Grammar (Edwards and Taylor). . /^ 1 40 Scarborough's First Lessons in Greek 90 [*i6] I Lt Ancient LangUa V, Silber's Progressive Lessons in Greek .^T'ff^ $0 57 Whiton's Three Months' Preparation for Reading Xenophon. . . 48 WinchelPs Elementary Lessons in Greek Syntax 54 GREEK TEXTS, ETC. Blake's Lexicon of the First Three Books of Homer's Iliad . . 1 00 Boise's Xenophon's Anabasis. Four BOoks 1 08 The same. Four Books, with Lexicon 1 32 Crosby's (Howard) (Edipus Tyrannus of Sophocles 1 05 Crosby's (Alpheus) Xenophon's Anabasis. Complete, with Lexicon 1 60 The same. Four Books and Lexicon J 40 Lexicon to Xenophon's Anabasis 70 Lexicon and Notes to Xenophon's Anabasis 90 Harper's Xenophon's Anabasis. {In preparation.) Johnson's (H. C.) Homer's Iliad. Three Books, with Notes. . . 112 The same. Three Books, with Notes and Lexicon 1 32 Johnson's (H. M.) Selections from Herodotus 1 05 Owen's Homer's IHad ,......., 1 40 Acts of the Apostles. With Lexicon 1 22 Homer's Odyssey 1 40 Thucydides. With Map 1 Y5 Xenophon's Cyropaedia !» 76 Robbins's (R. D. C.) Xenophon's Memorabilia 1 40 Smead's Demosthenes' Philippics. With Notes 1 05 Antigone of Sophocles. With Notes 1 22 Tyler's (W. S.) Plato's Apology and Crito , < . . 1 05 HEBREW. Gesenius's Hebrew Grammar 2 10 LATIN GRAMMARS AND READERS. Arnold's First and Second Latin Book 87 Latin Prose Composition 87 [*i7] £> Jt PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO LATIN COMPOSITION. FOB SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, Br ALBEKT HAEKNESS, Ph.D., PROFESSOR IN BROWN UNIVERSITY. ADAPTED TO THE REVISED STANDARD EDITION OF THE AUTHOB^S LATIN GRAMMAR, JOHIV S. PRELL Cidl & Mechanical Engineer, SAN FRAJN' CISCO, OAL, NEW YORK •:• CINCINNATI •:• CHICAGO AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY, Entered, according to / ct ct Congress, in the year 1868, by ALBERT HAKKNESS, In the Clerk's Office ot the District Court of the District of Rhode Island. Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1882, by ALBERT HARKNESS, In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. j^SueaU^ . Hppleton d Compang «cw ]!?orft, la. S. B. Add to L ib> GSFf H31! PREFACE. i;,^;^^ This volume is intended to aid the classical student in acquir- ing a practical acquaintance with the difficult but important subject of Latin composition. It aims to be at once simple, progressive, and complete. Starting with the beginner as soon as he has learned a few grammatical forms, it conducts him step by step through a progressive series of lessons and exercises, until he is so far master both of the theory and of the practice of the subject, that he no longer needs the aid of a special text- book. The work consists of three parts, of which the first is purely elementary, and is intended as a companion to the Reader. It aims to give the pupil familiarity with the power and use of grammatical inflections, and facility in the application of the great and controlling principles of the language. Part Second will furnish the learner instruction and practice in Latin composition throughout the subsequent stages of his preparatory course for college. The exercises have special ref- erence to the syntax of the language, and are, to a great extent, imitations of the ordinary constructions contained in the Com- mentaries of Caesar, and in the Orations of Cicero. In subject matter they also relate to topics contained in those works. Part Third, intended for the earlier portion of a collegiate course of study, aims to introduce the student to a practical 728 (iii) IV PREFACE. acquaintance with the elements of Latin style. The Exercises are, with slight changes, translations of sentences carefully selected from the works of Cicero. In making this selection, it has been the constant aim of the author, not only to give the student clear and well-defined illus- trations of Latin constructions and usages, but also thoughts and sentiments of intrinsic interest and worth. To explain more fully the plan of the work, the author begs leave to call attention to the following points : — I. For all grammatical rules and principles, the student is referred directly to the grammar. The advantages of this arrangement are obvious. It not only saves room, and thus makes it possible to bring an extended course in Latin composi- tion within the compass of a convenient manual, but also saves the time of the pupil, by relieving him from the worse than use- less task of learning new rules, instead of applying those with which he is already familiar. II. A series of Models, selected from the writings of Cicero, the great master of Latin style, extends through the entire work. English sentences are given to be translated into Ciceronian Latin. Opposite each of these stands Cicero's own expression for the same thought. Then follow Remarks, explaining the process by which we pass from the English expression to the Latin, and commenting upon such peculiarities as seem to re- quire attention. Such a series of Models, properly explained, will, it is thought, be the best possible guide for the learner in the actual work of writing Latin. III. Special attention has been given to the important sub- ject of Synonymes and Idioms. But care has been taken not to make peculiarities of construction too prominent. The learner needs to become acquainted with the regular and ordinary PREFACE. V usages, before he is prepared to appreciate those which are exceptional and peculiar. In this connection, the author is happy to say that Mr. Charles B. Goff has kindly aided him in the preparation of some of the Exercises of Part Second, and Mr. Edward H. Cutler in the preparation of the Vocabularies and in the reading of the proofs. In conclusion, the author cannot forbear to express his grate- ful acknowledgments to the classical instructors of the country, who, by their fidelity and skill in the use of his books, have given them a success so far beyond his most sanguine expecta- tions. To their hands this volume is gratefully and respectfully committed. Brown University, August, 1868. CONTENTS. PART FIRST. Grammatical Forms and Rules. LEBBON PAGI! I. Declension of Nouns. . 1 II. Adjectives and Pronouns 3 III., IV. Verbs 6 V. Agreement of Nouns. — Nominative and Vocative. . 10 VI., VII. Use of the Accusative 11 VIII. Use of the Dative 15 IX., X. Use of the Genitive. . . . . . . .17 XI.— XIV. Use of the Ablative 20 XV. Adjectives. Pronouns. ....... 26 XVI. Agreement of Verbs. — Indicative 28 XVII.— XIX. Tenses and Use of the Subjunctive. ... 30 XX. Imperative. Infinitive 36 XXI. Gerunds, Supines, Participles. — Particles. . . .37 XXII., XXIII. Gender. Formation of Cases 39 XXIV. — XXVII. Synopsis of Conjugation. Formation of tlie Parts of the Verb 41 XXVIII.— XXX. Irregular, Defective, and Impersonal Verbs. . 4G PART SECOND. Latin Syntax. XXXI. Subject and Predicate 50 XXXII. Forms of Subject 52 XXXIII. Forms of Predicate 54 XXXIV. Forms of Modifiers 50 Vlll CONTENTS. XXXV. Interrogative and Imperative Sentences. . . .68 XXXVI. Complex and Compound Sentences. ... 60 XXXVII. Agreement of Nouns .62 XXXVIII. Nominative and Vocative 64 XXXIX. Accusative as Direct Object 66 XL. Two Accusatives. . . . " . . . . 68 XLI. Two Accusatives. — Special Constructions. . . 70 XLII. Accusative as Subject of Infinitive. In Agreement with another Accusative. ...... 73 XLIII. Accusative in an Adverbial Sense. In Exclamations. 75 XLIV. Dative with Verbs . 77 XLV. Dative with Verbs. Special Constructions. . . 80 XL VI. Dative with Adjectives and Derivatives. . . .82 XL VII. Genitive with Nouns and Adjectives. ... 84 XL VIII. Genitive with Verbs 87 XLIX.— LIII. Ablative 89 LIV. Adjectives 102 LV., LVI. Pronouns 105 LVII. Verbs. — Agreement, Voice, Tense. Indicative Mood. 110 LVIIL Subjunctive Mood 112 LIX. Subjunctive of Purpose or Result. , . . . .115 LX. Relative Clauses of Purpose or Result. . . .118 LXI. Subjunctive of Condition 120 LXII. Subjunctive of Concession 123 LXIII. Subjunctive of Cause and Time. .... 125 LXIV. Subjunctive in Indirect Questions 128 LXV. Subjunctive by Attraction. Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse 130 LXVI. Indirect Discourse 132 LXVII. Imperative Mood 13i LXVIIL, LXIX. Infinitive Mood 130 LXX. Subject and Object Clauses HI LXXI. Gerunds 143 LXXII. Gerunds and Supines 140 LXXIII. Participles 148 LXXIV., LXXV. Particles. . . . . . . .160 LXXVI. Forms for expressing Purpose 155 LXXVII. Forms for expressing Condition. .... 157 LXXVIII. Forms for expressing Concession 159 LXXIX. Forms for expressing Time 102 LXXX. Forms for expressing Cause 164 CONTENTS. IX PART THIRD. Elements of Latin Style. CHAPTER I. CHOICE OF WORDS AND CONSTRUCTIONS LXXXI. Abstract Nouns. Number. LXXXII. Substantives united by Prepositions. . LXXXIII. Special Words and Expressions. LXXXIV. Rendering of certain Nouns and Adjectiv LXXXV. Adjectives — continued. . LXXXVI. Pronouns. — Personal. Reflexive. LXXXVII. Pronouns. — Possessive. . LXXXVIII. Pronouns. — Demonstrative. Relative. LXXXIX. Pronouns. — Interrogative. Indefinite. XC. Verbs. — Active. Passive. Transitive tive XCI. General Statements XCII. Verbs. — Tenses XCIII. Verbs. — Indicative Mood. XCIV. Verbs. — Potential Mood. XCV. Verbs. — Imperative Mood. XCVI. Verbs. — Infinitive Mood. XCVII. Verbs.— Participles XCVIII. Distinction in the Use of Participles, Clauses, and Clauses with Conjunctions. XCIX. Expressions of Duty, Necessity. C. Use of Special Verbs CI. Prepositions CII. Adverbs and Conjunctions. . Relative 167 170 173 175 179 182 185 188 191 194 197 200 204 206 209 212 214 218 221 224 227 231 CHAPTER II. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. CHI. Arrangement of Words. ..... CIV. Euphony and Rhythm CV. Arrangement of Clauses 235 238 241 X CONTENTS. CHAPTER III. STRUCTURE OF LATIN SENTENCES. CVI. Compactness of Structure 244 CVII. Unity of the Latin Sentence 247 CVIII. Perspicuity 251 CIX. Logical Qualities of the Sentence 255 ex. Latin Periods 258 Notes 2G3 Vocabulary. 277 EXPLANATION OF REFERENCES AND ABBRE- VIATIONS. All reference numerals in the "Lessons from the Grammar," and those marked "G" in other parts of the work, refer to the author's Latin Grammar. The other references are to articles in this work. The following abbreviations occur abl ablative. abl. abs. . . ablative absolute. ace accusative. act active. adj adjective. adv adverb. comp comparative. conj conjunction. Conj conjugation. dat dative. dep deponent. distrib. num. distributive numeral. f, feminine. gen genitive. ger gerund. impers. . . . impersonal. indec indeclinable. lit literally. m masculine. n neuter. part participle. pass passive. plur., or pi. . plural. pred predicate. prep preposition. pron pronoun. relat relative. sing singular. subj subjunctive. subs substantive. Buperl. . . . superlative. trans transitive. (Ki) Pi^RT FIRST. GRAMMATICAL FORMS AND RULES. Lesson I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. [1-6.] ^ 1. Lesson fkom the Grammar.'' I. First Declension. 48. II. Second Declension. 51. III. Third Declension. 55-66. IV. Fourth Declension. 116. V. Fifth Declension. 120. VI. Agreement of Appositives. Rule II. 363. VII. Genitive with Nouns. Rule XVI. 395. VIII. Cases with Prepositions. Rule XXXIII. 432-435. ^ In Part First the enclosed numerals standing at the beginning of each lesson refer to the sections in the Reader which the lesson is in- tended to follow. Tiius [1-6] shows that this lesson is to be learned after the pupil has read the first six sections in the Reader. ^ The lessons from the Grammar contain the grammatical points in- volved in the Exercises, and should be carefully learned, or reviewed, in the Grammar itself The references are all to the author's Latin Grammar, the Revised Edition. (1) liATlN COIUPOSITION. 2. Models. I. Tigranes the king. I. Tigrdnes rex. 11. The love of glory. II. Amor gloriae. III. Before light. III. Ante lucem, 3. Remarks. X. Tigranes the king. 1. Tigranes. Looking in the vocabulary for the corresponding Latin, we lind Tigranes, the same as in English. 2. The. The English article, a, an, the, has no Latin equivalent. It must therefore be omitted in translating into Latin. See Gram. 48, 6. 3. King. The corresponding Latin is rex, which must be in the Nominative, in apposition with Tigrdnes, according to Rule II. 4. The Appositive generally follows its subject, as in Enghsh. Hence Tigranes rex. II. The love of glory. 1. The love, amor ; the — not translated. 2. Or, sign of the Genitive. 3. Glory, gloria. Of glory, gloriae ; Gen, Sing. 4. The Genitive may either precede or follow its noun, but seems more frequently to follow when not emphatic. See Gram. 565. Hence we have Amor gloriae. III. Before light. 1. Before, aw^e. No Latin case expresses the relation Jtf/brc. Hence a preposition must be used. 2. Light, lux. But the preposition ante is used only with the Ac- cusative. Hence lucem, and not lux, must be used. See Gram. 433. Hence Ante lucem. 4. Vocabulary. Art, ars, artis, f. Bird, avis, avis, i. Book, liher, libri, m. Boy, puer, puiri, m. Chariot, currus, ns, m. Cicero, Ciciro, Onis, m. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. Concerning, c?e, prep, with abl. Eagle, aquila, ae, f. Friend, amicus, t, m. Friendship, amicitia, ae, f. Hope, spes, spei, f. Orator, orator, orid^ m. Prize, praemium, ii, n. War, bellum, i, n. Wisdom, sapientia, ae, f. 5. Exercise. 1. The eagle, the eagles. 2. Of an eagle, of the eagles. 3. For an eagle, for eagles. 4. Of friendship, of wisdom. 5. For friendship, for wisdom. 6. With friendship, with wisdom. 7. The friend, the friends. 8. Of the friend, of the friends. 9. For the friend, for the friends. 10. The books, the prizes. 11. The boy's book. 12. Of the bird, of the birds. 13. For the bird, for the birds. 14. The art of war. 15. The arts of war. 16. With the arts of war. 17. The chariot, of the chariots. 18. Of hope, with hope. 19. Cicero the orator. 20. Concerning Cicero the orator. Lesson II. ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. [7-10.] 6. Lesson fkom the Grammak. L Declension of Adjectives. 146-158. II. Comparison of Adjectives. 160-162. m. Agreement of Adjectives. Rule XXXIV. 438. IV. Declension of Pronouns. 182-191. V. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule XXXV. 445 ; 445, 1. LATIN COMPOSITION. 7. Models. I. The Roman people. I. Populus Romanus, II. True ' friendships. II. Verae amicitiae. III. An animal which. III. Animal quod. IV. This state. IV, Haec civttas. 8. Remarks. I. The Roman people. 1. In translating a noun and its adjective into Latin, we must begin with the noun, because the gender and case of the noun will determine the ending of the adjective, which must agree with it. 2. The people, populus ; the — not translated. 3. Roman, Romanus, a, um. But as populus is in the Nom. Sing. Masc, the adjective must be in the same case, gender, etc., according to Rule XXXIV. Hence Eomdnus. 4. The adjective may either precede or follow its noun, but seems more frequently to follow when not emphatic. See Gram. 565. Hence Populus Romdnus. II. True friendships. 1. Friendships. Friendship (for which you must look, not friend- ships^ is amicitia ; friendships is amicitiae, the plural of amicitia. 2. True, verus, a, um. But as amicitiae is in the Nom. Plur. Fem., the adjective must be in the same case, etc. ; hence verae. 3. In true friendships, as opposed to false friendships, true is em- phatic. Hence verae must precede its noun. See Gram. 565, 1. Verae amicitiae. III. An animal which. 1. An ANIMAL, an?maZ ; an — not translated. 2. Which, qui, quae, quod. But as antmal is in the Neut. Sing., the relative must be in the same gender and number, according to Rule XXXIV. ; hence quod. ^ Animal quod. IV. This state. 1. State, civitas. 2. This, hie, haec, hoc. But as civitas is in the Nom. Sing. Fem., the ' In the Models and Exercises, italicized English words are emphatic, ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. demonstrative which agrees with it as an adjective must be in the same case, etc. See Gram. 445, 1 ; hence haec. Uaec dvitas. 9. Vocabulary. Acceptable, grains, a, um. Beautiful, pulcher, chra, chrum. Certain, a certain, quidam, quae- dam, quoddam and quiddam. Crown, corona, ae, f. Diligent, diligens, entis. High, alius, a, um. Himself, herself, itself, sui. I, ego, mei. Kind, henignus, a, um. Law, lex, legis, f. Mountain, mans, moniisj m. My, mens, a, um. G. 185. Present, donum, i, n. Pupil, discipulus, i, m. This, hie, haec, hoc. Thou, you, iu, iui. True, verus, a, um. Useful, uiXlis, e. Who, which, what, interrog., qui, quae, quod, adj. ; quis, quae, quid, subs. Your, iuus, a, um ; vesier, ira^ irum. G. 185. 10. Exercise. 1. A hind friend, of a hind friend. 2. Kind friends, of kind friends. 3. True friendship, of true friendships. 4. An acceptable present, with acceptable presents. 5. The beautiful books, the beautiful crowns, the beautiful presents. 6. Useful laws, of the useful laws. 7. A high mountain, a higher mountain, the highest mountain. 8. The most diligent pupils. 9. Of me, of you,' of himself, of whom? 10. With my books, with your ^ books. 11. This mountfiin, this crown, this present. 12. A certain book. * In the Exercises the pronoun you may be treated as singular, unles? it is marked (pi.), or is shown by the sense to be plural. In like man- ner, your may be treated as referring to one person, unless the sense shows that two or more persons are addressed. 2 / \ LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson III. VERBS. — SUM. FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. [11-13.] 11. Lesson fkom the Geammab. I. Verb Sum. 204. II. First Conjugation. 205, 206. III. Second Conjugation. 207, 208. IV. Subject Nominative. Rule III. 368. ^y^ .^^^j^^ V. Agreement of Verb with Subject. Rule XXXVI. 460. VI. Predicate Nouns. Rule I. 362. VII. Direct Object. Rule V. 371. 12. Models. I. God made the world. I. Deus mundum aedifi- cdvit. II. Cincinnatus was dictator. II. Cmcinndtus dictator fait. 13. Remarks. I. God made the world. 1. God, D&U8. As subject it must be in the Nominative, according to Rule III. 2. Made. Look for the present make, not for made ; make, build, aediflco (I make) ; I made, aedificavi. But as Deus, the subject, is in tlio Third Pers. Sing., the verb nmst be in the same person and number, according to Rule XXXVI. ; hence aedificavit. 3. World, mundus. But as direct object oi aedificavit, it nmst be In the Accus. ; hence mundum. 4. The order is — Subject, Object, Verb. See Gram. 560. Deus mundum aedificdvit. VEKBS./ SUM. FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS. 7 II. Cincinnatus was dictator. 1. Cincinnatus, Cincinnatus, the same as in English. As subject it must be in the Nominative. 2. Was. The verb to he is sum, I am. I was, fui; but according to Rule XXXVI., the verb must agree with its subject, Cincinnatus ; hence fuit. 3. Dictator, dictator, the same as in English. As predicate noun, it must agree in case with Cincinnatus, according to Rule I., hence in the Nom. 4. The Predicate Noun may either precede or follow the verb. Pla- cing it before the verb, we have Cincinnatus dictator fuit. 14. Vocabulary. Accuse, accuso, are, dvi, dtum. Advise, moneo, ere, ui, Uum. Be, sum, esse, fui. Blame, vitupero, are, dvi, dtum. Grieve, doleo, ere, ui, Uum. Happy, bedtus, a, um. Praise, laudo, are, dvi, dtum. That, ille, a, ud. 15. Exercise. I. This law ii: useful. 2. That lawj was useful. 3. These laws will be useful. 4. We may he happy. 5. You (pi.)' iA>',":^rt have been happy. 6. I praise, we praise. 7. He was blaming, they were blaming. 8. I shall praise, we shall praise. 9. He accuses, he is accused. 10. He will accuse, he will be accused. II. They praised Cicero. 12. We will praise Cicero. . 13. Cicero has been praised. 14. I grieve, we grieve, 15. He was grieving, they were grieving. 16. I shall grieve, we shall grieve. 17. He advises, he is advised. 18. He was advising, he was advised. 19. You will advise the boys. 20. The boys have been advised. ' See foot note page 5. ^ LATIN COMPOSITION, Lesson IV. VERBS. — THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. DE^ PONENT VERBS. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. [14-18.] 16. Lesson fkom the Grammar. I. Third Conjugation. 209, 210 ; 220-223. II. Fourth Conjugation. 211, 212. III. Deponent Verbs. 231, 232. IV. Periphrastic Conjugation. 233, 234. Y. Use of Adverbs. Rule LXI. 551. 17. Models. I. The wise live happily. I. Sapieyites felictter vi- imnt. II. Diligence should be culti- II. Diligentia coUnda est. vated. 18. Remarks. I. The wise live happily. 1. The wise. V^'isq, sapiens ; the wise, saptentes, Noiii. Plur. See Gram. 441, 1. 2. Live. I live, vivo. But the verb must agree with the subject, saptentes ; hence vivunt. Third Pers. Plur. 3. Happily, /eZici/cr. But the adverb in Latin generally precedes the verb, though it generally follows it in English. See Gram. 567. Saptentes feliclter vivunt. II. Diligence should be cultivated. 1. Diligence, diligentia. Nom. Sing. 2. Should bk cultivated, is to be cultivated. The duty or noces- VERBS. THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 9 sity denoted by should he, is to he, ought, may be expressed by the Passive Periphrastic conjugation. See Gram. 234. I cultivate, colo. Periphrastic conjugation, colendus sum. But the verb must agree with diligentia in number and person, and the participle in gender, number, and case. See Gram. 460, 1. Hence we have colenda est. Diligentia colenda est. 19. YOCABULARY. Always, semper, adv. City, urhs, urhis, f. Father, pater, tris, m. Follow, sequor, i, secutus sum, dep. Fortify, munio, ire, ivi, itum. Hannibal, Hannlhal, dlis, m. His, her, its, their, suus, a, um. Imitate, imUor, dri, dtus sum, dep. Instruct, erudio, ire, ivi, itum. Lead, duco, ere, duxi, ductum. Our, noster, tra, trum. Rule, rego, ere, rezi, rectuTn. Saguntum, Saguntum, i, n. Sleep, dormio, ire, ivi, itum. Take, capio, ere, cepi, captum. 20. Exercise. 1. He leads, he is led. 2. He will rule, he will be ruled. 3. They have ruled, they have been ruled. 4. Hannibal took Saguntum. 5. Saguntum was taken. 6. The cities had been taken. 7. He sleeps, they sleep. 8. He will sleep, they will sleep. 9. He may sleep, they may sleep. 10. Your father instructed you. 11. These boys have been instructed. 12. The boy imitates his father. 13. We will imitate our fathers. 14. You have always imitated your father. 15. We will follow you. 16. The boys followed their father. 17. We were about to praise you. 18. Diligent pupils must be praised. 19. They were about to fortify the city. 20. These cities must be fortified. 16 .^^^^'-^ 10 LATIN COMPOSITION, Lesson V. AGREEMENT OF NOUNS. — NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. [19-22.] 21. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Predicate Nouns. Rule I. 362. II. Appositives. Rule II. 363. III. Subject Nominative. Rule III. 368. lY. Case of Address. Rule lY. 369. 22. Models. I. Hear, citizens. I. Audits, cives. II. For other models, see under Lessons I. and HI. 23. Remarks. 1. Hear. I hear, audio ; hear, hear ye, auditCi Imperative Second Pers. Plur. The subject vos, ye, is omitted. See Gram. 368, 2. 2. Citizens. Citizen, civis ; citizens, cives, Voc. Plur. See Rule IV. 3. The Vocative generally, though not always, stands after one or more words. See Gram. 569, VI. 24. YOCABULARY. Brother, /ra^er, iris, m. Brutus, Brutus, i, m. Consul, consid, ulis, m. Diligence, diligentia, ae, f. Greatly, valde, adv. Herodotus, Herodotus, i, m. Letter, epistdla, ae, f. Many, mtdti, ae, a, plur. Philosopher, philosdphus, i, m. Save, servo. Are, cLvi, dtum. Socrates, Socrates, is, m. Soldier, miles, Itis, m. History, historia, ae, f. i Write, scriho, err, scripsi, sci'ipiunu USE OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 11 25. Exercise. 1. Cicero was an orator. 2. The consul was an orator. 3. Cicero the consul was an orator. 4. Brutus liad been consul. 5. Brutus was consul. 6. Cicero the orator wrote many letters. 7. The letters of Cicero the orator have been greatly praised. 8. Socrates was a philosopher. 9. Your brother will be an orator. 10. Herodotus was the father of history. 11. The orator praises Herodotus the father of history. 12. Pupils, your diligence will be praised. 13. Your diligence, boys, must be praised. 14. The city has been fortified. 15. The city must bg saved. Lesson YI. USE OF THE ACCUSATIVE. [23-25.] -^ 26. Lesson prom the Grammar. I. Accusative as Direct Object. Rule Y. 371. >^v*Kl*v(r| U^m^j II. Two Accusatives — Same Person. Rule YI. 373. ^-^^-^^^j III. Two Accusatives — Person and Thing. Rule YIL 374.^'^' 27. Models. ^^^^U^ I. They called the council I. Consilium appellave- Senate. runt Sendtitm. II. He asked me my opinion. II. 3fe sententiam roguviL ni. For Model for Direct Object, see under Lesson III. 28. Remarks. I. They called the council Senate. 1. They called. I call, appello ; they called, appcllaverunt (appel- 12 LATIN COMPOSITION. larunt), Perf. Indie. Third Pers. Plur. The subject is omitted, being implied in the ending erunt. See Gram. 368, 2. 2. The council, consilium^ Accus. See Rule VI. 3. Senate, Senatus ; Accus. Senatum. See Rule VI. 4. The verb, whose usual place is at the end of the sentence, n>aj stand between the two Accusatives, as in this Model. II. He asked me my opinion. 1. He asked. I ask, rogo ; he asked, rogavit, Perf. Indie. Third Pers. Sing. The subject is omitted. See Gram. 368, 2. 2. Me. I, ego ; me, me, Accus. See Rule VII. 3. My opinion. Opinion, senientia ; Accus. sententiam. See Rule VII. The possessive my in this Model is not expressed in Latin, because it can be readily supplied from the context ; my opinion, not the opinion of another. See Gram. 447. 29. Vocabulary. Ask, rogo, are, dvi, dtum. Call, appello, are, dvi, dtum. Catiline, Catilma, ae, m. Delight, delecto, are, dvi, dtum. Enemy, hostis, is, m. and f. Island, insiila, ae, f. Judge, judlco, d7'e, dvi, dtum. Modesty, verecundia, ae, f. Opinion, sententia, ae, f. Preceptor, praeceptor, oris, m, Rome, Roma, ae, f. Sicily, Sicilia, ae, f. Teach, doceo, ere, docui, doctum. Virtue, virtus, viis, f. 30. Exercise. 1. Your letter delights me. 2. This letter will delight your father. 3. Who wrote that letter? 4. My brother wrote that letter. 5. They call the island Sicily. 6. The island is called Sicily. 7. Sicily is an island. 8. They called Herodotus the father of history. 9. We judge you, O Catiline, an enemy. 10. You, O Catiline, will be judged an enemy. 11. We teach boys modesty. 12. We will teach our pupils wisdom. 13. The preceptor will ask you your opinion. 14. The city was called Rome. 15. Virtue must be praised. USE OF THE ACCUSATIVE. 13 Lesson VII. ACCUSATIVE — Continued. IV [26-29.] Le^ FROM itive of II. Accusative o: III. Accusative of Specification. Accusative in Exclamations. >ace.^lKuleO:. ^9. \ [e and Space Rule X. 380. ^ Rule YIII. 8 IV. Accusative in Exclamations. Ilule XI. 381 V. Interrogative Sentences. 351. 32- Models. I. He lived thirty years. II. Plato came to Tarentum. III. They are not at all moved. IV. O deceptive hope ! I. II. III. Triginta annos vixit. Plato Tarentum venit. Nihil moveiitur. IV. O fallacem spent ! 33. Remarks. I. He lived thirty years. 1. He lived. I live, vivo ; he lived, vixH. See Gram. 368, 2. 2. Thirty, triginta^ indeclinable. 3. Years. Year, annus; years, Accus. Plur. annos. See Rub IX. II. Plato came to Tarentum. 1. Plato, Plato, Nom. See Rule III. 2. Came. I come, venio ; came, he came, venit. See Gram. 287. 3. To Tarentum. Tarentum, Tarentum ; to Tarentum, Accus. jTa- rentum. See Rule X. III. They are not at all moved. 1. They are moved. I move, moveo ; am moved, moveor ; they are moved, move?itur, Pres. Indie. Pass. Third Pers. Plur. 14 LATIN COMPOSITION. 2. Not at all, nihil. See Rule VIII. IV. O deceptive hope ! 1. O HOPE, llo^c, spes ; O hope, spem. Rule XI. 2. Deceptive, fallax ; Ace. Sing, falldcem. Rule XXXIV. 438. It is emphatic, and accordingly precedes its noun. See Gram. 565, 1. 34. Vocabulary. Athens, Athenae, drum, f. pi. Come, venio, ire, veni, ventum. Day, dies, diei, m. Forty-three, tres (trio) et quadra- ginta. G. 174. Hour, hora, ae, f. How many, quot, indeclinable. In, in, prep, with abl. Italy, Italia, ae, f. Messenger, nuntius, ii, m. Monih, mensis, mensis, m. Move, moveo, ere, movi, motum. Not, non, adv.; interrog., nonne. G. 851, 1. Not at all, nihil, indeclinable. G. 128. Numa, Numa, ae, m. Reign, regno, are, dvi, dtum. Send, mitto, ire, misi, missum. Seven, septem, indeclinable. G. 176. Two, duo, ae, o. G. 175. Wonderful, admirahllis, e. Year, annus, i, m. 35. Exercise. 1. How many years did Numa reign? 2. Numa reigned forty-three years. 3. Were you (pi.) not two years in Italy? 4. We were in Italy seven months. 5. The consul came to Eome. 6. He was in that city seven days. 7. Was he not asked his opinion? 8. He was asked his opinion. 9. You, consul, have saved the city. 10. O wonderful virtue! 11. You will not move the consul at all. 12. Did you not send a messenger to Athens? 13. I sent two messengers to Athens. 14. How many hours did you sleep? 15. I slept seven hours. USE OF THE DATIVE. 15 Lesson VIII. ^. USE OF THE DATIVE. [30-38.J 36. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Dative with Verbs. Rule XII. 384. II. Two Datives — To Which and For Which. Rule XIII. 390. III. Dative with Adjectives. Rule XIV. 391. IV. Dative with Derivatives. Rule XV. 392. ^^W^^^]^ I 37. Models. I. They serve the king. I. Hegi serviunt. II. It is a care to me. II. Est mihi curae. III. Country is dear to all. III. P atria omnibus cara est. IV. Obedience to laws. IV. Ohtemperatio legibus. 38. Remarks. I. They serve the king. 1. They serve, serviunt. 2. The king. King, rex ; Dat. regi. Rule XII. II. It is a care to me (to me for a care). 1. It is, est. It is placed at the beginning of the sentence because it is emphatic. See Gram. 561, I. 2. To ]viE. I, ego ; to me, mihi. Rule XIII. 3. A CARE = for a care. Care, cura ; for a care, cm^ae, Dat. Rule XIII. III. Country is dear to all. 1. Country, patria. 2. Is, est. 16 LATIN COMPOSITION. 3. Dear. Dear, cams ; Fern, cava, to agree w\x\\ patria. 4. To ALL. All, omnis ; Dat. Plur. omiiibus. Rule XIV. 5. Observe the order of the words in the model, though much freedom is allowable in this respect. IV. Obedience to laws. 1. Obedience, ohtemperatio. 2. To LAWS. Law, lex ; to laws, legibus, Dat. Plur. Rule XV. 39. Vocabulary. All, omnis, e. Award, tribuo, Sre, ui, utum. Citizen, civis, civis, m. and f. Country, one's country,^a^Wa, ae, f. Dear, cams, a, um,. Ever = always, semper, adv. General, imperator, oris, m. Give, do, dare, dedi, datum. Glory, gloria, ae, f. Good, bonus, a, um. Have, sum, esse, fui, with dat. G. 387. Honor, honor. Oris, m. Industry, industria, ae, f. Learning, doctnna, ae, f. Obedience, ob^emperaiio, dnis, f. Obey, pareo, ere, ui, Uum. Praiseworthy, laudahilis, e. Prefer, praeflro, ferre, tuli, IdtuTfi. G. 292, 2. Roman, Romunus, a, um. Wealth, divitiae, drum, f. pi. 40. Exercise. 1. Good citizens will obey the laws. 2. The Romans awarded honors to their generals. 3. Industry is an honor to a pupil. 4. Virtue is a glory to all. 5. I prefer virtue to learning. 6. We prefer learning to wealth. 7. I will give you that book as a present. 8. I have seven beautiful books. 9. Will not this present be acceptable to you? 10. That present will be acceptable to me. 11. Is not the country dear to you ? 12. The country has ever been very dear to me. 13. Obedience to the laws is praiseworthy. A/ USE OF THE GENITIVE. 17 Lesson IX. USE OF THE GENITIVE. [39, 40.] 41. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Genitive with Nouns. Rule XVI. 395. XL Genitive with Adjectives. Rule XVII. 399. 42. Models. I. The love of truth. I. Amor veritdtis. II. Desirous of truth. II. Veritdtis cupidus, 43. Vocabulary. Athenian, Atheniensis, is, m. and f. Celebrated, distinguished, clams, a, urn. Man, homo, tnis ; vir,^ viri, m. Money, pecunia, ae, f. Often, saepe, adv. Demosthenes, Demosthenes, is, m. I Oration, oraiio, onis, f. Desirous of, cupldus, a, um. Fond of, amans, amantis. King, rex, regis, m. Love, amor, oris, m. Pleasure, voluptas, dtis, f. Praise, laus, laudis, f. Precept, praeceptum, i, n. Skilled in, peritus, a, um. 44. Exercise. 1. The orations of Cicero have often been praised. 2. You have often praised the orations of Cicero the orator, ^ Homo is the ordinary term for man as a member of the human family ; while vir is a terra of respect, a hero, a man in the full sense of the word. IS LATIN COMPOSITION. 3. The orations of* Demosthenes, the celebrated orator, will always be praised. 4. Boys are fond of pleasure. 5. The pupils are fond of praise. 6. The king was desirous of glory. 7. Men are fond of money. 8. The love of country is an honor to a citizen. 9. The precepts of the jyhilosophers were useful to the Athenians. 10. The general is skilled in war,. Lesson iL. GENITIVE — Continued. [41-43.] 45. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Predicate Genitive. Rule XVIII. 401. II. Genitive with certain Verbs. Rule XIX. 406. III. Accusative and Genitive. Rule XX. 409. 46. Models. I. It is of small value. I. Parvi pretii est, II. He remembers the past. II. Memtnit praeterito- rum. III. You accuse men of III. Vivos scelcris arguis, crime. ^ 47. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Of small value, parvi pretii. Rule XVIII. 2. Model II. — The past = past things, events, praeieriiOrum, Gen. P\uT. liieut. of praeierittis, ivom praetereo. Rule XIX. PraeterHdrnm rerum slioukl not be used for praeteritOrum, except to avoid real ambi- guity, as it is less euphonious. USE OF THE GENITIVE. 19 PraeteriiOrum would regularly precede the verb, but is made em- phatic by being placed at the end of the sentence. See Gram. 561, II. 3. Or CRIME, sceleris, Gen. of scelus. Kule XX. 48. VOCABTTLAEY. Already, jam, adv. Concerns, it concerns, i-efert, re- tiilit, impers. Esteem, aestlmo, are, avi, atum. Favor, heneficium, ii, n. Folly, stultitia, ae, f. Forget, ohliviscor, i, ohlltus sum, dep. Goodness, horiltas, dtis, f. Gmin, frumentum, t, n. Great, magnus, a, um. Greatly, with inUrest and refeH, magni. High, at a high price, magnoj or magni; with verbs of valuing, magni; very highly, maximi. Integrity, integrftas, atis, f. Interests, it interests, interest, in- terfuit, impers. Never, tiunquam, adv. Pity, misereor, eri, erltus sum, dep. Poor, pauper, eris. Remember, memini, isse. G. 297, 1. Repent, I repent, r:ie paenftet, paenituit. G. 299. Sell, vendo, ere, dldi, ditum. Theft, furtum, i, n. Value, price, pretium, ii, n. 49. Exercise. 1. Virtue is a characteristic of a good man. 2. In- tegrity is of great value. 3. Goodness must be highly esteemed. 4. We esteem goodness very highly. 5. This book will be of great value to us. 6. We pity the poor. 7. I remember your favors. 8. We do not forget our friends. 9. We shall never forget you. 10. They accuse the boy of theft. 11. I have already repented of my folly. 12. He sells grain at a high price. 13. This greatly interests us. 20 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XL USE OF THE ABLATIVE. [44, 45.] Lesson from the Geammab. L.Jblative of pause. Kure XXII. 413. U^^^mi'e^!S:^^^uleXXY, 420. III. Ablative of Price. Rule XXVII. 422. 51. Models. I. He is led by glory. II. You purchased the house at a high price. I. Gloria ducitur. II. Domum magna emis- ti. 52. Remarks. 1. Model I. — By glory, gloria, Abl. Rule XXV. 2. Model II. — At a high price, magno, Abl. Rule XXVII. The Abl. of the adjective is sometimes thus used, preiio being understood. 53- Vocabulary. By, a, ab, prep, with abl. G. 434, N. 2. Glory in, glorior, dri, dius sum, dep. Gold, aurum, t, n. Happiness, success, /uZtcl^as, dtis, f. Horse, equus, equi, m. Judge, judex, ids, m. Mina, mina, ae, f. Not, with imperatives, ne, adv. One, unus, a, um. G. 176. Proud, siiperhus, a, um. Purchase, emo, ire, emi, emptum. Rejoice, gaudeo, ere, gavi.is ewm. G. 268, 3. Scipio, Scipio, Onis, m. Study, studium, ii, n. Talent, talentum, i, n. Thirty, triginta, inded- Valor, virtus, Hits, f. USE OF THE ABLATIVE. 21 54. Exercise. 1. Socrates has often been praised for (because of) his wisdom. 2. They glory in their wealth. 3. This phi- losopher glories in his wisdom. 4. The pupils rejoice in their studies. 5. We are delighted with the precepts of the philosophers. 6. Wisdom is not purchased with gold. 7. Do not sell happiness for gold. 8. The judge has purchased a horse for one talent. 9. I will sell this horse for thirty minae. 10. He is proud of his wealth. 11. Scipio was proud of his country. XII. ABLATIVE — Continued. [46-48.] 55. Lessox from the Grammar. ^^- I. ^Ablative with Comparatives. Rule XXIII. 417. IlT Ablative of Diffei-uiu'e. Rule XXVIII. 423. III. Ablative in Special Constructions. Rule XXVI. 421 ; 414, IV.; 425, 1, note. 56. Models. I. Nothing is more lovely I. Nihil est amabilius . than virtue. virtute^ or Nihil est amabilius quam virtus. II. He preceded me by two II. Biduo me antecessit. days. III. We enjoy very many III. Plurimis rebus frut- things. mur. 22 LATIN COMPOSITION. IV. Safety rests upon truth. IV. JSalus veritate idti- tur. V. I do not need a remedy. V. N'oii egeo ntedicma. VI. They are worthy of VI. Dlyni sunt amicitia. friendship. VII. We need your authori- VII. Auctoritdte tua nobis ty. opus est. 57. Remaeks. 1. Model I. — Tux^ \iwtvte.j quam vhirus ov virtute. Rule XXIII. 417, 1. The Abl. virtute may either follow or precede the compara- tive, amabilius. 2. Model II. — By two days, hiduo^ Abl. of Dif . Rule XXVIII. 3. Model III. — Very many, jt>ZMn>nM, Superl. See G. 160. 4. Things, rebus, Abl. Rule XXVI. I. Rebus is necessary to avoid ambi- guity, because, though plurima may be used substantively, in the sense of very many things, plurXmis would be. ambiguous, as it would not distmguish things from persons, 5. Models IV. V. VI. — Upon truth, a remedy, of friendship, veri- tate, medicma, amicitia, Abls. Rule XXVI. 414, IV. ; 425, 1, note. 6. Medicma wouM regularly precede its verb, but is here emphatic. The regular order in Model VI. would be, Amicitia digni sunt, but as digni is emphatic, it is placed at the beginning of the sentence. See G. 561, 1. 7. Model VII. — We need = there is need to us, nobis opus est. See G. 414, IV. N. 2. Authority, auctoritate, Abl. G. 414, IV. Auctoritdte is emphatic, and is accordingly placed at the beginning of the sentence. 58. Vocabulary. Abound in, abundo, Are, dvi, dium. C&to, Cato, Onis, m. Discharge, fulfil, fungor, i, func- tus sum, dep. Duty, officium, it, n. Enjoy, fruor, t, frtictus or fruUus sum, dep. Five, quinque, indecl. USE OF THE ABLATIVE. 23 Learned, doctus, a, um. Much, with comparatives, multo, adv. Need, there is need, opus est., fuiU Older, "major, oris, or major natu. Relying upon, fretus, a, um. Trust in, confido, ere, fisus sum. Use, ntor, uti, usus sum, dep. Wisely, sapienter, adv. Worthy, dignus, a, um. 59. ExEliCISE. 1. Cicero was more learned than Cato. 2. You are more diligent than your brother. 3. Virtue is better than wisdom. 4. Wisdom is better than gold. 5. Wisdom is dearer to us than gold. 6. You are five years older than I. 7. Your father uses his wealth wisely. 8. We enjoy our studies. 9. We will discharge our duties. 10. This city abounds in wealth. 11. We do not trust in wealth. 12. Your pupils are worthy of praise. 13. I rely (am relying) upon your friendship. 14. We need friends. Lesson XIII. k ABLATIVE — Continued. [49-51.] 60. Lesson yroth the Grammar. I. Ablative of Place. Rule XXX. 425 ; XXI. 412. II. Ablative of Source and Separation. Rule XXII. 413. III. Ablative of Time. Rule XXXI. 429, 430. 61. Models. I. In the forum. II. He was at Rome. III. I ward oiF slaughter from you. I. In foro. II. Romae fuit. III. Caedem a vobis de- pello. 24 LATIN COMPOSITION. IV. He died in his eightieth IV. Octoyestmo anno est year. rnortuus. 62. Remauks. 1. Model II. — Ax Rome, Romae; why Homae, rather than Roma ^ See G. 425, II. 2. Model IV. — In — year, anno. Rule XXXI. Why not in anno f See G. 429, 1, ft. n. Octogesimo is emphatic, and accordingly precedes its noun. See G. 565, 1, 63. Vocabulary. Ago, abhinc, adv. Corinth, Corinthus, i, f. Danger, periculum, i, n. Flee, fugio, ere, fugi, fugUum. Free from, lihiro, are, dvi, dtum. From, a, ab, prep, with abl. Garden, hortus, i, m. Greece, Graecia, ae, f. Keep from, keep off, arceo, ere, cm, ctum. Receive, accipto, ire, cepi, ceptum. Reside, hahUo, are, Avi, dtum. See, video, ere, vidi, visum. Sunset, solis occdsus, us, m. Temple, templum, i, n. Three, tres, tria. Time, tempus, dris, n. Where, uhi, adv. Whole, totus, a, um. G. 151. Winter, hiems, imis, f. 64. Exercise. 1. There were beautiful cities in Greece. 2. Were you in Corinth? 3. We were in Corinth the whole winter. 4. In Athens we saw beautiful temples. 5. Does not your friend reside at Rome? 6. He resides in Athens. 7. He fled from Rome to Athens. 8. I have received two letters from your father, 9. The city has been freed from great dangers. 10. Where were you at sunset? 11. I was in the garden at that time. 12. I was in Rome three years ago. 13. We will keep the enemy from the city. USE OF THE ABLATIVE. 2b Lesson XIV. ABLATIVE — Continued. [52-55.] tty 65. Lesson from the Grammar. ^^. Ablative of Characteristic. Rule XXIV. II. 419. II. Ablative of Specification. Rule XXIX. 424. III. Ablative Absolute. Rule XXXII. 431. IV. Cases with Prepositions. Rule XXXIII. 432-435. 66. Models. I. Piso, a man of the high- I. P^so, vir summa viV" est virtue. tute. II. Piso was a man of the II. Piso summa virtut6 highest virtue. fiiit. III. They are similar in char- III. Moribus similes sunt. acter. IV. They flourished in the IV. Servio regnante vigue- reign of Servius. runt. V. I have written to a friend. V. Ad amicum, scripsi. 67. Remarks. 1. Model I. — A man of the highest virtue, vir summa virtute ; but in the predicate, as in tlie second model, Piso was a man, etc., vir is omitted. See G. 419, 2, 4). As summa is emphatic, it is placed before its noun. See G. 565, L 2. Model III. — In character. Character, manners, mores ; in charac- ter, moribus ; Abl. of Specification. Rule XXIX. 8. Model IV. — In the reign of Seryius = Servius reigning, Servir regnante; Abl, Absol. Rule XXXII. 17 26 LATIN COMPOSITIOIir, 68. Vocabulary. Ancus, Ancus, i, m. Before, ante, prep, with ace. Conspiracy, conjuratio, onis, f. Courage, virtus, utis, f. Eloquence, eloquentia, ae, f. Form, make, /acto, ere, feci, factum. Greek, Graecus, i, m. Light, lux, lucis, f. Mareius, Marcius, ii, m. Remarkable, singularis, e. Spain, Hispania, ae, f. Surpass, supiro, are, avi, dtum. Tarquin, Tarquinius, ii, m. To, adj iprep. with ace. 69. Exercise. 1. The general, a man of remai'kahle courage, will save the city. 2. The general is a man of remarkable courage. 3. Cicero, a man of remarkable eloquence, was consul. 4. The Greeks surpassed the Komans in learn- ing. 5. The Romans surpassed the Greeks in valor. 6. Tarquin came to Rome in the reign of Ancus Marcius. 7. A conspiracy was formed in Rome when Cicero was consul. 8. Scipio was in Spain. 9. Tarquin^ came into Italy. 10. The boy came to me before light. mm came Lesson XV. s^ ADJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. [56-62.] 70. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Agreement of Adjectives. Rule XXXIV. 438, 439. II. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule XXXV. 445. Personal and Possessive Pronouns. 446-449. Demonstrative Pronouns. 450-452. ADJECTIVES. PRONOUNS. 27 Relative Pronouns. 453. Interrogative Pronouns. 454. Indefinite Pronouns. 455-459. 71. Models. I. Fortune is blind. I. II. I who encourage yon. II. III. Wash your hands. III. IV. He loves himself. IV. V. The guardian of this city. V. VI. Who am I ? VI. VII. A certain rhetorician. VII. Fortuna caeca est. Ego qui te conjirmo Manus lava. Se diltgit. Gustos hujus urhis. Quis ego sura f Quidam rhetor. 72. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Blind, caeca, Fern. Sing. Nom. to agree with /oWfiwa. Rule XXXIV. 2. Model II. — Encourage, corifirmo, First Pers. to agree with gill, which is of the First Pers. to agree with the antecedent ego. Eule XXXV. 3. Model III. — Your hands, manus. The possessive, tuas, your, is omitted. See G. 447. 4. Model V. — Of this city. This city, haec urhs ; of this city, hujus urhis. 5. Model VI. — Who, quis ? Why not qui f See G. 454. 73. Vocabulary. Have, haheo, ere, iti, Hum. Instructor, praecepior, oris, m. Make, facio, ere, feci, factum. Modest, modestus, a, um. Peace, pax, pads, f. Some one, a certam one, quaedam, quiddam or quod- dam. G. 190, 2, 1). Yesterday, heri, adv. 28 LATIN COMPOSITION. 74. Exercise. 1. Peace will be acceptable to us. 2. The city will be beautiful. 3. I have seen beautiful cities. 4. The pu- pils are diligent. 5. Your friendship delights me. 6. Your instructor praises you. 7. Which book have you? 8. I have you7' book. 9. True wisdom makes men mod- est. 10. This precept will be useful to me. 11. The precepts of your instructor will be useful to you. 12. Some boys praise themselves. 13. The letter which you wrote yesterday will delight your father. Lesson XYI. agreement of verbs. — indicative. [63-07.] 75. Lesson feom the Grammar. I. Agreement of Verb with Subject. Rule XXXVL 460-463. a. Use of Indicative. Rule XXXVII. 474. Present. 466,467. Imperfect. 468, 469. Future and Future Perfect. 470, 473. Perfect and Pluperfect. 471, 472. 76. Models. I. Cato praised this law. I. Cato hanc legem lau davit. AGREEMENT OF VERBS. — INDICATIVE. 29 II. Cicero and I are well. II. Ego et Cicero va- lemus. ni. I will write to you. III. Scribam ad te. ' 77. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Praised, laudavit, Historical Perfect (G. 471, II.), Third Pers. Sing, to agree with Cato. Rule XXXVI. 2. Model II. — Cicero and I, ego et Cicero. In Latin the First Pers. stands before the Second. 3. Are well, t-altmus, First Pers. Plur. to agree with ego et Cicero. See G. 4G3, 1. 4. Model III. — I will write, scribam, Fut. Why not ego scribam ? See G. 368, 2 ; 446. 5. To you, ad te. This may stand either before or after the verb, though the modifiers of verbs more frequently stand before them. See G. 567. 78. Vocabulary. At, ad, or apud, prep, with accus. ] Pydna, Pydna, ae, f. Conquer, vinco, ire, vici, victum. For his (her, its) own sake, prop- ter sese (se) . Love, amo, are, avi, atum. Macedonia, Macedonia, ae, f. j Wise, sapiens, entis Perseus, Perseus, i, m. ' Servius, Servius, ii, m. Ten, decern, indecl. To-morrow, eras, adv. Tried, spectatus, a, um. 79. Exercise. 1 . By whom was Saguntum taken ? 2 . This city was taken by Hannibal. 3. How many books have you? 4. I have ten good books. 5. Cato was a man of tried vir- tue. 6. We rejoice in your happiness. 7. Who was reigning at that time? 8. King Servius was reigning at Rome. 9. Will you not write to me? 10. I will write 30 LATIN COMPOSITION. to you to-morrow. 11. Virtue must be loved for its own sake. 12. Socrates was judged the wisest of men. 13. Herodotus has been called the father of history. 14. Perseus, the king of Macedonia, was conquered at Pydn W Lesson XVII. tenses and use of the subjunctive. [68-74.] 80- Lesson from the Grammar. I. Sequence of Tenses. Rule XLI. 491, 492. II. Potential Subjunctive. Rule XXXIX. 485, 486. III. Subjunctive of Desire. Rule XXXVIII. 483, 484. IV. Subjunctive of Purpose. Rule XLII. 497-499. V. Subjunctive of Result. Rule XLIII. 500-502. 81. Models. I. Perhaps you may in- I. Forsitan quaeratis. quire. II. Who doubts? II. Quisduhttetf III. Let us love our country. III. Amemus patriam. IV. He strives that he may IV. Enititur ut vincat. conquer. V. I allowed no day to pass V. Nullum intermJsi di- without giving some- e^n quin altquid da- thing. rem. 82. Remarks. 1. MoDKL I, — You MAY INQUIRE, qtMcrdtif, Subj. Rule XLI. Sub- ject vos omitted. See G. 868, 2. TENSES AND USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 31 2. Model II. — Who doubts, or would doubt ?= no one doubts, quis duhitet? question of appeal, Subj. See G. A:SQ, II. 3. Model III. — Let us love, armmus, Subj. of Desire. Rule XXXVIII. The verb is made emphatic by standing at the beginning of the sentence. See G. 561, I. 4. Our country, patriam, possessive omitted. See G. 447. 5. Model FV. — That he may conquer, ut vincat, Subj. of Purpose. Rule XLII. Present tense, because it depends upon a Principal tense, enitttur. Rule XLI. 6. Model V. — I allowed — to pass, intermlsi. 7. Without giving something = but that I gave something, quin alt- quid darem. Darem^ Subj. with quin^ Imperfect tense, dependent upon infermln. See G. 504 ; 493, 1. 8. Nullum — diem are made emphatic by separation. See G. 561, III. 83. VOCABFLARY. Doubt, dubito, are, dvi, atum. So, tarn ; Ha, adv. That, expressing purpose or result, ut, conj. That = but that, quin, conj. 84. Exercise. 1. He praises you (pi.) that he maybe praised by you. 2. He praised you (pi.) that he might be praised by you. 3. They will praise us that they may be praised by us. 4. I do not doubt that you (pi.) have been diligent. 5. We did not doubt that you (pi.) had been diligent. 6. The judge may be accused of folly. 7. Let us obey the laws. 8. May our pupils love virtue. 9. May they be diligent. 10. The pupils are so diligent that they are praised by their preceptor. 11. Let us praise virtue. 12 Let virtue be praised. 32 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XVIII. SUBJUNCTIVE — Continued. [75-82.J 85. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Subjunctive of Condition. Rule XLIY. ; XLV. 507- 513. t^^^^ II. Subjunctive of Concession. Rule XLYI. 515. III. Subjunctive of Cause. Rule XL VII.; XLYIIL 516, 517. IV. Subjunctive of Time with Cause. Rule L.; LI. 510, 520. 86. Models. I. If this is a state, I am a I. Si haec civitas est, citizen. civis sum ego, II. The day would fail me, II. I>ies deficiat^ si nu- if I should recount. merem. III. Wisdom would not be III. Sapientia non expete- sought, if it accom- retur^ si nihil effi- plished nothing. ceret. IV. Though he may deride. IV. Licet irrideat. V. Since life is full of fear. V. Quum vita metus pie- na sit. VI. You are waiting till he VI. Exspectas dam dicaU speaks. 87. Remarks. 1. Model I. — In civis sum ego, regularly ego sum civis, or ego civis sum, civis is emphatic, and is accordingly placed at the beginning of the clause. See G. 5G1, I. 2. !MoDEL II. — Would fail, should recount, deficiat, numh-em^ Subj. Rule XLIV. 509. USE OF THE SUfeJUNCTIVE. 33 3. Model III. — Would be sought, accomplished, expeteretur, efficeret, Subj. Rule XLIV. 510, Imperfect, 510, 1. 4. Model IV. — May deride, irrideat, Subj. of Concession. Rule XLVI. 5. Model V. — Since — is, quum — sit, Subj, of Cause. Rule XLVIII. 6. Model VI. — Till he speaks, that he may speak; dum dicat, Subj. of Cause and Time. Rule L. 88. Vocabulary. Although, quamquam ; licet, etsi, conj. Because, quod, conj. However, quamvis, adv. If, si, conj. Just, Justus, a, um. Read, J^go, ere, legi, ledum. Until, dum, donee, conj. Wait, exspecto, are, dvi, dtum. When, quum, conj. Yet, tamen, adv. 89. Exercise. 1. If they are good, they are happy. 2. If you will be diligent, you will be praised. 3. If you would be diligent, you would be praised. 4. If you (pi.) were diligent, you would be praised. 5. If they had been good, they would have been happy. 6. Although the judge is just, he is yet often blamed. 7. However just he may be, he will often be blamed. 8. You will be praised, because you are diligent. 9. The citizens will praise the judge, because (on the ground that) he is just. 10. We will wait until you read the letter (i. e. that you may read it). 11. We saw beautiful temples, when we were in Rome. ^ 34 LATIN COMPOSITION, Lesson XIX. SUBJUNCTIVE - Continued. [83-85.] 90. Lesson from the Grammar. L Subjunctive in Indirect Questions. Rule LV. 529, I. II. Subjunctive by Attraction. Rule LV. 529, 11. III. Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse. Rule LIII.; LiV, 523, 524. 91. Models. I. What a day may bring I. Quid dies ferat^ i7u forth is uncertain. certum est. II. I fear I shall increase the II. Yereor ne, dum mi- lahoi\ while I wish to nuere velim labo- dirainish it. re77i^ augeam. III. He boasted that he had III. Gloriatus est, annu- made the ring which liim quern haheret he wore. se confecisse. 92. Remarks. 1. Model I. — May bring forth, ferat, Subj. Rule LV. 2. Uncertain, incertum, Nom. Sing. Neut., to agree with the clause quid -ferat. See G. 438, 3 ; 42, note. 3. Model II. — I shall increase = lest I may increase, ne augeam^ Subj. See G. 498, III. 4. While I wish, dum velim. Velim is attracted into the Subjunctive by the Subjunctive augeam. Rule LV. 6. In the arrangement of words and clauses in Model II., observe (1) that the clause dum — lahorem is inserted in the clause wtf — aiigeam (G. 672, I.), and (2) that the object labOrem is expressed in the in- USE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 35 serted clause, dum — laborem, but omitted after augeam. A literal rendering of the Latin would be, I fear lest, while I wish to diminish the labor, I may increase (if). Emphasis places laborem at the end of the clause. See G. 561, II. 6. Model III. — That he had made, se confecisse. Infinitive with Sub- ject Accusative, depending upon gloriattis est. See G. 535, I. 2. Se, not eum, must be used, according to G. 449, 1. 7. Which he wore, had, quern habm-et. Haberet, Subj., because in In- direct Discourse. Rule LIV. The Imperfect is used, because it depends upon an Historical tense, gloriatus est, and denotes Incomplete action. See G. 493, 1. In the language of the one who made the boast, the Indicative would be used, quern habeo, 8. The object annulum would regularly follow the subject se, but is here placed at the beginning of the clause because it is emphatic. 93. Vocabulary. Ask (a question), interrogo, are, dvi, dtum. Do, facio, ere, feci, factuTn. Know, scio, ire, ivi, itum. Not to know, nescio, ire, ivi, itum. Please, placeo, ere, ui, itum, dat. G. 385. Say, dico, ere, dixi, dictum,. Whether, num, adv. G. 529, 1, N. 3. Who, which (relative), qui, quae, quod. 94. Exercise. 1. What did your father say? 2. I do not know what he said. 3. He asks what I have done. 4. He asked what I had done. 5. They ask what I am doing. 6. They asked what I was doing. 7. He asked me to read the letter which he had received. 8. The preceptor praises the pupils, because they are diligent. 9. He says that he praises the pupils, because they are diligent. 10. Did not that letter please your father? 11. I asked whether that letter pleased your father. "XX 36 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XX. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. [86-91.] 95. Lesson feom the Grammar. I. Imperative. Rule XL. 487. IL Subject of Infinitive. Rule LVIII. 536. IIL Infinitive as Subject. 538. IV. Infinitive as Object. 533-535. 96. Models. I. Practise justice. I. Justitiam cole. II. That a citizen should be II. Facinus est vinciri ci bound, is a crime. vem. III. I find that Plato came to III. Platonem Tarentum Tarentum. venisse reperio. 97. Remarks. 1. Model II. — That a citizen should be bound, vinciri civem, or civem vinciri. Tlie latter is the common order, but in the former vinciri and civem are made emphatic. Vinciri civem is tlie subject of est (G. 538), and civem is the subject of vinciri. Rule LVIII. 2. Model III. — That Plato came to Tarentum, riatonem Tarentum venisse, object of the active verb, reperio. See G. 535, I. 1. 3. To Tarentum, Tarentum. Rule X. 98. Vocabulary. Ancient, antiquns, a, tim. Break, offend against, vidlo, dre, &vi, atum. Guard, custodio, ire, ivi, itum. Parent, parens, entis, m. and f. V People = nation, popi^us, t, m. GERUNDS, SUPINES, PARTICIPLES. — PARTICLES. 37 Practise, colo, ere, colui, cultum. Safe, salvus, a, um. Sec that, take care that, euro, ar& dvi, dium. 99. Exercise. 1. Boys, obey the laws, love your parents, imitate the good. 2. Soldiers, see that you guard the city. 3. Ee- member the ancient valor of the Roman people. 4. It is the part of a good citizen to obey the laws. 5. It is the part of a wise man to practise virtue. 6. Ancus was reigning. 7. They say that Ancus was reigning. 8. We know that the city is safe. 9. Do not break the laws. 10. Imitate your father. 11. They say that the city has been taken. 12. It is true that good laws are useful. Lesson XXI. GERUNDS, SUPINES, PARTICIPLES. — PARTICLES. [92-99.] 100. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Gerunds and Gerundives. 541-544. II. Supines. 545-547. III. Supine in um. Rvle LIX. 546. IV. Participles. 548-550. V. Use of Adverbs. Rule LXI. 551-553. VI. Use of Conjunctions. 554, 555. 101. Models. I. The art of living. I. Ars vivendi. II. We are inclined to II. Ad discendum pr^^ learn. pensi sumus. 38 III. For cultivating the fields. lY. By readingthe orators. V. He has come to con- gratulate you. YI. Plato died while writ- ing. YIL Laelius was living hap- VIJL You and Tullia are well. LATIN COMPOSITION. III. Ad colendos agros. TV. Legendis oratort- bus. Y. Venit tihi gratidd- tum. YI. Plato scribens mor- tuus est. YII. Laelius beate vive- bat. YIII. Tu et Tullia vale- tis. 102. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Or living, vivendi, Gen. of Gerund, depending upon ars. Rule XVI. 2. Model III. — For cultivating the fields, ad colendos agros ; colendos, Gerundive agreeing with agros. See G. 543. Ad colendum agros should not be used. See G. 544; 542, III. N. 1. 3. Model IV. — Legendis is Gerundive, agreeing with oratortbus^ Legendo oraiores may also be used. 4. Model V. — To congratulate, gratvlatnm, Sup. Rule LIX. 5. Model VI. — While writing, scribens, Participle, G. 549, 1. 6- Model VIII. — Are well, vaUtis, Second Pcrs. Plur., G. 463, 1. 103. YOCABULARY. Act, ago. Pre, egi, actum. Agreeable, jucundus, a, urn. Ambassador, legdtus, i, m. And, et ; atqne ; que, enclitic. G. 554, I. 2. Ask for, seek, peto, ire, ^^dir?, petltum. Either — or, aid — aut, conj. Happily, he&te, adv. Hear, audio, ire, ivi. Hum. Inclined, propensus, a, um. Learn, disco, ire, didici. lAye,*vivo, ire, vixi, victum. Neither — nor, neqve — neque ; nee — 7ier. Play, ludo, ire, lust, lusum. ^ Terrify, terreo, ire, vi, Hum. i GENDER. FORMATION OF CASES. 39 104. Exercise. 1. We are desirous of living happily. 2. The art of reading will be useful to us. 3. Are you (pi.) not de- sirous of learnino^ wisdom ? 4. We are desirous of learninof wisdom. 5. Boys are inclined to play. 6. Men are in- clined to act. 7. We learn by teaching. 8. They will send ambassadors to ask for peace. 9. This is agreeable to hear. 10. The soldiers, being terrified, fled. 11. Let us imitate the good and wise. 12. He is either in Rome or in Athens. 13. They were neither in Rome nor in Athens. ^ Lesson XXII. GENDER. FORMATION OF CASES. [100-111.] 105. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Gender. 48, 51, 99-116, 120. IT. Formation of Cases. 62-65 ; 69-98. 106. Models. I. He yields to the time. I. Tempori cedit. II. In winter and summer. II. Ilieme et aestdte. HI. Cato's orations. III. Catonis orationes. 107. Remarks. 1. Model I. — To the time, temp6ri, Dat. Rule XII. 2. Model II. — I\ winter, hieme, Abl. Rule XXXI. 3. Model III. — Cato's, Catonis, Gen. Rule XVI. The Genitive 40 LATIN COMPOSITION. more commonly follows its noun, but may precede, especially when emphatic. G. 565, 1. 4. Give the Gender of all the nouns in the Models. 108* Vocabulary. Battle, proeUum, ii, n. Brave, /0WV5, e. Demand, postulo, are, dvi, dtum. Despair of, despero, are, dvi, dtum, with ace, or de with abl. Prom, a or ab ; e or ex. Incite, inc^to, are, dvi, dtum. Incursion, incursio, Onis, f. Reward, merces,'edis, f. Safe, secure, tutus, a, urn. Safety, solus, uiis, f. Small, parvus, a, um. Timid, timXdus, a, um. Trumpeter, tubtcen, Inis, m. 109. Exercise. 1. The trumpeter incites the brave soldiers to battle. 2. The brave soldiers are incited to battle by the trum- peter. 3. The citizens have despaired of safety. 4. Let us not despair of safety. 5. Timid men often despair of safety. 6. Br^ave soldiers will never despair of their country. 7. The citizens are safe from the incursions of the enemy. 8. Let us not be timid in danger. 9. A reward must be demanded. 10. We will demand a smaU reward. Lesson XXIIL GENDER AND FORMATION OF CASES — Continued. [112-147.] 110. Vocabulary. Admonish, admdneo, ere, ui, Uum. t ra, altirum. G. 161. Another, alius, a, ud ; alter, alt£- ' Bravely, forilier, adv. SYNOPSIS OF CONJUGATION. 41 Common, communis, e. Content, contentus, a, um. 'Easy,facilis, e. Ennius, JEJnnius, n, m. Fight, pugno, are, dvi, atum. Herald, praeco, onis, m. Hope, spes, spci, f. Liberate, libSro, are, avi, dtum. Name, nomen, inis, n. Not yet, nondurn, adv. Poem, poema, dtis, n. Proclaim, procldmo, dre, dvi, dtum> Rule, dominatio, onis, f. Son, Jilius, ii, m. G. 51. 5. Tyrant, tyrannus, i, m. Victor, victor, oris, m. Xenophon, Xenophon, ontis, m. 111. Exercise. 1. Hope is common to all men. 2. It is easy to ad- monish another. 3. The brave soldiers fought most bravely. 4. The son of Xenophon fought bravely. 5. Xenophon heard that his son had fought bravely. G. Herald, proclaim the name of the victor, 7. The names of the victors will be proclaimed by the heralds. 8. Have you not read the poems of Ennius? 9. I have not yet read them. 10. They liberated the city from the rule of the tyrants. 11. Let us be content with our books. Lesson XXIV. >^ SYNOPSIS OF CONJUGATION. FORMATION OF THE ^ PARTS OF THE VERB. [148-168.] 112. LeSS02^^ FEOSf THE GRAMMAR. L Synopsis of Conjugation. 223-232. II. Formation of the Parts of the Verb. 220-222; 241- 256. 18 42 LATIN COMPOSITION. 113. Models. I. I will write to you what I think. II. He will conquer his dis- position and com- mand himself. I. Ad te scribam quid sentiam. II. Vincet ammuyn sibt- que infiperuhit. 114. Remarks. 1. Model I. — I think, sentiam, Subj. in Indirect Question. See G. 529, 1. 2. Model II. — His. The possessive should here be omitted in Latin. See G. 447. 3. Give the Principal Parts and the Synopsis of the Verbs in the Models. 115. Vocabulary. Alba Longa, Alba Longa, Alhae Longae, f. Ascanius, Ascanius, it, m. Citadel, arx, arcis, f. Early, ancient, antlquus, a, um. Enlarge, ampUo, are, dvi, dtum. Found, condo, Ire, dldi, ditum. Priscus, Priscus, i, m. Romulus, Romulus, i, m. Saturnia, Saturnia, ae, f. Succeed, succedo, ire, cessi, cessuniy dat. G. 380. Tullius, Tidlius, ii, m. 116. Exercise. 1. The citadel was called Saturnia. 2. Did not As- canius found a city in Italy? 3. He founded a city in very early times. 4. He is said to have founded a city in very early times. 5. They say that he founded a city. 6. The city was called Alba Longa. 7. Who founded Rome? 8. Romulus founded Rome. 9. Who enlarged FORMATION OF THE PARTS OF VERBS. 43 the city? 10. King Ancus enlarged the city. 11. Whom did Servius Tullius succeed? 12. King Servius suc- ceeded Tarquinius Priscus. Lesson XXY. FORMATION OF THE PARTS OF VERBS — Continued. [169-184.] 117. Vocabulary. Against, contra, in, prep, with ace. Camillus, Camillus, i, m. Conspire, conjuro, are, dvi, dtum. V iihlQ, fahula, ae, f. Field, ager, agri, m. Fire, ignis, ignis, m. Lay waste, vasto, are, dvi, dtum. Porsena, PorsSna, ae, m. Relate, narro, dre, dvi, dtum. Sword, ferrum, i, n., lit. iron; with fire and sword, ferro ignique. With, cum, prep, with abl. Youth, juvinis, is, m. and f. 118. Exercise. 1. What ought to be done? 2. I will ask my father what ought to be done. 3. Ask your father what ought to be done. 4. Who conquered the enemy? 5. Camillus is said to have conquered the enemy. 6. They were con- quered in a great battle. 7. The youths conspired against king Porsena. 8. Will you (pi.) not make peace with the enemy? 9. We are making peace with the enemy. 10. I will relate to you this fable. 11. The enemy will lay waste the fields with fire and sword. 44 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XXVI. FORMATION OF THE PARTS OF VERBS — Continued. [185-200.] 119. Vocabulary. Be subject to, obey, pareo, ere, ui, Hum, dat. Cannae, Cannae, arum, f. pi. Carthaginian, Poenus, i, m. ; Car- thaginiensis, is, ra. and f. Fight, battle, pugna, ae, f. Formerly, quondam, adv. Friendly, amicus, a, um. In y2im, frustra, adv. Naval, namlis, e ; naval battle, naval engagement, pugna navalis. New Carthage, Carthago Nova, Carthaglnis Novae, f. Once, semel, adv. Publius, Puhlius, it, m. State, civUas, dtis, f. Try, tenia, are, avi, alum. Victory, victoria, ae, f. Village, vicus, i, m. 120. Exercise. 1. Who took New Carthage? 2. Publius Scipio is said to have taken that city. 3. Peace will be tried in vain. 4. We will try peace once. 5. They called the village Cannae. 6. Many states of Italy were formerly subject to the Romans. 7. Saguntum was friendly to the Romans. 8. The Romans conquered the Carthaginians in (by) a naval battle. 9. This victory was most ac- ceptable to the soldiers. 10. Victory is always acceptable to soldiers. FORMATION OF THE PARTS OF VERBS. 4.0 Lesson XXYII. FORMATION OF THE PARTS OF VERBS — Continued. [201-214.] 121. Vocabulary. Among, inter, prep, with ace. Booty, praeda. ae, f. Caesar, Caesar, dris, m. Capua, Capua, ae, f. Cleopatra, Cleopatra, ae, f. Coat of mail, lorlca, ae, f. Come to the relief of, siibvenio, Ire, v&ni, ventum. Divide, divldo, ere, vlsi, visum. Egypt, Aegyptus, i, f. Find, invenio, ire, veni, ventum. Golden, aureus, a, um. Mithridates, Mithriddie&^ is, m, Nile, Nilus, i, m. Ptolemy, Ptolemaeus, i, m. Queen, reglna, ae, f. School, ludus, i, m. Sulla, Sulla, ae, ra. 122. Exercise. 1. Will you not come to the relief of your country? 2. We ask you to come to the relief of your country. 3. He says that he will come to the relief of his country. 4. By whom was Mithridates conquered ? 5 . He was con- quered in many battles by Sulla. 6. He was conquered in Greece. 7. This school w^as at Capua. 8. Cleopatra was queen of Egypt. 9. The soldiers will divide the booty among themselves. 10. Ptolemy, king of Egypt, was conquered by Caesar. 1 1 . The king's golden coat of mail was found in the Nile. 46 lati:n composition. M ..-i^ ^ : Lesson XXVIII. IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL Vi:RBS. [215-221.] 123. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Irregular Verbs. 289-296. II. Defective Verbs. 297. III. Impersonal Verbs. 298-301. 124. Models. I. Who proposed the law ? I. Quis legem tulitf IL I should prefer to be II. Ego me Phidiam esse Phidias. mallem. III. They began to be cred- III. Creduli esse coeperunt. ulous. IV. It is proper that this IV. Hoc fieri oportet. should be done. 125. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Should prefer, mallem, Potential Subj. NSee G. 485. 2. To BE = that I should be, me esse, depending upon mallem. See G. 685, III. 3. Model III. — Credulous, eredUli^ Nom., agreeing with the subject of eoeperunt. Sec G. 536, 2, 1). 4. Model IV. — That this should be done, hoc fiSri, subject of opor- tet. See G. 538, 1. 5. Give the Synopsis of the Irregular, Defective, and Impersonal Verbs in the Models. IRKEGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL VERBS. 47 126. Vocabulary. Approve, proho, are, dvi, dtum. Be able, can, possum, posse, potui. Forces, copiae, drum, f. pi. From, out of, e, ex, prep, with abl. G. 43-1, N. 2. Gaul, the country, Gallia, ae, f. Gaul, a Gaul, Gall us, i, m. Lacedaemonian, Lacedaemonius, it, m. Lead out, educo, ere, duxi, ductum. Leonidas, Leonidas, ae, m. Occupy, occupo, dre, dvi, dtum. Plan, consilium, ii, n. Renew, instauro, d7'e, dvi, dtum. Return, go back, redeo, Ire, i% itum. So, so greatly, to such an extent, adeo, adv. Thermopylae, Thermopylae, drum, f.pl. Wage against, infero, ferre, tuli, illdtum. 127. Exercise. 1. Caesar was waging war against the Gauls. 2. War has been waged against us. 3. Caesar had returned from Gaul to Rome. 4. Leonidas was king of the Lacedae- monians. 5. The Lacedaemonians sent their king Leoni- das to occupy Thermopylae. 6. We led out our forces from the city. 7. The enemy were so terrified that they fled. 8. Were they able to renew the war? 9. They were not able to renew the war. 10. Do you (pi.) not approve my plan? 11. We approve it. 12. It will be approved by all. 48 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XXIX. IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL VERBS Continued. [222-229.] 128. Vocabulary. Begin, coepi^ coepisse. Engagement, fight, proelium, it, n., pug7ia, ae, f. Finish, bring to a close, fiyiio, ire, Ivi, Hum, Leuctra, Leuctra, drum, n. pi. Observe, servo, are, dvi, atum. Six, sex, indecl. Wish, volo, velle, volui. 129. Exercise. 1. Did not the enemy fortify the city ? 2. They began to fortify the city. 3. Do you (pi.) not ivish to fortify the city? 4. We i^«*«A to fortify it. 5. Shall we not be able to fortify it? 6. You (pi.) will be able to fortify it. 7. The war was brought to a close (finished) by a naval engagement. 8. Will you (pi.) not give me this book as a present? 9. W^e will give you six boohs as a present. 10. This peace will be observed many years. 11. The Lacedaemonians were conquered at Leuctra. \ Lesson XXX. IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL VERBS — Continued. [230-245.] 130. Vocabulary. Agis, Agis, Idis, m. j Conceal, celo, dre, dvi, dtum, Chaeronea, Chaeronea, ae, f. | Joy, gaudium, ii, n. IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL VERBS. 49 Liberty, libertas, dtt's, f. Pericles, Pericles^ is, m. Pliilip, Philippus, i, m. Prefer, would rather, malo, malle, malui. Present, dono, are, avi, dtum. Preside over, praesum, esse, fui. Recover, recupero, are, avi, dtum. Republic, res publtca, rei publi- cae, f. 131. Exercise. 1. Pericles at that time presided over the republic. 2. He is said to have presided over the republic many years. 3. Philip wished to wage war against the Athenians. 4. War was waged by Philip against the Athenians. 5. Philip conquered the Athenians at Chaeronea. 6. The victor wished to conceal his joy. 7. Many wish to rule. 8. I prefer to obey. 9. The Athenians wished to present the general with a golden crown. 10. The Lacedaemoni- ans wished to recover their liberty. 1?^IIT SECOND, LATIN SYNTAX. Lesson XXXI SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. [1,3.]^ \ 132. Lesson fkom the Gkammar. I. Case of Subject. 368. II. Agreement of Verb. 460, III. Arrangement of Subject and Predicate. 560. lY. Effect of Emphasis and Euphony. 561. 133. Models. . I. Scipio was made consul. I. Sdjyio factus est con- II. Demosthenes himself does II. JVbbis 7ion satisfttcU not satisfy us. ipse Demosthenes. * This portion of the work is intended to accompany the reading of Caesar's Commentaries on tlie Gallic War. The enclosed numerals standing at the beginning of each lesson refer to Books and Chapters in that work. Thus [1, 3] denotes Book I. Chap. III., and shows that tliis lesson is to he learned after the }nipil has read the first three Chap- ters of the first Book. (50) SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 51 134. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Demosthenes himself, ipse Demosthenes. These words, which would regularly stand at the beginning of the sentence, are placed at the end because emphatic. See G. 561, II. 2. Us, nobis, Dative depending upon satisfacit. Rule XII. See also G. 385, N. 3. Nobis, being emphatic, stands at the beginning of the sentence. G. 561, I. 135. Y >< ABULARY. Accomplish, conficio, Src, feci, fc-- Eloquent, elogvens, entis. turn. , Establish, conjirmo, are, dvi, dtiim. Adjacent, nearest, proxlmus, a, i German, Germanus, i, m. urn. G. 166. Among, with, near to, apud, prep. with ace. Belgians, Belgae, arum, m. pi. Borders, territory, fines, finiarr, m. pi. He, she, it, is, ea, id. G. 451. Keep from, proMheo, ere, ui, Hum. G. 414, I. Wage, gero, ere, gessi, gestum. 136. Exercise. 1. The Romans surpassed the Gauls in valor. 2. The Gauls were surpassed in valor by tlie Romans. 3. The Romans praised their own valor. 4. Cicero was the most eloquent of the Romans. 5. He was the most eloquent among the Romans, 6. The Belgians waged many wars with the Germans. 7. All these things must be accom- plished by us at the same time. 8. Peace must be estab- lished with the adjacent states. 9. The enemy must be kept from our borders. 10. War must be waged in the territory of the enemy. 52 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XXXII. FORMS OF SUBJECT. [1, 6.] y 137. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Subject — Noun or Pronoun, expressed or implied. 368, 1. II. Subject — Infinitive, Clause with Conjunction, Indirect Question. 538 ; 499, 3 ; 501, I. ; 540, I. ni. Simple Subject. 358. IV. Complex Subject. 359. V. Agreement of Verb with Compound Subject. 463. 138. Models. I. Glory follows virtue. I. Gloria virtutem se- qmtur. II. They are led by glory. II. Gloria ducuntur. III. That an orator should III. Oratorem irasci mi- he angry is by no nime decet.^ means becoming. IV. It remains for me to IV. Reltquum est, ut te supplicate you (that orem. I should supplicate you). V. It is asked what ought V. Quaeritur quid agen- to be done. dum sit. VI. Habit and reason have VI. Consuetudo et ratio made you gentle. te lenem feciriint. VII. Marcus and I are well. VII. Ego et 3farcus vale- mus. FORMS OF SUBJECT. 53 139. Remarks. 1. Model II. — They are l-et>, ducuntur. The subject is omitted, being implied in the ending of the verb. See G. 368, 2. 2. By glory, gloria, Abl. Rule XXV. 3. Model III. — That an orator should be angry, oratorem irasci, an Infinitive with a subject, used as the subject of decet. See G. 538, 1. 4. By no means, miiilme, least, least of all things. It qualifies decet. Rule LXI. 5. Model IV. — It remains =is left, reliquum est. 6. For me to supplicate you = that I should supplicate you, ut te orem, a clause expressing both subject and result. See G. 501, I. Such clauses usually follow the predicate. 7. Model V. — What ought to be done, quid agendum sit, indi- rect question, subject of quaerltur. See G. 540, I. For the Subjunc- tive, see G. 629, I. 8. Model VII. — Marcus and I, ego et Marcus. In compound sub- jects and objects, the Latin places the first person before the second or third. 9. Are well, vaUmus. For person, see G. 463, 1. 140. Vocabulary. Bum, burn up, exnro, ii'e, ussi, ustum. Encounter, subeo, ire, ii, Xtum. G. 295. Helvetians, Helvetii, drum, m. pi. Marcus, Marcus, i, m. Of, concerning, de, prep, with abl. Persuade, persuddeo, ere, suasi, sudsum, dat. G. 385. Prepared, pardtus, a, um. Remains, it remains, reliquum, est {ut with subj.) Speak, dico, ire, dixi, dictum. Town, oppldum, i, n. Uncertain, incertus, a, um. 141. ExERriSE. 1. The Helvetians will burn their towns and villages. 2. All the towns and villages will be burned. 3. The 5 54 LVTIN COMPOSITION. soldiers are prepared to encounter these dangerp. 'd. Marcus and I were prepared to encounter all dangers. 5. W(i ha\x seen the bciiutiful cit} . (). You and Marcus did not see that city. 7. It will be ea^y to persuade your father. 8. You and Marcus will easily persuade my father. 9. Whether that city was taken is unc ertain, 10. It remains for me to speak of this city. Lesson XXXIII. forms of predicate. [1, 9.] 142. Lesson from the Gbammab. :^ I. Predicate — Verb, Noun, Adjective, Infinitive. 360, 539, I. II. Simple Predicate. 360. III. Complex Predicate. 361 with 1, 2. 3. IV Agreement of Predicate with Subject. 460, 362, 438. 1. Verb with Subject. 460. 2. Predicate Noun with Subject. 362. 3. Predicate Adjective with Subject. 438, 2. 143. Models. I. The world is subject to I. Mundus Deo paret. God. II. Gorgias was a rhetori- II. Gorgias fuit rJietor, cian. III. The reasons are most III. Causae justisstmae just. sunt. IV. To live is to think. IV. Vivere est cogitare. FORMS OF PREDICATE. 55 V. He stated his opinion. V. Sententiam dixit. VI. These things are accept- VI. Ilaec populo grata at- able and agreeable to quejucunda sunt. the people. 144. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Most just, justissimae, superlative, in the Nom. Fem. Plur. to agree with causae. Rule XXXIV. It may stand either before or afler sunt. 2. Model IV. — To live, viv^re, subject of est. See G. 538. 3. To THINK, cogitdre, predicate nominative after est. See G. 539, I. 145. Synonymes. Leader, commander ; dtix, imperdtor. 1. Dux., ducts., m. ; leader, general, — considered simply in his capacity as the leader of troops. 2. Imperdtor., oris., m. ; commander, general, — with special reference to his authority and rank as commander, — a higher title than dux. 146. Vocabulary^ Call, appeUo, nomino, voco, are, di'i, dtum. See Syn. 184. Celts, Celtae, drum, m. pi. Commander, imperdtor, oris, m. Fear, metuo, ere, ui. G. 272, N. 1. Language, tongue, lingua, ae, f. Leader, dux, ducis, ra. and f. Not only — but also, non solum - sed etiam. 147. Exercise. 1. The Gauls were the enemies of the Romans. 2. We have been called the friends of the Gauls. 3. The Gauls were called in their language Celts. 4. The Belgi- 56 LATIN COMPOSITION. ans were very brave. 5. Caesar was the commander of the Eomans. 6. The Komans did not fear the leaders of the enemy. 7. The Romans called Cicero the father of his country. 8. Peace and friendship will be established with the enemy. 9. It is easy to encounter these dangers. 10. The Romans not only waged war with the Gauls, but also conquered them. Lesson XXXIV. FORMS OF MODIFIERS. [1, 12.] 148. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Modifiers of Subject — Adjectives, Nomis. 359, N. 1. ll. Modifiers of Verb Predicate — Objective Modifiers, Adverbial Modifiers. 361, 1. / in. Modifiers of Predicate Noun. 361, 2. IV. Modifiers of Predicate Adjective. ^ 361, 3. V. Position of Modifiers in the Sentence. 565-568. 149* Models. I. Good men love equity. I. Viri boni aequitdtem amant. II. The name of peace is II. N'omen pads est dtd- pleasing. ce. III. I greatly feared the voy- III. Namgatidnem valde a^ ' Antiquus refers to the remote past ; while pristinus generally refers to the more recent past, or else has the force oi primitive, pristine. 62 LATIN COMPOSITION. >^ Lesson XXXYII. agkeement of nouns. [1, 24.] 164. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Agreement of Predicate Nouns. 362. II. Agreement of Appositives. 363. 165. Models. I. Virtues are the attend- ants and companions of wisdom. II. Artemisia was the wife of Mausolus^ king of Caria. III. Two most powerful cit- ies, Carthage and Nu- mantia,were destroyed by Scipio. IV. He learned when a boy what deserved to be learned. I. Yirtutes sunt mims- trae comitesqiie sor pientiae. II. Artemisia \ 3fausoli, Cariae regis, uxor fuit. III. Duae urbes 2)otentisst- mae, Carthago at- que Numantia, a Scipidne sunt dele- tae. IV. Puer didtcit, quod dis^ cendum/uit. 166. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Attendants, ministrae, not minisiri, to agree in gender with virtutes. See G. 362, 1. 2. Model II. — King of Caria, Cariae regis, or regis Cariae. Regis is in the Gen. in apposition with Maiisoli. Tlie whole sentence could be arranged in the Englisli order : Artemisia fuit uxor MausOli, regis Cariae. But in that form it would lose not only in point of euphony, but also of compactness ; the modifier, regis Cariae, would be merely an AGREEMENT OF NOUNS. 63 awkward addition to the sentence, while in the model it is incorporated into the very structure of the sentence itself. 3. Model III. — Two most powerful cities, diiae urhes potentissl- mae. Here potentissimae qualifies urhes, while duae qualifies the com- plex idea, urhes potentissimae ; not two cities, but two most powerful cities. In such cases one adjective often precedes the noun, while the other follows it, as in the model, though both may either precede or fol- low the noun. 4. Model IV. — When a boy, puer, in apposition with the omitted subject of didicit. See G. 363, 2 and 3, 2). 5. Deserved to be learned, discendum fuit, Periphrastic Conjuga- tion. See G. 234. 167. Synonymes. Custom, usage, habit ; consuetudo^ mos. 1. Consuetudo^ mis^ f. ; custom, usage, habit, — the generic word for custom of any kind. 2. Mos^ moris, m. ; custom, — used chiefly of approved and established customs, especially if national. Mores, plur., character. 168. Vocabulary. Caria, Caria, ae, f. Custom, habit, consuetudo, inis, f. : mos, moris, m. Destroy, deleo, ere, evi, etum. Excellent, praeclarus, a, um. Mausolus, Mausolus, i, m. Nature, natura, ae, f. Numantia, Numantia, ae, f. Powerful, potens, entis. Second, another, alter, Sra, irum. G. 151. 169. Exercise. 1. Mausolus was at that time king of Caria. 2. Rome was for many years a most powerful city. 3. They say that Carthage was formerly a most powerful city. 4. Did 64 LATIN COMPOSITION. you not say that Caesar was the commander of the Moman ariyiy ? 5. Cicero says that the two cities, Carthage and Numantia, were destroyed by Scipio, tlie commander of the Roman army. 6. Habit is a second nature. 7. We say that habit is a second nature. 8. From whom (pi.) did you receive that excellent custom? 9. We received this excellent custom from our fathers. Lesson XXXVIII. A NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. [1, 29.] 170. Lesson from the Grammar. / I. Nominative as Subject. 368. II. Kominative in Agreement with another Nominative. 362 and 363. III. Vocative. 369. 171. Models. I. Socrates was condemned. I. Socrates damnatus est. II. Themistocles the com- II. Themistocles impera- mander liberated tor servitute Grae- Greece from servitude. ciam liberdvit. III. I approve your decision, III. Tuum^ Brute^ judici- Brutus. wm proho. 172. Remarks. 1. Model II. — The commander, imperStor, Noni. In apposition with the Nom. TJiemistddes. Rule II. 2. From servitude, servitute, Abl. of Separation. Rule XXII. NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE. 65 See also G. 414, N. 1. Servitute may stand either before or after the direct object, Graeciam. 3. Model III. — Your, tuum. The possessive should here be ex- pressed to avoid ambiguity. 4. Brutus, Bride. For the place of the Vocative in the sentence, see G. 569, VI. 173. Vocabulary. Allobroges, Allobroges, um, m. pi. CoUatinus, Collatinus, i, m. Condemn, damno, are, avi, atum. Crassus, Crassns, i, m. First, prirmis, a, um. G. 166. Geneva, Geneva, ae, f. God, deus, del, m. G. 51, 6. Grandson, nepos, otis, m. Junius, Junius, ii, m. Lucius, Lucius, ii, m. Lucullus, Luculliis, i, m. Mercury, Mercurius, ii, m. Numitor, Numltor, oris, m. Quintus, Quintus, i, m. Rich, dives, Uis. G. 165, N. 2. When, interrog., quando, adv. 174. Exercise. 1. Crassus and Lucullus were the richest of the Ro- mans. 2. Mercury was the messenger of the gods. 3. Romulus, the first king of the Romans, was the grandson o^ Numitor. 4. We have praised the good, and wQhave been praised by the good. 5. Caesar says that Geneva is a town of the Allobroges. 6. Lucius Junius Brutus and Lucius Tarquinius Collatinus were made consuls. 7. When, Labienus, will you cross the river? 8. Why, O judges, did you condemn Socrates? 9. Marcus Tullius Cicero and Quintus Tullius Cicero were brothers. ^Q LATIN CO]ttPOSITION, yy-^' Lesson XXXIX. ACCUSATIVE AS DIRECT OBJECT. [1, 32.] 175. Lesson from the Gkammab. Accusative as Direct Object. 871. I'~\ — 1. Cognate Accusative. 371, I. 1). ^ 2. Accusative with other Cases. 384, II. • 409 ; 421, K 1. \-~. -5-/--f • S ^■ ^ 3. Transitive and Intransitive Verbs. 371, III. and notes. 4. Accusative with Compounds. 372. » \ 5. Clause as Object. 371, IV. ^ 6. Passive Construction. 464. M 176. Models. I. Brutus freed his country. I. Brutus patriam libe- ravit. II. They live a secure life. II. Tutam vitam vwu7it. III. They wrote laws for their III. Zeges civitattbus suis states. scripserunt. IV. They were sighing over IV. Haec gemebant. these things. V. He crossed the Euphra- V. Euphratem transiit, tes. VI. You know that I think VI. Sets me idem seiitire. the same. 177. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Their states, civitaUhus suis, Dat. Rule XII. See also 384, II. Theae words may stand cither before or after the di- rect object, leges. See G. 567, 3. Suis must be expressed to avoid ambi- guity. ACCUSATIVE AS DIRECT OBJECT. 67 2. Model IV. — These things, haec or has res. The former is preferable, because it is shorter and equally clear. 3. Model Y. — Euphratem. See G. 372. 4. Model VI. — That I think the same, me idem sentire, object of scis. G, 371, IV. For the case of me, see G. 536 ; for that of idem, 371, 1. 2, 1), 178. Synonymes. Army ; exercitus^ agmen^ acies. 1. £Jxercitus, i, m. (exerceo) ; army, — the generic word for array, as composed of disciplined men. 2. Agmen, agminis^ n. (ago) ; army on the march. 8. Acies^ ei, f. ; army in battle array ; line of bat- tle. 179. Vocabulary. Army (on the march), agmen, inis, n. Arrange (a line of battle) , insiruo, ere, struxi, structum. As, relat. after idem, qui, quae, quod. Attack, adorior, iri, ortus sum, dep. Base, turpis, e. Boast, make a boast, glorior, ari, atus sum, dep. Both — and, et — et. Camp, castra, drum, n. pi. G. 132. Encamp, castra pono, ere, posui, positum. Ford, vadum, i, n. Immense, ingens, entis. Laelius, Laelius, it, m. Gram. 51, 5. Large, magnus, a, um. Lead (a life), live, vivo, ere, vixi, I'idum. Life, vita, ae, f. Line of battle, acies, aciei, f. March, journey, iter, itiniris, n. ; on the march, in itin&re. Now, nunc, adv. Number, numerus, i, m. Place, locus, i, m. G. 141. Ehine, Rhenus, i, m. Take, carry, porto, are, dvi, atum. Think, judge, sentio, ire, sensi, sensiim. Useless, inutllis, e. 68 LATIN COMPOSITION. 180. Exercise. 1. Have you not many friends? 2. Both you and I have a very large number of friends. 3. An immense army crossed the Rhine and encamped in Gaul. 4. The commander of the enemy arranged his line of battle. 5. The enemy will attack our army on the inarch. 6. At this place the Rhine is crossed by a ford. 7. You^ Laeliirw, have lived a most happy Yy^q. 8. Has he not led a W5e/e56' life ? 9. Do not lead a 6«se life. 10. Did you not make that boast? 11. I made the same boast as you. 12. We will endeavor to take with us all the grain which we now have. 13. You think the same as ^1 good men. Lesson XL. TWO ACCUSATIVES. [1, 37.] * 181. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Two Accusatives — Same Person. 373. 1. Predicate Accusative. 373, 1. ^.^ 2. Verbs with Predicate Accusative. 3?^, N. 1. 3. Adjective as Predicate Accusative. 373, N. 2. Passive Construction. 373, 2. n. Two Accusatives — Person and Thing. 374. 1. Person and Thing — Active and Passive. 374, 1, 2. Verbs with two Accusatives. 374, 2. TWO ACCUSATIVES. 69 182. Models. I. Panaelius calls Plato the I. Panaetius Platonem Homer of pliiloso- Ilomerum philoso- phers, phorum appellat. II. Panaetius calls Plato tli- II. Panaetius Platonem vine. dimnum, appellat. III. I was asked my opinion. III. Ego sentenUam roga- tiis sum. IV. I ask of you this favor. IV. Te hoc heneficium rogo. V. We will surely retain in V. Quod nos docuisti^ id memory that which certe merhoria reti' you have taught us. nebimus. 183. Remarks. 1. Model III. — My opinion, sentenUam. Rule VII. The Posses- sive is omitted. See G. 447. 2. Model V. — In memory = by means of memory, memoria, Abl- of Means. Rule XXV. The relative clause often precedes the antece- dent clause, as in this model (G. 5*72, II.), and then the antecedent itself generally stands at the beginning of its own clause. 184. Synonymes. To call, to name ; appello, voco, nommo. 1. Appello^ are, dvi, a turn ; (1) to call, to name, — espe- cially with the idea of calling a person (or thing) by his true name, or of giving him a characteristic title ; (2) to address. 2. Voco, are, avi, a turn ; (1) to call, — generally with special reference to pronouncing or speaking the name ; (2) to summon, invite. 3. Nomino, are, am, dtum ; to name, — to give a name. 70 LATIN COMPOSITION. 185. Vocabulary. Ariovistus, Ariovistus, t, m. Blind, caecus, a, um. Calamity, calamlias, atis, f. Conceal, celo, are, avi, atum. Dinner, coena, ae, f. Favor, faveo, 6re, favi, fautum. Fortune, /or^Mwa, ae, f. Invite, voco, are, avi, atum. Make, efflcio, Sre, feci, fectum. Mourn over, maereo ere. G. 262, N. 2. Name, nomen, inis, n. Name, to name, call, nomXno ; ap- pello ; voco, are, avi, atum. Senate, senatus, us, m. 186. Exercise. 1. The senate called Ariovistus king and friend. 2. Let us call the commander of the army by 1/is own name. 3. I have invited your brother to dinner. 4. Eomulus ordered the city to be called Rome from his own name. 5. Fortune often makes those whom she favors blind, 6. You have made your life happy and useful. 7. Who tauffht the Beldans the arts of war? 8. Were not the Germans taught the arts of war by Ariovistus? 9. Why were we not asked our opinion ? 10. Let us ask them their opinion. 11. They will mourn over this calamity. 12. I will not conceal from you my opinion. Lesson XLI. TWO ACCUSATIVES — Continued. SPECIAL CON- STRUCTIONS. [1,40.] 187. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Special Constructions. 374, 2 and notes. I. With Celo. 374, N. 1. TWO ACCUSATIVES. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 71 2. With Verbs of Teaching. 374, K. 2. 3. With Verbs of Asking, Demanding. 374, K 3. 4. With Peto, PostUo, Qiiaero. 374, N. 4. II. Infinitive, or Clause, as Accusative of Thing. 374, N". 2, fin. III. Neuter Pronoun, or Adjective, as Accusative of Thing. 375. IV. Two Accusatives with Compounds. 376. 188. Models. I. You were kept igno- rant of the most im- portant things. II. He taught Socrates to play on the lyre. III. I ask you in regard to the same things. IV. He asks this from the king. V. He teaches you to be wise. VI. Philosophy taught us to know ourselves. VII. He admonished me of it. VIII. He led his forces over the Rhone. I. 3Iaxmiis de rebus celdtus es. II. Socrutem fidibus do- cult. III. Te iisdern de rebus interrogo. IV. Hoc a rege petit. V. Te sapere docet.' VI. Philosophia nos do- cult lit nosmet ip- sos nosceremus. VII. Pd me mo7iidt. VIII. Rhodanum copias tra^ecit. 189- Remarks. 1. Model I. — Of = concerning, in regard to, de. G. 434. 2. The most important, greatest, things, maxlmis rebus. Maoc/i- mis alone would not distinguish things from persons. An emphatic adjective belonging to a noun with a preposition is often placed before' 72 LATIN COMPOSITION. the iireposition. Hence maxlmis de rebus ; also iisdem de rebus^ in Model III. 3. Model II. — To play upon the lyre, in the Latin idiom with THE LY-RE, Jidibtis, Abl. of Means. Rule XXV, 4. Model V. — To be wise, sajM'e. This simply supplies the place of one accusative after docd. He teaches you to be wise, i. e., teaches you wisdom. G. 534. 5. Model VI. — To know ourselves = that we should know ourselves, ut nosmet ipsos nosceremtts. G. 499, 3. For the mood of nosca^emus, see G. 498, and for the tense, 493, 1. For the difference in force between this clause and the infinitive, as used in Model V., see G. 640, XL and III. 6. Model VIII. — He led over, trajf,cit, lit. threw over, or across. 7. His forces, copias ; possessive omitted. t 190. Vocabulary. Across, trans, prep, with ace. Admonish, moneo, ere, ui, itum. Demand, postulo, are, avi, atum. Depart, discedo, ere, cessi, cessiim. Home, domus, us or i, f. G. 119, 1. In regard to, de, prep, with abl. Inform, teach, doceo, ere, docui, doctum. It is permitted, licet, licuit or lict- tum est, impers. G. 299. Keep in ignorance, celo, are, avi, atum. To keep ignorant of (in regard to), celo de. Multitude, nriultitudo, Inis, f. No, nnllus, a, um. G. I'Jl. Of = from, a, ab, prop, with abl. 191. Exercise. '^ 1. Did they not ask these favors from Caesar? 2. We will ask no favors from Marcus. 3. We will not keep you in ignorance in regard to this cnlaniitf/. 4. Caesar was not kept ignorant of these plans. 5. They informed Caesar in regard to the plans of the enemy. 6. The Boldier will ask from his commander to be permitted to ACCUSATIVE AS SUBJECT OF INFINITIVE. 73 depart to his home. 7. Of what will he admonish them? 8. What did he at the same time demand of Ariovistus? 9. He demanded of him that he should not lead the Ger- mans into Gaul. 10. The king had already led a multi- tude of Germans across the Rhine into Gaul.^^ -\ Lesson XLII. ACCUSATIVE AS SUBJECT OF INFINITIVE. IN AGREE- MENT WITH ANOTHER ACCUSATIVE. [1, 44.] 192. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Accusative as Subject of an Infinitive. 536. II. Accusative in Agreement with another Accusative. 362, 363. 1. As Predicate Accusative. 362 ; 373, 1. 2. As Appositive. 363. 193. Models. I. You know that I speak I. Scis me Latme luqui. Latin. II. I rejoice that you rec- IT. Gaudeo id te mihi ommend that to me. suadere. III. They called Cicero the III. Ciceronem patrem pa- father of his country. triae nominaverunt. IV. Marcellus took the city IV. Marcellus urhem. Sy- of Syracuse. racusas cepit. 74 LATIN COMPOSITION. 194. Re:marks. 1. Model I. — That I speak, ine loqiii, object of scis. See Rule v., also G. 371, IV. ; 535, I. Me, subject of loqui. Rule LVIII. 2. Latin = in Latin, Latlne, adverb qualifying loqui. Rule LXT. Ob- serve the difference of idiom between the English and the Latin. 3. Model II. — Id, being emphatic, is placed at the beginning of the infinitive clause, even before the subject te. G. 561. 4. Model IV. — The city of Syracuse, Latin idiom, the city Syracuse, urbem Syracusas. Rule II. 195. Vocabulary. For, in behalf of, pro, prep, with abl. Gracchus, Gracchus, i, m. Greek, in Greek, Graece, adv. Latin, in Latin, Latlne, adv. Nasica, Nasica, ae, m. Tiberius, Tiberius, ii, m. Twice, bis, adv. 196. Exercise. 1. The Eoman people made Cicero consul. 2. Did you not say that Cicero was consul at that time? 3. I said that Tiberius Gracchus was at that time consul. 4. They say that Publius Scipio Nasica was twice consul. 5. We know that you have been called wise. 6. Do you not know that Cicero spoke both Latin and Greek? 7. They say that Marcus already speaks Latin. 8. Why did you teach him to speak Latin? 9. He will come with a large army to take the city of Geneva. 10. We know that you are always prepared to encounter dangers for your country. ...^^ ACCUSATIVE IN AN ADVERBIAL SENSE. 75 Lesson XLIII. ACCUSATIVE IN AN ADVERBIAL SENSE. MATIONS. [1, 49.] IN EXCLA- >, 197. Lesson from the Gkammar. L Accusative of Time and Space. 379. 1. Accusative with Per. 379, 1. n. Accusative of Limit. 380. 1. Accusative with Ad, 380, L 2. Tlrhs or Oppidum with Preposition. 380, L 3. Words like Names of Towns. 380, 2. 4. Other Names of Places. 380, I. and 3. III. Accusative of Specification. 378. 1. In good prose only in its freer sense. 378, 2. IV. Accusative in Exclamations. 381. 198. Models. I. At Athens Pericles was for very many years the leader of the public council. II. Hippias came to Olym- pia. III. There are three roads to Mutina. IV. Demaratus betook himself to Tarquinii, a city of Etruria. I. Athenis Per ides plu- rimos annos prin- ceps consilii piib- licifuit. II. Hippias Olyynpiam venit. III. Tres sunt viae ad Mutinam. IV. Demaratus se contu- lit Tarquinios in urbem Etruriae, 76 LATIN COMPOSITION. V. Scipio was conducted V. Scipio domiim re- home. ductus est. VI. Latona fled to Delos. VI. Latona confugit De- lum. VII. He came into Epirus. VII. In Eplrum venit. VIII. My letter will not profit VIII. JSPihil tibi meae lit- you at all. terae proderunt. IX. welcome arrival ! IX. gratum adven- tum! 199. Remaeks. 1. Model I. — At Athens, vl^/^^n^s, Locative Abl. Rule XXX. Empha- sis places it at the beginning of the sentence. G. 561, 1. 2. Model III. — There are, sunt. In this signification, — there is, there are, — the verb sum generally stands before its subject, as in the model, and indeed generally at the beginning of the sentence ; but here ires is emphatic, and takes the first place. 3. Model IV. — A city of Etruria, in urhem Etruriae. Observe the difference of idiom. In tlie English, city is in apposition with Tar- quinii, while in Latin in urhem is treated simply as a modifier of con- tulit, — betook himself into a city of Etruria. Tarquinios — Etruriae would regularly precede contulit ; but, being emphatic, it stands at the end of the sentence. 4 . Model VIII. — Not at all, nihil. Rule VIIL It is emphatic. 200. Synontmes. Letter, epistle ; littera, litterae, epistola, 1. JLittera^ ae, f. ; letter, — of the alphabet. 2. Jjitterae^ ariim^ f. plur. ; letteii, epistle, — regarded simply as a written communication without any reference to its epistolary character. 3. Epistola^ ae^ f ; letter, epistle, — with special refer- ence to its epistolary character. DATIVE WITH VERBS. 77 201. Vocabulary. Betake one's self, se conferre ; con- fero,ferre^ tidi, collatum. Fortunate, fortvnatus, a, vm. Greek, Graecus, a, um. Letter of the alphabet, litteo-a, ae, f. Letter, epistle, Utterae, Sriim, f. ; episiola, ae, f. Move, commoveo, ere, movi, moium. Pronounce, speak, dico, ere, dixi, dictum. Request, rogatus, us, m. 202. Exercise. 1. Caesar waged war in Gaul ten years. 2. Did not the soldiers wish to return home? 3. Did you not say that Ariovistus sent ambassadors to Caesar? 4. I said so. 5. The soldiers betook themselves to the city of Geneva. 6. They betook themselves to their camp at Geneva. 7. Did not the Allobroges send ambassadors to the senate at Rome? 8. Cicero wrote many letters to his brother Quintus. 9. Demosthenes, when a boy, was not able to pronounce the letter R. 10. Your brother knows one Greek letter. 11. I read your letter at Rome. 12. The commander will not be at all moved by this request. 13. O happy country ! 14. O fortunate city ! y::^ Lesson XLIY. DATIVE WITH VERBS. [1, 54.] 203. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Dative with Verbs. 384. 1. Dative with Special Verbs. 885. 78 LATIN COMPOSITION. "1. Dative with Compounds. 386. 3. Dative of Possessor. 387. 4. Dative of the Apparent Agent. 388. 5. Ethical Dative. 389. II. Two Datives — To which and For which. 390. . 1. Verbs with two Datives. 390, K 1. 204. Models. I. We yield to the sacred laws of our country. II. I do not look with envy upon your ad- vantages. III. My Cicero sends you greeting. IV. Pr ovidef or yovivcoMw- try. V. ThQ fountain has the name Arethusa. VI. What should be done by us? VII. What does the law mean? VIII. The house was an oriiament to the city. I. Sanetis^atriae legX- bus ohsequimur. II. I^on ego invideo tuis commodis. III. Cicero meus tibi sa- lutem, dicit. IV. Prospiate patriae. V. Fonti nomen Are- tkusa est. VI. Quid nobis agendum est? VII. Quid sibi lex vtdt f VIII. Domus urbi fuit ornamento. 205. Remarks. 1. Model I. — For the order of words, see G. 665, 3. 2. Model II. — Non : see G. 569, IV. Why is the possessive (tuis) expressed with commddis, but omitted with patriae in Model I. ? See G. 447. 3. Model III. — Sends greeting, saliiiem dicit, lit. says safety, i. e. expresses his desire for your safety and health. DATIVE WITH VERBS. 79 4. Model V. — The fountain has, fonii est, lit. is to the fountain. 5. Model VI. — By us, nobis, lit. to us. See G. 388. 6. Model VII. — Mean, sibi vult, lit. wish for itself, i. e. propose to itself. 7. Model VIII. — An ornament, ornamento, lit. for an ornament. Observe the difference of idiom, but remember that the Latin sometimes employs the nominative, like the English. See G. 390, N. 2. 206. Vocabulary. Ally, socius, ii,~». ^<^v . Be in command of, praesum, esse, fui. Business, negotium,ii, n. To have business, negotium, sum, esse, fui, with dat . Defence, praesidium, ii, n. Envy, to look upon with envy, in- vWeo, ere, vldi, visum. Ephesus, Ephesus, i, f. Especially, maxime, adv. It is the intention, in anlmo est, esse, fuit, with dat. It is my intention, mihi est in anlmo. Mean, volo, velle, volui, with dat. Mind, animus, i, m. 207. Exercise. 1. I have ever favored both you and your brother. 2. The good and wise never envy the rich. 3. Praise and glory are especially envied. 4. Caesar, vv^ho is in com- mand of the army, is especially envied. 5. It is our in- tention to waoje war ag-ainst the Romans and their allies. 6. Ainovistus at that time had a large army. 7. T'hat beautiful city had the name of Ephesus. 8. What did these presents mean? 9. The good and wise must be praised by all. 10. What business had the Helvetians in the Roman province? 11. Virtue is a glory to all. 12. The cavalry of the Aeduans was a defence to the Roman army. V 80 LATIN COMPOSITION. ^Jbi Lesson XLV. DATIVE WITH VERBS. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. [2, 5.] 208- Lesson from the Grammar. I. Double Construction. 384, 2. II. To or jFor, how rendered into Latin. "^4, 3. III. Accusative or Dative with a Difference of Meaning. 385, 1. 209. Models. I. He presents gifts to I. Munera civibus do- ' the citizens. nat. II. The Tarentines pre- II. Tarentini Archiam sented Archias the poetam civitate poet with citizen- donaveritnt. ship. III. We came to Delos. III. Delum vemmiis. IV. I yield to the time. IV. Tenipori cedo. V. They fight for liberty. V. Pro Ubertate dimi- cant. VI. He wrote laws for the VI. Leges cimtati scrip- state. sit. VII. I consult you. VII. Ego vos consvlo. VIII. Consult for yourselves. VIII. Consulite vobis. IX. He feared danger. IX. Periculum m etuehat. X. He feared for himself. X. Sibi metuibat. 210. Remarks. 1. Model I. — For the arrangement of two or more objects with the same verb, see G. 567, 3. DATIVE WITH VERBS. SPECIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 81 2. Models III. and IV. — Why is to Delos rendered by the Accus. Delum, and to the time, by the Dative, tempdri ? See G. 380, 2 ; 382, 384. 3. Models V. and VI. — Why is for liberty rendered by pro with the Abl., j7ro lihertdte, and /or the state by the Dative, civitatif See G. 384. 3, 2); 382, 384. 211. Vocabulary. Consult, consulo, Ire, sului, sultum. Detriment, detrimentum, i, n. Distinguished, clarus, a, um. Near, near to, ad, prep, with ace. Ought, deheo, ere, ui, itum. Supplicate, suppllco, are, avif atum. Surround, circumdo, dre, didi, dd' turn. G. 259, N. 1. Often, saepe, adv. Wall, murus, i, m. Winter quarters, hiberna, Orum, n. adj. used as subs. 212. Exercise. 1. Servius Tullius the king surrounded the city of Rome with a wall. 2. The Athenians presented Demos- thenes the orator with a golden crown. 3. Demosthenes, the distinguished orator, was presented with a golden crown. 4. We ought to encounter all dangers for our country. 5. We will all supplicate the commander in behalf of this soldier. 6. Whom did you (pi.) consult in regard to this plan? 7. We consulted Caesar the com- mander of the army. 8. For whom did Caesar consult? 9. Pie consulted for the safety of his whole army. 10. Let us lead our forces into winter quarters near Geneva. 11. The friendship of the lloman people was often ? detriment, not a defence, to their allies. 82 LATIN COftU'OSllION. Lesson XL VI. DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND DERIVATIVES. ! [2, 12.] 213. Lesson feom the Grammar. I. Dative with Adjectives. 391, 391, II. "* II. Dative with Derivatives. 392. 214. Models. I. The soil of their coun- try is dear to all. II. Pleasure is especially unfriendly to virtue. III. Your letters are ac- ceptable to me. IV. We are see^m^aLatin word equivalent to the Greek. V. Very kind to his father. VI. Useful for many things. VII. TAherty is characteris- tic of the Roman people. VIII. Justice is obedience to the laws. IX. They speak consist- ently with tlieni- sclves. I. Patriae solum om- 7ubiis carum est. II. Yoluptas maxtme est inimlca virtuti. III. Tuae epistolae mihi gratae sunt. IV. Quaerimus verbum Latinum par Graeco. V. Perindulgens in pa- trem. VI. Multas ad res tcttlis. VII. VIII Jlomdni populi est propria libertas. Justitia est obtempe- ratio leytbus. IX. JSibi constanter dl- cunt. DATIVE WITH ADJECTIVES AND DERIVATIVES. 83 215. Remarks. 1. Model II. — "Why is virtfdi placed at the end of the sentence? G. 561, II. 2. Model IV. — Why is quaerimns placed at the beginning of the sentence ? G. 561, I. 3. Model VI. — For many things, midtas ad res. For the order of words, see Rem. 189, 2 '. With iitllis observe- the difference of mean- ing between the Dative and the Accus. with ad : mihi utllis, useful to me; mvltas ad res utllis, useful for many things, purposes. 4. Model VII. — Of the Roman people, Romani populi, Gen. depending upon propria. See Rule XVII. ; also G. 399, III. This genitive is emphatic, and therefore stands at the beginning of the sen- tence. G. 561, I. The emphatic Romani precedes its noun. The em- phatic subject, libertas, is placed at the end of the sentence. G. 561, II. 5. Model IX. — With themselves, sibi, Dative depending upon constanter, whicli admits the Dative after the analogy of its primitive consians, from consto. 216. Synonymes. Acceptable, agreeable ; acceptus, gratus,jucundus. 1. Acceptus^ a., um ; acceptable, welcome, — for what- ever reason. 2. Gratus^ a, um ; grateful, acceptable, — especially because of value or worth. 3. Jucundus^ a, iim ; agreeable, pleasant, delightful. Acceptus implies simply that the object to which it is applied is accepta- ble, grains that it is acceptable because of its value, whether arrecable or not, and jucundus, that it is in itself agreeable. 217. Vocabulary. A battle is fought, pugnatur, pug- 1 Accel^tRh\e, acceptus, a, um; gratus, natum est, impers. a, um. See Explanation of References, page xi. 84 LATIN COMPOSITION. Admonition, admonitio, onis, f. Although, etiamsi, conj. Approach, appropinquo, are, avi, atum. But, sed ; autem. G. 554, III. 2. Near, prope, propius, proxlme, adv. Peculiar to, proprius, a, um. Spirited, in a spirited manner, acrlter, adv. Word, verbum, t, n. 218. Exercise. 1. The friendship of the Aeduans was^ acceptable to Caesar. 2. Your letters will always be acceptable to me. 3. Your admonition, although it is not agreeable, is yet acceptable to me. 4. Your words are very agreeable to me. 5. The books which you sent were very acceptable to me. 6. At that time the study of eloquence was not common to Greece, but peculiar to Athens. 7. We have endeavored to persuade the citizens. 8. At the same time the Aeduans were approaching the borders of the Belgians, who are nearest to the Germans. 9. A spirited battle was fought very near the camp of Caesar, Lesson XLVII. genitive with nouns and adjectives [2, 19.] 219. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Genitive with Nouns. 395. 1. Varieties of Genitive with Nouns. 396. 2. Peculiarities. 398. 3. Other Constructions. 395, N. 2 ; 419, IL II. Genitive with Adjectives. 399. GENITIVE WITH NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 85 220. Models. I. The glory of virtue is eternal. II. Socrates in the judg- ment of Greece was the wisest of all men. III. Compare the life of Tre- bonius with that of Dolabella. IV. Love of (to) country. V. He is desirous of vic- tory. VI. The mind is capable of all virtues. VII. No one will be found like you. I. Yirtutis gloria est sempiterna. II. Socrates judicio Graeciae omnium sapientisstmus fu- it. III. Conferte vitam Tre- bonii cum Dola- beUae. IV. Amor in patriam. V. Yictoriae avidus est. VI. Mens virtutum om,- nimn capax est, VII. Nemo tui similis in- venietur. 221. Remarks. 1. Model II. — In the judgment, i. e. in accordance with, by the judgment, judicio. Rule XXII. 2. Of all men, omnium^ used substantively. G. 441. 3. Model III. — With that of Dolabella, cum Dohhdlae^ — vita be- iDg omitted. G. 398, 1, N. 1. 4. Model IV. — Of country, patHae^ or in or erga patriam, G. 396, III. N. 1. 5. Model VII. — Like you, tui similis, or tibi similis. G. 391, 1; 396, II. N. 222. Synontmes. Avaricious, desirous, devoted to, pursuing ; avarus, cupi- dus, avidus, studiosus, 7 86 LATIN COMPOSITION. 1. Avdrus, 05, um ; avaricious, — desirous of money and gain. 2. Cupidus^ a, wm / desirous, eagerly desirous, — often with the idea of haste and impatience. 3. Avidus, a, um ; desirous, earnestly desirous, very DESIROUS, greedy, — often involving the idea of an excessive or selfish desire. — 4. Studidsus^ a, um ; studious, devoted to, student of, pursuing, — involving zeal in the pursuit of a study, or in the support of a person or cause. 223. Vocabulary. Affair, thing, res^ rei, f. Avaricious, avarus, a, um. For, enim, conj. G. 654, V. 3. Greedy, very desirous, avldus, a, um. Literature, letters, littSrae, arum^ f.pl. Military, militarise e ; military affairs, res militarise sing. Revolution, res novae, f. pi.; lit. new things. " Science, learning, doctrina, at^ f. Skilful in, peritus, a, um. Student of, studiosus, a, um. Three days, iriduum, i, n. Unmindful, immimor, dris. Zeal, studium, ii, n. 224. Exercise. 1. We will now make a journey into the territory of the Belgians. 2. We have persuaded the soldiers to make a journey of three days through the territory of the Helve- tians. 3. The Belgians were very skilful in military affairs. 4. They were Jievcr unmindful of their ancient valor, and were always desirous of a revolution. 5. But at this time they had more zeal than wisdom ; for they were conquered by the Romans in ma7iy battles. 6. The GENITIVE WITH VERBS. 87 soldiers are very desirous of victory and glory. 7. Tlie avaricious are ever greedy for moyiey, 8. We are students of literature. -yf Lesson XLYIII. GENITIVE WITH VERBS.— LOCATIVE. [2, 26.] 225. Lesson fkom the Grammar. I. Predicate Genitive. 401. 1. Predicate Genitive and Predicate Nominative. 401 ; 362. 2. Predicate Genitive and Predicate Adjective. 401, N. 2. 3. Varieties of Predicate Genitive. 402. 4. Verbs with Predicate Genitive. 403. 5. Other Constructions for the Genitive. 401, N. 3, IL Locative. 425, II. III. Genitive with certain Verbs. 406, 410, V. . 1. Other Constructions. 407. 2. Refert and Interest. 408. lY. Accusative and Genitive. 409. 226. Models. I. Murena was a man of I. Murena midtae in- much industry. dustriae fiiit. II. The field is now of II. Ager nunc phiris more value than it est quam tunc then was. fuit. III. It is your duty to un- III. Tuum est intelligere. derstand. 88 LATIN COMPOSITION. IV. VI. VII. VIII. It is the duty of an orator to speak. You were in the mean time at Rome. To do right is the in- terest of all. It greatly interests me. I repent of my error. IV. Oratoris officium est dicere. V. Tu interea Romae VI. ^n terest omnium recte facere. VII. Magni interest mea. VIII. Me err oris m^i pae- ?iitet. 227. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Was a man of, Latin idiom, was of, man omitted In rendering into Latin, G. 402. 2. Model II. — Is of more value, pluris est, lit. is of more. G. 404, N. 1. 3. Model III. — It is your duty to understand, Latin idiom, to un- derstand is yours. Tuum, not tui, must be used. G. 401, N. 3, 4. Model IV. — It is the duty of an orator, oratoris est, or oratoris officium est. G. 395 ; 401. 6. Model V. — At Rome, Romae. G. 425, II. 6. Model VIL — Greatly, magni, lit. of much, of great. G. 408, III. '7. It interests me, interest mea, not mei. G. 408, 1. 2. 8. Model VIII. — I repent op my error, Latin idiom, it repenta me of my error. 228. Vocabulary. Be ashamed, pudet, puduit or pudl- turn est, impers. I am ashamed, me pudet. G. 299. Bitterly, acerhe, adv. Pity, misiret, miseiHtum cs<, impers. I pity, me misiret. G. 299. Repent, paenltei, paenituit, impers. I repent, me paenltet. G. 299. Treachery, proditio, 6nis, f. ABLATIVE. 89 229. Exercise. 1. The Eomans did not forget the ancient valor of the Helvetians. 2. The Gauls were very brave. 3. The Belgians were of great valor. 4. It is characteristic of time valor to encounter all dangers in behalf of the re- public. 5. It is the interest of all to obey the laws. 6. It is important to the glory of the state to consult for the safety of all the citizens. 7. The Germans were not ashamed of their valor. 8. The Helvetians bitterly re- pented of their conspiracy. 9. Do you not pity them? 10. We do not accuse you of conspiracy. 11. This sol- dier has already been accused of treachery. Lesson XLIX. ablative. X [2, 35.] 230. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Ablative of Cause, Manner, Means. 416 ; 419, III. ; 420. ^1. Various Expressions for Cause. 416, I. 2. Means and Agent distinguished. 420 and 415, I. II. Ablative of Price. 422. III. Ablative with Comparatives. 417. 1. Comparatives with Quam. 417, 1. 2. Ablative, when admissible. 417, N. 1. 3. Construction with Plus and Minus. 417, N". 2. 90 LATIN COMPOSITION. 231. Models. I. An art is praised be- cause of its useful- ness. II. By my right I ask of you this favor. III. Terentia was delighted with your letter. lY. Friendship is to be sought for its own sake. V. Cato was praised by- all. yi. It was done through the agency of Fabri- cius. VII. He purchased the sen- atorial rank with money. VIII. What is more desira- ble than wisdom ? IX. He lived with you more than a year. I. -24r5 utilitate laudd" tur, II. Meo jure te hoc beneficium rogo. III. Terentia delectCita est tuis litteris. IV. Amicitia est propter se V. Oato ah omnibus lauddtus est. VI. Per Fabricium fac- tum est. VII. OrdXnem senatori- um, pretio mercd- tus est. VIII. Quid est optabilius sapie?itid, or quam sapientici. IX. Tecum plus annum vixit. 232. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Because of its usefulness, utilitate, Abl. of Cause. Rule XXII. 2. Model II. — I ask of you, te rogo. Rule VII. 3. Model III. — With your letter, tuis littlris, or tua epistdla. Rule XXII. See also Synonynies, 200. 4. Model IV. — For its own sake = on account of itself, propter ABLATIVE. 91 se. These words, it will be observed, stand between est and ixpetenda. Modifiers are not unfrequently thus placed between the two parts in the compound forms of verbs. 5. Model VI. — Throcgh the agency of Fabricius, per Fdbriciumy lit. thrmigh Fabricius. G. 415, I. 1, N. 1. 6. Model IX. — With you, tecum. G. 434, N. 3. 7. More than a year, /)/i^ annum^ not plus anno. G. 417, N. 2. 233. Synonymes. Celebrated, distinguished, illustrious, noble ; celeber, clams, illustris, nohilis. 1. Celeher^ biHs^ bre ; celebrated, much frequented, — applied mostly to places. 2. Clarus., a, imi ; distinguished, conspicuous, cele- brated, — especially for brilliant achievements. 3. Illustris^ e; illustrious, renowned, — a stronger terra than clarus, applied especially to those who are distin- guished for rank and worth. 4. JVbbilis, e ; well known, famous, noble, — with special reference to high birth and ancestry. 234. Vocabulary. Aid, auxilium, ii, n. Antioch, Antiochia, ae, f. Celebrated, celeber, bris, bre. High, great (price), magnus, a, um. Illustrious, illustris, e. Lead on, adduco, Bre, duxi, dudum. Noble, nobilis, e. Solon, Solon or Solo, cms, m. Themistocles, Themistocles, is, m. Thousand, mille, indecl. adj.; pi. millia, ium, n. subst. G. 178. 235. Exercise. 1. The soldiers were led on by the hope of a reward. 2. The Aeduans were sent with all their forces as aid to 92 LATIN COMPOSITION. Caesar. 3. Why did they not come with cavalry? 4. More than five thousand came in one day, 5. Who was there at Eome more distinguished thafr Cicero ? 6. Anti- och was formerly a celebrated city. 7. The name of Themistocles is more illustrious than that of Solon. 8. The Athenians sent three most noble philosophers to Rome. 9. He has purchased a house at a high price. 10. The safety of the country is dear to me. Lesson L. ABLATIVE — Continued. [3, 8.] 236. Lesson pkom the Grammae. I. Ablative of Difference. 423. II. Ablative in Special Constructions. 421. 237. Models. I. Longer by one day. I. Vho die longior. II. The wise man makes II. Sapiens ratidne op- the best use of reason. time utitur. III. I am intimate with Tre- III. Trehonio utor fami- bonius. liariter. IV. Nature is content with IV. Natura parvo con- little. tenta est. V. What need have you of V. Quid tibi opera nos- our aid ? tra opus est? VI. No one trusts in the VI. Nemo fortunae sta- stability of fortune. hilitate confldit. v\\. I trust in virtue. VII. Virtuti confido. ABLATIVE. 93 238. Remaeks. 1. Model II. — Makes the best use of reason, Latin idiom, uses reastrU best. 2. Model III. — I am intimate with, utor familiarHer. 3. Model V. — What need have you, Latin idiom, as to what is there need to you, — quid tibi opus est. Quid, see G. 378, 2. Or our aid, opera nostra, Abl. G. 414, notes 2-4. 4. Model VII. — I trust in virtue, virtuti or virtute confldo. With the Dative the idea of trust is prominent, I trust in virtue, i. e. trust it, trust to it; while with the Abl., the idea of means is prominent, I trust in virtue, i. e. am confident because of or by means of virtue. 239. Synonymes. I. To need, to be without, to be free from ; egreo, indigeo^ careo^ vaco. 1. Egeo., ere., ui — / to need, to be destitute of, — to be without something which one needs. 2. Indigeo., ere., ui — / to need, to feel need, — involv- ing a deep sense of need, while egeo refers rather to the need itself. 3. Careo., ere., ui., itum ; to be without, — with little reference to the character of the object as desirable or un- desirable. 4. Vdco^ are, dvi, cltum ; to be free from, to be with- out, — especially to be without that which is undesirable. II. Man, hero ; homo, vir. 1. Homo, hominis, m. and f.; man, — a member of the human family, man or woman. 2. Vir, viri, m. ; hero, true man, — as a term of respect. 94 LATIN COMrOSITION. 240. VoCABTTLAETs Advice, counsel, consilium, ii, n. Affection, love, amor, oris, m. Be destitute of, need, egeo, ere, ui ; indlgeo, tre, ui. Be free from, be without, vaco, are, avi, atum ; careo, ere, ui. Hum ; egeo, ere, ui. Be intimate \f iih, familiar^ter utor, i, usus sum. Be needful (there needs, is need of), opus est,fuH. Best, in the best manner, opflme, adv. Enjoyment, delectatio, onis, f. Familiarly, familiarHer, adv. Fault, culpa, ae, f. Feel the need of, indlgeo, ere, ui. Fidelity, faith, fides, ei, f. Highest, of the highest degree, summus, a, um, sup. of sitpi- rus. Kindness, henignUas, atis, f. Nothing, nihil, n. indecl. Pain, dolor, oris, m. Use, make use of, utor^ t, usug sum, dep. Very, valde, adv. 241. Exercise. 1. Laelius was for many years very intimate with Scipio. 2. He was at that time both without pain and without enjoyment. 3. We are 7ioiv destitute of (need) many things. 4. I feel the need of your advice. 5. Now your counsels, your affection, and your fidelity are needful to us. 6. There was no need of so many words. 7. Let us make the best use of our time. 8. Tlie Roman soldiers were always worthy of the highest praise. 9. Nothing is more worthy of a great and dis- tinguished man than kindness. 10. What is there in man better than virtue ? 11. The safety of the cozm^n/ is much dearer to you than life. ABLATIVE. 95 Lesson LI. ABLATIVE — Continued. [3,13.] 242. Lesson feom the Grammar. I. Ablative of Place. 425-428. 1. Places not Towns. 425, I. 2. Xames of Towns, 425, II. 3. Like ]N"ames of Towns. 426. II. Ablative of Source and Separation. 413-415 ; 414, 1.; 415, IL III. Construction of Names of Places. 1. The Place in which. 427, III.; 428, DL 2. The Place from which. 427, II.; 428, IL 3. The Place to which. 427, I.; 428, L 243. Models. I. In what city do we I. In qua urhe vivi- live ? ^mus ? IL He died at Babylon. II. Babylone mortuus est. III. I withdrew from the III. De foro discessi. forum. IV. Aeschines withdrew LV. Aeschmes cessit from Athens. Athenis. V. He fled from home. Y. Domo profugit. VI. You have freed your VI. Periculis patriam country from perils. liheramstis. VII. He came into the VII. In provinciam ad- province. venit. VIII. I came to Capua. VIII. Capiiam veni. 96 LATIN COMPOSITION. 244. Remarks. 1. Why is the preposition used in models I. III. VII., and omitted in all the others ? G. 425, I. ; 426 ; 414, I. ; 380 ; 380, II. 3. 2. Model IV. — Emphasis places Athenis at the end of the sentence. 245. Synonymes. Country; patria, ager^ rus. 1. JPatria, ae, f. ; native counti^y, — the country of one's birth. 2. Ager, agri, ni. ; country, — as consisting of fields, the OPEN COUNTRY ; — in this sense generally plural. 3. i?ws, ruris, n.; the country, — as distinguished from the city. 246. Vocabulary. Capable, capax, acis. 1 Mind, the mental faculty, mens, Country, rus, ruris, n. ; patria, \ mentis, f. ae, f. ; ager, agri, m. Fear, metus, us, m. Few, pauci, ae, a, pi. Forced marches, magna itinera, n. pi. ; lit. great marches. Go, eo, ire, ivi, itum. Hasten, contendo, ire, tendi, ten- turn. Obtain, potior, iri, lius sum, dep. G. 421, I. Eemain, maneo, Ere, mansi, man- sum. Sea, mare, is, n. ; on sea and land, terra manque. Servitude, servUus, utis, f. Sovereignty, imperiumj «, n. 247. Exercise. 1. We lived in Geneva more than three months. 2. From Geneva we hastened with forced marches into Italy. ABLATIVE. 97 3. Now let us go from the city into the country. 4. He went from home a few days ago, and will remain in the country two months. 5. We made a journey of three days through the country. 6. The brave soldiers have encountered many dangers in behalf of their country. 7. War must be waged against the Carthaginians on sea and land. 8. It was the intention of the Helvetians to obtain the sovereignty of all Gaul. 9. Will you not free this city from the fear of servitude? 10. To man God has given a mind capable of all virtues. Lesson LH. ABLATIVE — Continued.— [3, 20.] 248. Lesson from the Grammab. I. Ablative of Time. 429. 1. Time within which. 429, 1, and foot-note. 2. Time since an event, or between two events. 430, 430, notes 1-3. 11. Ablative of Characteristic. 419, H. 1. Genitive and Ablative distinguished. 419, 2 ; 396, V. III. Ablative of Specification. 424. 249. Models. L Plato died in his eighty- I. Plato uno et octogesi- first year. mo anno mortuus est. 98 LATIN COMPOSITIQI^. II. I have leisure at this time for philosophy. III. He smiled once in his life. IV. Homer lived many years before Romulus. V. He was slain some months after. VI. You are of a cheerful spirit. II. Hoc tempore philoso- phiaevaco. III. Semel in vita risit. IV. Ilomerus annis mul- tis fuit ante Momu- lum. V. Aliquot post menses occisus est. VI. Tu hilari animo es. 250. Remarks. 1. Model I. — His — omitted in rendering. 2. Model III. — In his life, in vita. Why is the preposition in used? G. 426, 1, and foot-note. 3. Model IV. — Homer lived many tears before Romulus, Latin idiom, Homer ivas be/ore Romulus hj many years. Annis, Abl. of Differ- ence. Rule XXVIH. Ante Romulum at the end of the sentence because emphatic. 4. Model V. — Some months after, Latin idiom, after some months. For the order of the words, see G. 430, N. 1, 2). 5. Model VI. — Of a cheerful spirit, or with a cheerful spirit, hilAri anXmx)^ Abl. of Characteristic. Rule XXIV. 251. Vocabulary. Afterwards, post, adv. Equal, par, paris. Fifth day of the month, nonae, arum, f. pi. For exception see G. 642, I. 2. Fiftieth, quinquagesimus, a, um. First day of the month, calendae^ arum, f. pi. Fourth, quartus, a, um. Greatly, magnopire, adv. • ABLATIVE. 99 Ides, idus, iduum, f. pi. G. 642, 1.3. June, of June, Junius, a, um. G. 642, III. 2. March, of March, Martins, a, um. May, of May, Mains, a, um. Punic, Pun'icus, a, um. Put to death, occldo, ere, cldi, ci- Pythagoras, Pythagoras, ae, m. Eefinement, humaniias, dtis, f. Keturn, come back, reverto or re- vertor, ire or i, reverti, re- versum. See G. 2*72, S, ve^-to. Sixth, sextus, a, um. Sixtieth, sexagesimus, a, um. Such, so great, tantus, a, um. Third, tertius, a, um. 252. Exercise. 1. Pythagoras was in Italy at the same time in which Lucius Junius Brutus liberated his country. 2. Publius Scipio took Carthage in the third Punic war. 3. The ambassadors returned to Rome on the first day of May. 4. I received your letter on the fifth day of June. 5. Caesar was put to death in his fifty-sixth year, on the ides of March. 6. Two years afteimcards Cicero was put to death, in his sixty-fourth year. 7. The Belgians were equal to the Germans in valor. 8. They were surpassed by the Romans both in valor and in refinement. 9. The Romans surpassed the Greeks in the arts of war. 10. The Greeks surpassed the Romans in the arts of peace, 11. Herodotus is a man of such eloquence that he greatly delights us. 100 lATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LIII. ABLATIVE — Continued. [3, 29.] 253. Lesson prom the Grammar. I. Ablative Absolute. 431. II. Cases with Prepositions. 432. 1. Accusative. 433. 2. Ablative. 434. 3. Accusative or Ablative. 435. 254. Models. I. When many opinions I. Multis sententiis had already been ex- Jam dictis, roga- pressed, I was asked tus sum se7itenti- my opinion. am. II. Many orators flour- II. Vivo Catdne multi ished in the time of oratores florue- Cato. runt. III. Socrates brought phi- III. Socrates philosophic losophy down to am ad vitam com- common life. munem addicxit. IV. He wrote the book IV. Magna cum cura li- with great care. brum scripsit. V. He has retired from office. V. Magistrdtu abiit. VI. What are you to do VI. Quid hoc homine with this man ? facias f VII. He fled into Asia. VII. In Asiam profugit. VIII. In this island is a VIII. In hac insula est fountain of sweet fons aquae dulcis. water. ABLATIVE. 101 255. Remarks. 1. Model I. — When many opinions had been expressed, Latin idiom, many opinions having been spoken. Sententiam. Rule VII. 2. Model II. — In the time of Cato, vivo Catone, lit. Cato alive. Rule XXXII. Observe the position of these words at the beginning of the sentence. G. 561, I. 3. Model VI. — With this man, hoc homtne. G. 415, III. N. Facias, G. 486, IL 256. Synontmes. Battle, engagement, conflict ; pugna, proelium. 1. Pug7ia^ ae, f. ; battle, engagement, fight, stkipe, — the generic term for a conflict of any kind, whether between individuals or armies, whether with the fist, with words, or with arms. 2.\ProeUiim^ii,n.; battle, engagement, — a conflict in a military sense. 257. Vocabulary. Aquitanians, AquHani, drum, m. Arrive, pervinio, ire, veni, ventum. Become, Jio, fieri, f actus sum. G. 294. Betake one's self, se recipire ; re- clpio, ire, cepi, ceptum. Cassius, Cassius, ii, m. Eager, aldcer, cris, ere. Fight, to fight, pugno, are, avi, atum. To fight (lit. make) a battle, proelium (pugnam) facio, ire, feci, fcLctum. 8 How great, quantus, a, um. Living, alive, vivus, a, um. Reduce to a state of peace, ^aco, are, avi, atum. Result, exUus, us, m. Rout, pello, ire, pepUli, pulsum. Strife, pugna, ae, f. Successful, secundus, a, um. Vicinity, in the vicinity of, ad, prep, with ace. Within, intra, prep, with ace. Yoke, jugum, i, n. 102 LATIN COMPOSITION. 258. Exercise. 1. In the consulship of Lucius Cassius the Helvetians routed the Roman army and sent it under the yoke. 2. Within five days we shall arrive in the vicinity of Geneva. 3. Having routed the army of the enemy, the Aquitanians betook themselves to the town. 4. Our soldiers, having fortified their camp, became more eager to fight. 5 . Caesar, having reduced all Gaul to a state of peace, led his army into winter quarters. 6. How great is the strife of orators I 7. Caesar fought many successful battles*. 8. The result of this battle is uncertain. 9. These wars were waged against the Gauls in the time of Cicero« Lesson LIV. adjectives. [1, 4.] ^ 259. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Agreement of Adjectives. 438; 438, 1-7. 1. With Clause. 438, 3. 2. Construction according to Sense. 438, 6. 3. With two or more Nouns. 439. II. Use of Adjectives. 440. 1. With the Force of Nouns. 441. * The enclosed numerals standing at the beginning of the following lessons refer to Cicero's Orations against Catiline. Thus [1, 4] shows that this lesson is to be learned after the pupil has read the first four Chapters of the first Oration against Catiline, ADJECTIVES. 103 2. Equivalent to Clauses. 442. 3. Instead of Adverbs. 443. 4. Comparison of Adjectives. 444. 260. Models. I. An upright life is a happy life. II. It is true that there is friendship among the good. III. Castorand Pollux were seen. ly. Honors and victories are accidental. V. I loved Hortensius when he was alive. VI. Roscius was frequently at Rome. VII. Nothing is more beau- tiful than virtue. VIII. Aristides was without exception the most just of all. I. Honesta vita heata vita est. II. Verum est amiciti- ani inter honos esse. III. Castor et Pollux visi sunt. IV. Honores et victoriae fortuita sunt. V. Hortensium vivum amdvi. VI. Hoscius eratRomae frequens. VII. Nihil est virtute for- mosius. VIII. Aristides umis om- nium justissimus fuit. 261. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Verum agrees with the infinitive clause, amicitiam, — esse. G. 438, 3; 42, N. Among, between the good, inter honos. Bonos used substantively, the good. G. 441. 2. Model IV. — Ake accidental, i. e. accidental things, foHidta sunt. G. 439, 2, N. 3. Model V. — I loved Hortensius when he was alive, or when alive, Latin idiom, I loved HoHensius alive. 104 LATIN COMPOSITION. 4. Model VI. — Roscius was frequently at Rome, Latin idiom, Roscius was frequent at Rome. G. 443. 5. Model VIII. — Without exception the most just of all, imus omnium justissimuSi lit. alone of all the most just, the most just one of all. G. 444, 3. 262. Vocabulary. Assemble, conv&nio, irc, vent, ven- tum. Capture, capio, ere, cepi, captum. Certain, certus, a, um. Frequently, frequens, entis, adj. G. 443. Full, in full numbers, frequens, entis. Jupiter, Jupiter, Jovis, m. Openly, palam, adv. Stator, Stator, oris, m. Treason, proditio, onis, f. Wicked, sceleratus, a, um. Without exception, alone, unus, a, um. G. 176, N. 1. 263. Exercise. 1. We will now read the orations of Cicero the cele- brated orator. 2. Cicero was consul in the same year in which Catiline formed his wicked conspiracy. 3. There were many orators in Rome at that time, but Cicero was without exception the most eloquent of all. 4. Catiline had frequently heard him in the senate. 5. The senate assembled in full numbers in the temple of Jupiter Stator. 6. Cicero was the first who openly accused Catiline of treason. 7. It is certain that a conspiracy was formed. 8. Many thousands of the enemy were captured in the first Punic war. 9. Scipio and Laelius were often praised by Cicero, PRONOUNS. 105 Lesson LY. pronouns. [1, 7.] 264. Lesson from the Grammae. I. Agreement of Pronouns. 445. 1. Agreement of Pronoim used as Adjective. 445, 1. 2. Agreement with Personal Pronoun. 445, 2. 3. With two Antecedents. 445, 3. 4. With Predicate Noun or Appositive. 445, 4. 5. Construction according to Sense. 445, 5. 6. Antecedent omitted. 445, 6. 7. Clause as Antecedent. 445, 7. II. Personal and Possessive Pronouns. 446, 447. 1. Nominative of Personal Pronouns omitted. 446. 2. Possessive Pronouns omitted. 447. 3. Reflexive Use of Pronouns. 448, 449. 265. Models. I. Every virtue attracts " I. Omnis virtus nos ad us to itself se allicit. II. From your letter I II. Ex litttris tuis cepi have received in- incredibilem vo- credible pleasure. luptdteni. III. They will live a more III. Tuiiorem vitam meo secure life under my praesidio vivent. protection. IV. You are the one who lY. Tu es is qui me or- commended me. nasti. V. The produce and fruits V. Fruges atque fruc- w^hich the earth tus quos terra yields. gignit. 106 LATIN COMPOSITION. VI. They reject glory, which is the fruit of virtue. VII. There are some who think. VIII. Our country delights us, as it ought. IX. I console myself VI. Gloriam qui est fructus virtutis re- pudiant. VII. Sunt qui censeant. VIII. iVos, id quod debet, patria delectat. IX. Me consolor. 266. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Under my protection, meo praesidio, lit. hy means of^ or because of, 'my protection. Rule XXII. Vitam, G. 371, I. 2, 1). 2. Model IV. — The one who, is qui, not unus qui. 3. Model V. — Which, quos, masculine. G. 445, 3. 4. Model VI. — Qui agrees with fructus, rather than with gloriam G. 445, 4. 5. Model VII. — There are some, sunt. G. 445, 6. Censeant, for the Subjunctive, see G. 503, I. G. Model VIII. — As it ought, Latin idiom, that which it owes, ought, — id quod debet. G. 445, 7. Emphasis places nos at the beginning of the sentence. 267. Vocabulary. As, relat., qui, quae, quod. As it ought, id quod debet. G. 445, 7. Ascertain, cognosco, Sre, nOvi, ni- tum. Condemn, condemno, cLre, mi, atum. Defend, defendo, ire, fendi, fen- 8um* Depart from, exeo, ire, ii. Hum. Devote one's self to, studeo, ire, ui, dat. G. 385. Divine, divinus, a, um. Gift, donum, i, n. Oppose, obsisio, ire, stiti, siltum^ G. 386. Remissness, nequitia, ae, f. Sometimes, inierdum, adv. PRONOUNS. 107 Vigilant, vigllans, antis. I Your, thy, companions, friends, You, thou, tu, tui. &c., tui, drum. G. 441, 1. 268. EXEKCISE. 1. I have said that Cicero accused Catiline of treason. 2. Did you not condemn yourself for remissness? 3. I have often condemned myself for remissness. 4. Cicero said that he condemned the consuls for remissness. 5. You, Catiline, and all your companions, ought to depart from the city. 6. You and I, who oppose this conspiracy, ought to be vigilant. 7. There are some who fear Cati- line. 8. We will defend^ as we ought, the safety of the Roman people. 9. Let us send the cavalry to ascertain where the enemy are. 10. Cicero devoted himself to elo- quence, which is sometimes called a divine gift. Lesson LVI. PRONOUNS — Continued. [1, 10.] 269> Lesson fkom the Grammar. I. Demonstrative Pronouns. 450-452. II. Relative Pronouns. 453. 1. Relative Clause = Ablative with Pro, 453, 4. 2. Relative with Adjective. 453, 5. III. Interrogative Pronouns. 454. IV. Indefinite Pronouns. 455-459. 108 LATIN COMPOSITION. 270. Models. I. One thing I will ex- plain, and that too a most important one. II. Nothing is useful which is not also honorable. III. We are such as we ought to be. IV. I hope you are well, such is your pru- dence. V. The most beautiful ves- sels which he had seen. VI. What kind of a man was he ? Vn. One party contends, the other fears. VIII. One thing seems best to some, another to others. IX. The best men ever ren- der the greatest ser- vice to posterity. I. XTnam rem expticor' ho, eamque maxi- mam. II. Nihil est nttle, quod non idem hones- turn. III. li siimus, qui esse debemus. IV. /Spero, quae tua pru- dentia est, te va- lere, V. Vasa, quae pidcher- rtma viderat. VI. Qui virfuit f VII. Alteri dimicant, al- teri timent. VIII. Aliud aliis videtur optimum, IX. Opttmus quisque m,axtme posteri- tdti servit. 271. Remakks. 1. Model I. — And that too a most important one, Latin idiom, and thai the greatesty — eamque maxlmam. G. 451, 2. 2. Model II. — Which also, qtiod idem^ lit. which the same. 3. Model IV. — Such is your prudence, Latin idiom, which is your prudence, — ie valire being the antecedent of quae. What other forms may be used ? G. 453, 4. PRONOUNS. litm 4. Model V. — The most beautiful vessels which, Latin idiom, the vessels, which the most beautiful. G. 453, 5. 5. Model VIII. — Oke thing seems best to some, another to OTHEES, Latin idiom, another thing seems best to others. 6. Model IX. — The best men evee, Latin idiom, every best man. Rendek the greatest seevice, maxlme servit, lit. serves m,ost or especially. 272. SYNomrMES. Dinner, feast, entertainment ; coenoL, epulae, convivium. 1. Coena, oe, £ ; downer, — as the principal family meal. 2. Epykne^ arum., f. pL; feast, entertainment, — with special reference to its sumptuous character. 3. Convivium^ ii, n. ; lit. a living together {con^ vivo) ; FEAST, ENTERTAINMENT, — with Special reference to its social character. 273. YOCABULABY. Audacity, amdacia, ae, f. Best, optlmus, a, um. Choice, conquisltus, a, um. Conversation, semw, dnis, m. Daily, of increase or decrease, in dies ; in dies singulos. See Syn. 399. Deliver (an oration), habeo, ere, ui, Uum; lit. to have. Each, one each, singxdi, ae, a, distrib. num. Eighth of November, ante diem sextum idus Kovembres. G. 642. Entertainment, convivium, ii, n. Feast, viands, epida^, arum, f. pi. Increase, intrans., cresco, ire, crevi, cretum. Load, pile up, exstruo, ire, struxi, structum. Madness, furor, Oris, m. On account of, propter, prep, with ace. 110 LATIN COMPOSITION. Pleasure, enjoyment, deleciaiio, Onis, f. Presence, in the presence of, apud, prep, with ace. Put to death, interfUio, ere, fSci, fedum. Squander, profunda, Sre, fudi, fusum. Such, sometimes rendered by qui, quae, quod, relat. pron. G. 453, 4. Sumptuous, sumptuosus, a, um. Table, mensa, ae, f. Unbridled, effrenatus, a, um. 274. Exercise. 1 . The oration which we are now reading was delivered in the temple of Jupiter Stator. * 2. It was delivered by Cicero on the 8th of November, 171 the presence of the senate. 3. The unbridled audacity of Catiline was at that time increasing daily. 4. Catiline, such was his un- bridled madness, endeavored to put Cicero to death. 5. I will give you the best books which I have. 6. The judge has invited us to dinner. 7. There are some who squander their money upon sumptuous feasts. 8. The tables are loaded with the choicest viands. 9. Many are delighted with entertainments on account of their enjoy- ment of conversation. Lesson LYII. verbs — agreement, voice, tense. indicative MOOD. [1, 13.] 275. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Agreement of Verbs. 460-463. II. Use of Voices. 464,465. VERBS AGREEMENT, VOICE, TENSE. Ill III. Tenses of the Indicative. 466-473. IV. Use of the Indicative. 474-476. 276. Models. I. You assume the name of virtue. II. All things were made by God. III. I will explain as I shall be able those things which you desire. ly. Mithridates has already reigned upwards of twenty-two years. V. It would be tedious to enumerate the uses. I. II. III. Noraen virtutis usur- pas. A Deo omnia facta sunt. Ea quae vis, lit po' tero, explicdbo. IV. Mithridates annum jam tertium et vice- simum regnat. V. Longum est persequi utilitdtes. 277. Remarks. 1. Model II. — All things, omnia. Res is not necessary, as there is no ambiguity. Emphasis determines the position of a Deo. 2. Model IV. — Has reigned upwards of twenty-two years, annum tertium et mceslmum regnat, lit. is reigning the twenty-third year, or plus viginti duo annos regnavit. 3. Model V. — It would be tedious, Latin idiom, it is long, a long task, longum est. 278. Vocabulary. Against, in, prep, with ace. Better, melior, ius, compar. of bonus. Can, could, possum, posse, potui. Decree, consultum, i, n. D Entertain the same sentiments, eddem sentio. Ire, sensi, sen- sum. Founding of the city, urbs condita. G. 549, N. 2. 112 LATIN COMPOSITION, In accordance with, e, ex^ prep. with abl., lit. from. Inactivity, inertia^ ae, f. Keep, servo, are, dvi, atum. Ninetieth, nonagesimus, a, iim. Now = already, jam, adv. Promise, promissum, i, n. Rightly, 7'ecte, adv. Six hundredth, sexcenteslmus, a, um. Tedious, long, longiis, a, um. Thing, res, rei, f. Think, feel, perceive, sentio, ire, sensi, sensum. 279. Exercise. 1. It would be better not to keep tho^e promises. 2. It would be tedious to speak of these things. 3. The city should have been liberated from fear. 4. Can we rightly accuse Cicero of inactivity and remissness? 5. Could he not, in accordance with the decree of the senate, have ordered Catiline to be put to death? 6. Did he not wish to do this? 7. So many entertained the same sentiments as Catiline, that he did not judge this the best thing to do. 8. We have now read the first oration of Cicero against Catiline. 9. In what year was it delivered? 10. It ims delivered in the six hundred and ninety-first year from the founding of the city. Lesson LYIII. subjunctive mood. [2, 4.] 280. Lesson from the Grammar. 1. Tenses of the Subjunctive. 477-482. 1. Sequence of Tenses. 490 ; 491. 2. Exceptions in Sequence. 495. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 113 II. The Potential Subjunctive. 485 ; 486, I.-III. III. The Subjunctive of Desire. 483 ; 483, 1-6. IV. The Subjunctive of Purpose and of Result. 497, 500. 281. Models. I. They strive to conquer. II. May I be able to ac- complish my endeav- ors. III. Would that I had been able to accomplish my endeavors. IV. Let us avoid pride, haughtiness, and ar- rogance. V. Who would seek glory as he would shun in- famy ? VI. I collect all things, that I may write some- thing oieio to you. VII. The house was so fur- nished that it was an ornament to the city. I. Nituntur ut vincant II. Utinam conata effi- cere possim. III. Utinam conata effi- cere potuissem. IV. Superbiam^ fastidi- um^ arrogantiam- que fugidmus. V. Quis gloriam tarn ex- petat qiiam infam^i- am, fugiat f VI. Omnia colltgo^ ut novi scriham alt- quid ad te. VII. Domus sic orndta fuit ut urhi esset ornamento. 282. Remarks. 1. Model I. — They strive to conquer, Latin idiom, they strive that they may conquer. y 2. Model II. — May I be able, possim, or utinam possim. 3. Model III. — Would that I had been able, utinam potuissem. 4. Model V. — Would seek, would shun, expetai, fugiat, Po- tential Subjunctives. 114 LATIN COMPOSITION. 5. Model VI. — Something new, novi allquid, lit. something of new, G. 441, 2 ; 397, 3. Novi^ being emphatic, is at the beginning of the clause. 6. Model VII. — Was an ornament, esset ornamento. For the mood and tense of esset^ see G. 497; 500; 493, 1. For the case of ornamento, see G. 390. 283. Synonymes. Rest, repose, tranquillity ; quies, requies^ tranquillitas. 1. Quies, quietis, f. ; rest, repose, — in itself considered. 2. Hequies, etis, f. ; rest, repose, — as a means of refresh- ing and invigorating the exhausted powers, whether of body or of mind. 3. Tranquillitas, dtis, f ; tranquillity, calmness, re- pose, — involving freedom from care and anxiety. 284. Vocabulary. Affair, business, negotium, ii, n. Civil, domestic, domesilcus, a, um. Dare, audeo, crc, ausus sum. G. 268, 3. Even, etiam, adv. Highest welfare of the state, summa res publtca. Like, similis, e. G. 391, II. 4, (2). Long for, expHo, Sre, petlri, petl- tum. Neglect, negligo, ire, lexi, ledum. that! utinam, interj. Public, puhlicus, a, um. Repose, tranquillitas, atis, f. Rest, quies, etis, f. ; requies, itis, f. Seek, quaero, ire, qiiaesivi, quaesi- tum. Strive, nitor, niti, nisus and nixus sum, dep. Vigilantly, sharply, acriter, adv. Watch, vigllo, are, avi, diiim. Weary, defatigo, are, S,vi, Rtum. Withdraw, se removire ; remdveo, ere, mdvi, mOtum. 285. Exercise. 1. There were ^^i Home so many like Catiline that they even dared to defend him. 2. O that we may be able to SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE OR RESULT. 115 conquer the leader of this civil war! 3. Would that I had received your letter. 4. Cicero the consul strove to de- fend the name and safety of the Eoman people. 5. Let us strive to defend the republic. 6. Cicero, when consul, watched so vigilantly for the safety of the republic, that he has often been called the father of his country. 7. Many long for repose. 8. Many, longing for repose, withdraw from public affairs. 9. Eest does not always delight us. 10. Your wearied mind now seeks rest. 11. Who would neglect the highest welfare of the state ? Lesson LIX. SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE AND OF RESULT- Continued. [2, 8.] 286. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Subjunctive of Purpose with Ut and IsTe. 497, II. 1. Pure Purpose. 497. 2. Mixed Purpose. 498, I.-III. 3. Peculiarities. 499, 1-3. II. Subjunctive of Result with Ui and Ut N'on. 500, II. 1. Pure Result. 500, I. and II. 2. Mixed Result. 501, I.-III. 3. Peculiarities. 502, 1-3. III. Subjunctive with Quo, Quin, Quommus. 497, II. and 2 ; 504. 287. Models. I. It is necessary to eat I. Esse oportet Kt vivas. that you may live. 116 LATIN COMPOSITION. II. I ask you to aid him. III. I fear that you will not endure the labors. IV. It is necessary that vir- tue should attract you. Y. There is no one present who does not see. YI. I cannot but send a let- ter. YII. J)eath does not deter a wise man from de- liberating for the re- public. 11. Te rogo iit eumjuves. III. Timeo ut labores sus- tineas. lY. Te oportet virtus tra- hat. Y. Adest nemo^ qiiiti videat. YI. Facere non possum, quin litteras mit- tam. YII. N'on deterret sapien- tem mors, quomi- nus rei publtcae consulat. 288. Remarks. 1. Moi^toL I. — To EAT, esse, from edo, G. 291, subject of oportet. 2. Model Itl -^ That you will not enduke, ut sustineas. G. 498, III. N. 1. 3. Model IV. — - Ti ahat : for the mood and for the omission of uU see G. 501, I. 1 ; 502, 1. 4. Model V. — Who does not see, quin videat, but that he sees. G. 504, 1. 5. Model VI. — I cannot but send, Latin idiom, / am not able to do but that I may send. 6. Model VII. — From deliberating, Latin idiom, by which tht less he may deliberate. Emphasis places mors at the end of its clause. 289. YOCABULARY. Arms, arma, drum, n. pi. 1,4). G. 131, Attend to, to serve, servio, ire, ivi, itum. G. 385. SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE OR RESULT. 117 Behooves, it behooves, oportet^ oportuit. G. 299. Deter, deterreo, ere, ui, Hum. Diligently, diligenter, adv. Fear, to fear, timeo, ere, ui, Hutu. For == to secure, ad, prep, with ace. Forefathers, majores, um, m. pi. Free, liber, era, erum. From, after verbs of hindering, quominus, conj. Greater, major, us, comparative of magnus. G. 165. Health, valetudo, Inis, f. Homer, Homirus, i, m. Implore, oro, are, avi, atum. Not only — but also, non modo — sed eiiam. Poet, poeta, ae, m. Profit, to profit, conduco, ere, duxi, dudum ; in this sense only in Third Pers. G. 385. Punishment, penalty, poena, ae, f. Rule, impero, are, avi, atum. Studiously, studiose, adv. Take, take up, capio, Ire, cepi, captum. Take care, to take care, caveo, ere, cavi, cautum,. Than, quam, conj. 290. Exercise. 1. Our forefathers took up arms that they might be free. 2. The Monians took up arms not only that they might be free, but also that they might rule. 3. Cicero exhorts us to read studiously his orations. 4. Care must be taken that the punishment may not be greater than the fault. 5. I implore you to attend to your health most diligently. 6. We cannot doubt that virtue especially profits the state. 7. We cannot doubt that there were poets before Homer. 8. I fear that these dangers may increase. 9. It behooves us all to watch for the safety of the republic. 10. Nothing deterred Cicero from defend- ing the republic. IQ 118 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LX. relative clauses of purpose or result. [2, 13.] 291. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Relative Clauses of Purpose. 497, I. II. Relative Clauses of Result. 500, 1. III. Special Constructions in Relative Clauses. 503. 1. After Indefinite Antecedents. 503, I. 2. After U7ius, Solus, and the like. 503, 1. 3. After Dignus, Indignus, Idoneus, Aptics, 503, 2. 292. Models. I. I sent one to state this. II. I am not such a one as to use these things. III. I see nothing else which we can do. IV. There are some who are feared. V. Trioe wisdom is the only thing which dispels sadness. VI. The fables are worthy to be read. I. Jfisi qui hoc diceret. II. N'on is sum qui his utar. III. Nihil aliud video, quod agere possl- mus. IV. /Sunt qui timeantur, V. Yera sapientia est una, quae moestitiam pellat. VI. Fdbidae dignae sunt quae legantur. 293. Remarks. 1. Model I. — One to state this, Latin idiom, who should state this. RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE OR RESULT. 119 2. Model II. — As to use, qui utar, lit. who may vse. 3. Model III. — Which we can do, quod ag^re possimus, lit. which we may he able to do. 4. Model V. — The only thing, iina, agreeing with sapientia. 5. Model VI. — Worthy to be kead, dignae quae legantur, lit. worthy which may be read. 294. Synontmes. Joy, gladness, joyoiisness ; gaucUum, laetitia, Mlaritas. 1. Gaudium^ n, n. ; joy, the emotion of joy, — in itself considered. 2. Laetitia^ ae, f.; gladness, joy, — as shown in the countenance or in action. 3. Hilaritas^ dtis, f. ; joyousness, cheerful, happy dis- position, — not a momentary feeling, but a characteristic of the temperament. 295. Vocabulary. Be elated, efferor, efferri, elatus sum ; pass, of effi.ro. Cheerfulness, hilarltas, atis, f. Deny, nego, are, avi, atum. Excessive, nimius, a, um. Faesulae, Faesulae, arum, f. pi. Fill, compleo, ere, evi, etum. Forever, inperpet\ Greatest, maximus, a, um. G. 1G5. Lose, amitto, ere, misi, missum. On the part of, often rendered by the Genitive. Perpetual, perpetuus, a, um. Rejoicing, laetitia, ae, f. Sad, tristis, e. Whole, cunctus, a, um. 296. Exercise. 1. Many states sent ambassadors to Rome to establisli peace and friendship with the Eoman people. 2. There 120 LATIN COMPOSITION. were some, both in Home and at Faesulae, who denied that Catiline was forming a conspiracy against the republic. 3. Let us not lose our cheerfulness. 4. I fear you will lose your cheerfulness forever. 5. There were some in the temple of Jupiter Stator who were filled with the greatest joy. 6. In so great rejoicing on the part of the whole state, you alone are sad. 7. We cannot doubt that the king was elated with excessive joy. 8. The orations of (Jicero are worthy to be read by all. /.' // Lesson LXI. subjunctive of condition. [3, 4.] 297. Lesson from the Grammar. Rule for the Subjunctive of Condition. 507, 513. 1. Condition Supplied. 507, K 7. 2. Force of Tenses. 507, IL, III. 3. Dum, modo^ dummddo. 513, I. 4. Ac si, ut si, quasi, etc. 513, II. n. Conditions with Si, Msi, M, Sin. 507-510. 1. Mixed Forms. 511 ; 512. 2. Subjunctive and Indicative. 511, 1 and 2. 298. Models. I. Mental -powers remai7i, 1. Manent ingenia,mO' if only industry re- do permaneat in- mains. dustria. II. If I should deny it, I II. Si 7iegem, mentiar. should speak falsely. SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONDITION. 121 III. You ca^mo^ retain your manhood^ if you ar- range all things with reference to pleasure. IV. No one without hope would expose himself to death. Y. As if they should ap- propriate others' pos- sessions to their own use. YI. If it was not lawful, it was not necessary. YII. You would do wrong, if you should not give warning. VIII. Eloquence would not be praised, if it ac- complished nothing. IX. If we shun folly, let us pursue wisdom. X. They would have aban- doned their fields, had he not sent a letter. III. Non potestis^ volup- tCite omnia diri- gentes^ retinere virtutem. lY. Nemo sine spe se offerret ad mor- tem. Y. Ut si in suam, rem, alieiia convertant. YI. Si non licebat^ non necesse erat. YII. Improhe feceris^ ni- si monueris. VIII. Eloque7itia non lau- daretur^ si nihil efficeret. IX. /Si stidtitiam fugi- mus^ sapientiam sequamur. X. Relicturi agros e- rant^ nisi litteras misisset. 299. Remarks. 1 . Model III. — If you arrange all things with reference to PLEASURE, t'oluptate omnia dirigentes, lit. arranging all things by pleasure. G. 507, N. 7. 2. Model IV. — Observe the position of ad mortem. 3. Model V. — To their own use, in suam rem, lit. into their own affair. 122 LATIN COMPOSITION. 4. Model IX. — Let us pursue, sequamur. G. 483. 5. Model X. — They would have abandoned, reliduri erant, lit were about to abandon. G. 511, N. 4. 300. Vocabulary. Be willing, to wish, volo, velle, volui. Conscript Fathers, Patres Con- scripti, m. pi. Depart, set out, projiciscor, i, fec- tus sum, dep. Exile, exsilium, ii, n. Gladly, laete, adv. Inaction, inertia, ae, f. If only, dummddo, conj. Leisure, at leisure, otiosus, a, urn. Provide for, provldeo, ere, vidi, visum, with dat. Suppress, comprlmo, Ire, pressi, press um. Tell, dico, ire, dixi, dictvm. Unless, nisi, conj. 301. Exercise. 1. What would you have said, if Cato had been ordered to go into exile? 2. If you were willing to hear me, I would tell you. 3. I would gladly hear you, if only I were at leisure. 4. Unless you suppress this conspiracy, Conscript Fathers, you will be condemned for inaction. 5. If you (pi.) will watch for the safety of the republic, you will be praised by all the citizens. 6. If Cicero had not provided for the state, he would have been condemned by all. 7. If Catiline would only depart from the city, we should all be liberated from fear. 8. O that he had not formed this conspiracy against the republic I / y / SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONCESSION. 123 Lesson LXII. SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONCESSION. [3, 7.] ^ 302. Lesson from the Grammar. 515. I Rule for the Subjunctive of Concession II. Classes of Concessive Clauses. 515. 1. With Quamquam. 515, I. and N. 1. 2. With Licet, Quamvis, Quantumvis, etc. 3. With the Compounds of Si. 515, II. 515,111. 303. Models. I. Though he may deride, reason will yet avail more. II. Though they understand, they never speak. III. Acquit Verres, though he confesses that he has accepted moneys. IV. Though pai7i may not be the greatest evil, it is certainly an evil. Y. Though glory may not possess anything in it- self, yet it follows vir- tue. I. Licet irrideat, plus tamen ratio vaUbit. II. Quamquam intellt- gunt, tamen nun- quam dicunt. III. Absolmte Verrem, qui sefateatur pecunias ce2nsse. IV. N'e sit summum ma- lum dolor^ tnalum certe est. V. LJtsi nihil haheat in se gloria, tamen virtu- tern sequitur. 124 LATIN COMPOSITION. 304. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Though he confesses, quifateatur, lit. who may confess. G. 615, III. The verb on which an infinitive clause depends is often inserted in that clause directly after the subject, as fateatur after se. See Part Third, 601. 2. Model IV. — Ne sit. G. 515, III. Observe also the order of words, as affected by emphasis. 3. Model V. — Emphasis places gloria at the end of the clause. 305. Synonymes. Fear, alarm; metus^ timor^ formido, 1. Metus, us, m. ; fear, a rational fear, — arising from real danger. 2. Timor, oris, m. ; fear, — a fear arising either from timidity or from imminent danger, and accordingly less under the control of reason than metus. 3. Forrmdo, mis, f ; alarm, dread, consternation, — a great and overwhelming fear. 306. Vocabulary. Aid, means, opes, opum, f. pi. G. 133, 1. Although, quamquam, licet, quam- vis, etc. G. 515. Banish, throw off, ahjicio, ire, jeci, jectum. Conceal, occulto, are, Svi, Stum. Consternation, /orwlcfo, Inis, f. Disgraceful, turpis, e. Emolument, emolumentum, i, n. Even if, etiamsi, conj. Fear, timor, Oris, m. ; metus, us, m. Follow, consiquor, i, secutus sum, dep. Honorable, honestus, a, um. Right, rectus, a, um. Sudden, subltus, a, um. Way, manner, modus, i, m. '■'/ SUBJUNCTIVE OF CAUSE AND TIME. 125 307. Exercise. 1. The best men do what is right, even if they see that no emolument will follow. 2. Although they fear him, they deny it. 3. Even if they feared him, they would deny it. 4. That which is disgraceful, although it may be concealed, can in no way be honorable. 5. With your aid, even if we were timid, we would banish all fear. 6. Let not fear deter us from watching for the safety of the republic. 7. Let us liberate the state both from danger and from fear. 8. Let not this sudden consternation de- ter us from doing what is right. Lesson LXIIL subjunctive of cause and time. [3, 11.] 308' Lesson from the Grammar. L Rule for the Subjunctive of Cause. 516, 517. 1. Clauses with Quum. 517. 2. Relative Clauses denoting Cause. 517. 3. Clauses with Quod, Quia, Quoniam, Quando. 516. II. Rule for the Subjunctive of Time. 518-521. 1. Clauses with Dum, Donee, Quoad. 519. 2. Clauses with Antequam, Priusquam, Quum, 520, 521. 309. Models. I. Since these things are I. Quae quum ita sint, so, proceed. perge. 126 LATIN COMPOSITION. II. O the power of truth, since it defends it- self! III. I heard Zeno when I was at Athens. IV. Since I have spoken of the kind of war, I will now speak of its magnitude. V. No one shuns pleasure itself because it is pleasure. VI. You will keep them till I see you. VII. While the laws were in force. VIII. They are present be- fore it is light. IX. Before he comes, he will send a letter. II. vis veritatis, quae se de/endat ! III. Zenonem, quum A- thenis essem, an- diebam. IV. Quoniam de genere belli dixi, nunc de inagyiitudme di- cani. V. Nemo ipsam vohip- tdtem^ quia voliq)- tas sit^fugit. VI. Ea continebis quoad te videam. VII. Dum leges vigebant. VIII. Priusquam lucet^ adsunL IX. Antequam veniat^ litteras mittet. 310. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Qtiae quum. G. 569, III. 1. 2. Model II. — Since it defends, quae defendatj lit. which may defend. G. 517. 8. Model IIL — When I was, quum essem. G. 621, II. 2. 4. Model IV. — Op its magnitude, de magnitud\ne, concerning the mag- nitude. The possessive its should not be rendered. 6. Model IX. — Before he comes, antSquam vmiat. G. 520, 2. SUBJUNCTIVE OF CAUSE AND TIME. 127 311. Vocabulary. Be in force, vigeo, ere, ui. Curtius, Curtius, ii, m. Decree, consultum, i, n. ; a decree of the senate, senatus consul- tum. Prive, cast out, ejlcio, ere, jeci, jedum. Hate, odi, odisse. G. 297, I. Lycurgus, Lycurgus, i, m. Record, perscrlbo, Sre, scripsi, scriptum. Scarcely, scarcely yet, vixdum, adv. Since, as, quum, conj. Strong, ample, amplus, a, um ; in the strongest terms, amplis- slmis verbis. Thank, gratias ago, ere, egi, ac- tum. Thanks, graiiae, arum, f. pi. G. 132. While, dum, conj. 312. Exercise. 1. I had scarcely read your letter when Curtius came to me. 2. They often heard Cicero, when they were in Rome. 3. Many hate the consul because he has driven Catiline into exile. 4. I praise the consul because he has driven this man into exile. 5. The senate thanked Cicero in the strongest terms, because he had liberated the re- public from the greatest dangers. 6. Since these things are so, let us defend the consul. 7. The Lacedaemonians were brave while the laws of Lycurgus were in force. 8. Let us wait until this decree of the senate is recorded. 128 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LXIV. i SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. [4, 2.] 313. Lesson from the Grammar. Rule for the Subjunctive in Indirect Questions. 529, I. Single and Double Questions. 529, 1. 314. Models. I. II. III. IV. I understood what the law meant. It is uncertain how long the life of each one of us will be. It is asked whether vir- tue is sought for its own worth, or for cer- tain advantages. It is asked whether vir- tue can be produced by nature or by edu- cation. Let us inquire whether or not there was need of a fleet. I. II. III. IV. Intellexi quid sihi lex vellet. Incertum est^ giiam longa nostrum cii- jusque vita futura sit. Quaerttur, virtus sii- amne propter digtii- tatem, an propter fnictus aliquos ex- petdtur. Quaeritur natUra an doctrina possit ef ftci virtus. V. Opus fuerit classe nec7ie quaeramus. 315. Remarks. 1. MoDPX I. — Meant, sihi vellet, lit. wished for itself. For mood and tense, see G. 529, I. ; 493, 1. The order quid sihi lex is more euphonious than quid lex sibi. SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 129 2. Model III. — Whether — or, ne — an. But in models IV. and V. the particle is omitted in the first member. G. 529, 3, 1). 3. Model IV. — Emphasis places virtm at the end of the sentence. 4. Model V. — Let us inquire, quaeramics. G. 483. Or not, necne, G. 529, 3, 2). Of a fleet, dasse, G. 414, IV. 316. Vocabulary. Command, tmpero, are, avi, atum. Depart, go, eo, ire, ivi, Hum. Difficult, difficilis, e. Disagree, dissentio, ire, sensi, sen- sum. False, falsus, a, um. Hesitate, dubito, are, avi, atum. Important, great, magnus, a, um. Inquire, quaero, ere, quaesivi or ii, quaesvtum. Or not, an non ; necne. G. 529, 3, 2); 353, 2, N. 3. Preserve, servo, are, avi, atum. Presume, believe, credo, ire, dldi, ditum. Question, quaestio, onis, f. Report, rumor, oris, m. School, schola, ae, f. Subject, thing, res, rei, f. Think, puto, are, avi, atum. Upon, concerning, de, prep, with abl. Whether — not, nonne. Whether — or, vtrum — an. Wonder, miror^ ariy atus sum, dep. a 317. Exercise. 1. Let us ask Catiline whether he hesitates to depart from the city. 2. Cicero asked him whether he hesitated to depart from the city at the command of the consul. 3. I wonder why philosophers disagree upon the most im- portant subjects. 4. It is difficult to say whether this re- port is true or false. 5. They inquired of me whether I did not think that Cicero would preserve the republic. 6. Whether or not riches make us happy, is the question. 7. When you were in Athens, you were often, I presume, in the schools of the philosophers. l> 130 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LXV, subjunctive by attraction. subjunctive in in- direct discourse. [4, 6.] 318. Lesson prom the Gbammab. [jL. Subjunctive by Attraction. 529, II. II. Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse. 524. 319. Models. I, I formed the plan, to de- I. Cepi consilium ut an- part before it was light. tequam luceret exi- rem. II. You were saying that you II. Dicebas te velle, quae wished those things egissem feliciter eve- which I had done, to ntre. result prosperously. 320. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Before it was or should be light, aniiquam Iw ceret, Subj. by Attraction because of its connection with exirem. 2. Model II. — Those things which I had done, quae egissem, antecedent omitted. G. 451, 1. Egissem, Subj. by Attraction. 321. Synonymes. Safe, unharmed, secure ; salvus, incolumiSy tutus. 1. Salvus^ «, um ; safe, preserved, rescued from dan- ger, — applicable both to persons and to things. SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION. 131 2. Incolumis, e ; safe, unharmed, — especially applicable to persons. Incolumis involves more than salvus. He who escapes salvus, escapes with his life, though not necessarily without injury; but he who escapes incolumis, escapes un- hurt. 3. Tutus, a, um ; secure, free from danger. 322. Vocabulary. Believe, credo, ere, didi, ditum. G. 885, II. Children, liberi, drum, m. pi. G. 131, 1, 1). Desire, cupio, ere, ivi, itum. Dine, coeno, are, avi, aium. Doubtful, duhius, a, um. There is no doubt = it is not doubtful, non duhium est. Unharmed, incolumis, e. With, at the house of, apud, prep, with ace. J^ 323. Exercise. 1. He says that he had dined with the consul before he received the letter. 2. They say that he had read the letter before the messenger came to him. 3. We have said that the Lacedaemonians were brave while the laws of Lycurgus were in force. 4. Did you not say that many hated Cicero because he had driven Catiline into exile? "5. I said that I praised the consul because he had driven this man into exile. 6. There is no doubt that there were many who did not believe Cicero while Catiline was in the city. 7. There is no one who does not desire that his children should be unharmed and happy. 8. The republic is at length safe. 9. There is no doubt that this city is secure. 132 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LXVL indirect discourse. [4, 10.] ^ 324- Lesson from the Grammar. I. Moods in the Oratio Obliqua. 523, 524. II. Tenses in the Oratio Obliqua. 525. III. Pronouns in the Oratio Obliqua. 526. 325. Models. I. Democritus says that I. Democritus dicit in- there are innumerable numerabiles esse worlds. rtiundos. II. They say that Plato en- II. Platonem ferunt de tertained the same animorum aeterni- opinion of the imraor- tdte sensisse idem tality of the soul as quod Pythagoram. Pythagoras. III. Hippias boasted that III. Hippias gloriatus est there was nothing in 7iihil esse uUa in any art which he did arte quod ipse nes- not know. clret. 326. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Of (on the subject of) the immortality of the SOUL (of souls), de animOrurn aeternHnte. G. 569, II. 3. Enter- tained the same OPINION AS Pythagoras, Latin idiom, thought the same thing which Pythagoras (thought). Pyihagdram, subject of sensisse understood. G. 635, 5. 2. Model III. — Which he did not know, quod ipse n^sdret. For mood and tense of nesclret, see G. 624 ; 493, 1. INDIEECT DISCOURSE. 133 327- Synonymes. Courage, fortitude; virtus, fortitudo, 1. Virtus, utis, f. ; courage, valor, energy, — as shown in action. 2. Fortitudo, mis, f.; fortitude, firmness, — as shown in resistance. 328. YOCABULARY. Africa, Africa, ae, f. I Go from, exeo, Ire, it, \tum. Ask, inquire, quaero, ere, quaesivi, Here, hie, adv. situm ; it is asked, quaerltur. Mention, commemoro, are^ S/ei, quaesUum est, atum. Attract, alVlcio, ire, lexi, ledum. Second time, iterum, adv. Compel, cogo, Ire, coegi, coactum. There, illic, adv. ^ oviMM^Q, fortitudo, inis, f. Iwhy, quid. G. 3Y8, 2. 329. Exercise. 1. Why should / here mention the Roman senators? 2. He asked why he should there mention the Roman senators. 3. We have said that the orations of Cicero are worthy to be read by all. 4. It is ofte^i asked whether the letters of Cicero are worthy to be read ^ second time. 5. They say that Catiline would not have gone from the city unless he had feared the consul. 6. Your brother says that he will write to you when he comes to Rome. 7. Cicero says that Hannibal was compelled by the valor of Scipio to return into Africa. 8. There is no doubt that virtue attracts to itself the good and wise. 9. It is the part of fortitude to bear all things bravely. % 134 I^TIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LXYII. IMPERATIVE. [4, 11.] 330. Lesson from the Grammar* Tenses of the Imperative. 487, 1 and 2. Use of the Imperative. 487-489. 1. Circumlocutions. 489. 2. Imperative supplied. 487, 4. 3. Imperative in Prohibitions. 488, 489. , A 331. Models. r-1 Devote yourselves to I. I?i studium incum' study. btte. II. If I have committed IL /Si quid in tepeccavi^ any offence against ignosce. you, pardon me. III. You shall consider the subject. III. Rem penditote. IV. The safety of the people IV. Saluspopuli suprema shall Ibo the supreme lex esto. law. V. Do not wish that which V. NolUe id mile quod cannot be done. fieri non potest. VI. Let them be happy. VI. Sint beati. VII. If anything shall hap- VII. Si quid acciderity pen, you will let me facies ut sdam. know it. IMPERATIVE. 135 332. Remarks. 1. Model V. — Do not wish, nolite velle, lit. be unwilling to wish. G. 489, 1). 2. Model YI. — Let them be = may they be, sint. G. 483. 3. Model VII. — Shall happen = shall have happened, i. e. before you let me know, accident, Fut. Perf. G. 4*73. Yoti will let me know, Latin idiom, you will make (cause) that I may know. G. 498, U. Facies^ Fut. Indie, for the Imperative. G. 487, 4. 333. Vocabulary. Conspirators, conjurati, drum , m. pi. Devote one's self to, incumbo, ere, cuiiii, cubitum, in with ace. Highest public welfare, summa res piiblica. Liberal, liberalis, e. Neglect, negligo, ere, lexi, ledum. Nor, with imperatives, neve, adv. Oppose, obsto, are, stlti, statum. G. 386. Peril, perinilum, t, n. Personal, of one's self alone, gen. of solus, a, um. G. 151. Philosophy, philosophia, ae, f. Violate, violo, are, avi, atum. 334. Exercise. 1. Let us devote ourselves to liberal studies. 2. Know, Conscript Fathers, that Catiline has formed a conspiracy against the republic. 3. Do not think that the consul will neglect the highest public welfare. 4. Do not doubt that this can be done. 5. Do not hesitate to do this. 6. Let me know what the conspirators are doing. 7. Let us not violate the laws, nor oppose the decrees of the senate. 8. Kemember that Cicero preserved the republic at his own personal peril. 9. Do you not think that these books on philosophy are worthy to be read a second time ? 136 LATIN C03IP0SITI0N. Lesson LXYIII. infinitive.' 335. Lesson from the Grammab. I. Tenses of the Infinitive. 537. II. Subject of the Infinitive. 536. III. Predicate after the Infinitive. 536, 2. 1. Predicate attracted. 536, 2. IV. Infinitive as Subject. 538. 1. Personal Construction for Impersonal. 534, 1. ^. 336. Models. ^ I. I hope that our friend- I. Spero nostram ami- ship does not need citiam non egere witnesses. testihus. II. I desire both to be grate- II. Volo et esse et haheri ful and to be so re- gratus. garded. III. No one can be happy III. Beatus esse si?ie vir- without virtue. tute nemo potest. IV. To defraud is base. IV. Frauddre turpe est. V. It is true tliat there is V. Vertwi est^ amicitiani friendship among the i7iter bonos esse. good. VI. True praise is thought VI. Vera laus deberi vir- to be due to virtue tuti uniputdtur. alone. * The remaining Exercises in this work, although based entirely upon Ciceronian models r may accompany the reading of any Latin autlior. INFINITIVE, 137 VII. Demosthenes is said to have heard Plato. VII. Platonem audivisse Demosthenes diet- tur. 337. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Does not need, non egere. After verbs of hoping ^ the Infinitive is generally in the Future tense ; but it is in the Present when the action itself belongs to Present time. 2. Model II. — Both to be grateful and to be so regarded. Latin idiom, both to he and to be regarded grateful. 3. Model VII. — Emphasis places Platonem at the beginning of the sentence ; accordingly the subject is placed later in the sentence — here directly before its verb. 338. Synonymes. In vain, to no purpose ; frustra^ nequidquam. 1. Frustra ; in vain, avith disappointment, — used with reference to the disappointment of the person rather than to the failure of the undertaking. 2. Nequidquam ; in vain, to no purpose, — used with reference to the failure of the undertaking. 339. Vocabulary. Bring, bear, fero^ ferre, tuU, la- tum. Purpose, desire, sententia, ae, f. According to one's desire, ex sententia. Rejoice, gaudeo, ere, gavlsus sum. G. 268, 3. Sail, to sail, navlgo, are, avi, atum. Voyage, to have a prosperous voy- age, ex sententia navigare, lit. to sail according to one^s opin- ion, or desire. 138 LATIN COMPOSITION. 340. Exercise. 1. Did you not say that philosophers often disagree? 2. I said that philosophers disagree upon the most im- portant subjects. 3. They all say that virtue makes men happy. 4. It is certain that virtue can make us happy. 5. The consul is said to have written this book. 6. Do you not w^ish to be happy? 7. We wish to be not only happy, but also good and wise. 8. God does nothing in vain. 9. TFe do many things in vain. 10. .They brought us aid to no purpose. 11. Cicero says that Cato was called wise. 12. It is permitted us to be wise. 13. They rejoice that the consul has had a prosperous voyage. ^ Lesson LXIX. INFINITIVE — Continued. 341. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Infinitive as Object. 533-535. 1. With Subject Accusative. 535 ; 535, I.-IV. 2. Without Subject Accusative. 533, I. 1. i- II. Infinitive in Special Constructions. 539. 342. Models. I. Let us consider that the L Cogitemusvirtutis glo- glory of virtue is eter- riam esse sempiter- nal. ^^^' INFINITIVE. 139 II. No art can imitate the II. skill of nature. III. That which is good can III. be made better by m- struction. rV. We desire to avoid these IV. things. V. The first step towards V. wisdom is to know one's self. VI. The oracle that Athens VI. would be victorious had been given. Nulla ars imitdri sol- lertiam naturae po- test. Quae bona sunt, fieri nieliora possunt doc- trlna. Haec vitiire cupimus. Primus gradus ad sapientiarti est se ip~ sum novisse. Oraculum datum erat victrices Athenas fore. 343. Remarks. 1. Model III. — That which is good, i. e. whatever is good, quae bona sunt, lit. what things are good. The Latin uses the plural because the statement is general, and is not confined to a single object. The antecedent, which is the subject of possunt, is omitted. G. 451, 1. Emphasis places doctrina at the end of the sentence. 2. Model V. — To know one's self, se ipsum novisse, Predicate after est. G. 539, I. Novisse, Perfect in form, but Present in sense. G. 297, I. 2. 3. Model VI. — That Athens would be victorious, victrices 4thenas fore, in apposition with oraculum. G. 539, II. 344. Syj^^onymes. Opponent, enemy ; adversarius, hostis, inimtcus, 1. Adversarius., it, m. ; opponent, adversary, — the ge- neric word for an opponent of any kind, whether in war or in peace. 140 LATIN COMPOSITION. 2. Hostis^ is, m. ; public enemy ; enemy, — in war. 3. InimJcuSy t, m. ; personal or private enemy, personal FOE. 345. Vocabulary. Arrive, come, venio, ire, veni, ven- ium. Bv. unwilling, nolo, nolle ; nolui. G. 293. By, through, per, prep, with ace. Exceedingly, vehementer, adv. Foe, inimlcus, i, m. Force, vis, vis, f. G. 66. Impose upon, impono, ere, posui, positum. Opponent, adversarius, ii, m. Profess, profiteor, eri, fessus sum, dep. Refute, refuto, are, avi, atum. Rumor, rumor, oris, m. Visit, viso, ire, i, um. Young man, adolescens, entis, m. 346. Exercise. 1. There are some who profess to be wise. 2. No one is an orator who is unwilling to be like Demosthenes. 3. The young men wished to hear Demosthenes. 4. We all can be useful. 5. The tyrant is said to have imposed laws upon the state by force. 6. I desire to visit Rome and Athens. 7. I rejoice exceedingly that you have arrived safe in Italy, and that you have had a prosperous voyage. 8. There were some who favored the enemies of their country. 9. We call them not foes, but enemies. 10. Opponents must be refuted. 11. The rumor was, that the enemy had been conquered by Caesar. 12. 1 wonder at this, that you have not yet come to Home. SUBJECT AND OBJECT CLAUSES. 141 Lesson LXX. subject and object clauses. 347. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Four Forms distinguished. 540, I.-IY. II. Forms of Subject Clauses. 501 ; 529, I.; 538 ; 540. III. Forms of Object Clauses. 498 ; 501, II.; 529, 1.; 533- 535 ; 540. tPVu aJ^ 348. Models. I. It is asked why they I. disagree. II. That you are of a II. cheerful spirit great- ly delights me. III. The result is, that III. every one is de- lighted. IV. It is a fault that they IV. bestow too much study upon obscure subjects. V. I know not what is to V. be done. VI. I wonder that you VI. write nothing to me. VII. The sun causes all VII. things to bloom. Quaerttur cur dis^ sentiant. Te hilari animo esse valde mejuvat. Fit ut quisque de- lectetur. Vitium est quod nimis magnum studium in res obscuras conft- runt. Quid agendum sit 7iescio. Miror te ad me ni- hil scrihere. Sol efficit ut omnia floreant. 142 LATIN COMPOSITION. VIII. I grieved that I had lost the companion of my labor. VIII. Doleham quod con- sortem labor is amiseram. 349. Remarks. . 1. It will be observed that, in the first four models, the indirect ques- tion, the infinitive clause, and the clauses with ut and quod^ are all used as subjects, while in the other models the corresponding clauses are all used as objects. 2. Model III. — The result is = it is effected, it comes to pass, ^t. For mood in delectetur, see G. 501, I. 1. 3. Model VII. — Causes all things to bloom, Latin idiom, effects that all things may hloom. 350. Vocabulary, Absurd, absurdus, a, um. Also; I, he, she, &c., also, idem, eddem, idem ; lit. the same. Apparel, vestitus, us, m. As, after tarn, quam, adv. Be the slave of, servio, ire, tvi, Itum. G. 385. Civil, civilis, e. Costly, pretiosvs, a, um. Happen, ^o, fieri, f actus sum. G. 294. Indeed, enim, conj. Knowledge, scientia, ae, f. Law, jus, juris, n. ; civil law, jus civile. Of greater value, pluris. G. 404, note 1. Show, ostendo, ere, i, tensum. So much, taniopire, adv. Some — others, alii — alii. G. 459. That, in that, quod, conj. Whether, in double questions, utrum; ne, encUtic. G. 529, 2,2). 351. Exercise. 1 . You will inquire of us why we are so much delighted with the study of philosophy. 2. What, indeed, is so absurd as to be delighted with costly apjMrel ? 3. Py- GERUNDS. 143 thagoras says that some men are the slaves of glory, others of money. 4. He also says that philosophers are students of wisdom. 5. It is my duty to show what I think. 6. It is my duty both to show what I think and to defend what you have done. 7. The question is asked whether eloquence or a knowledge of the civil law is of the greater value. 8. He boasted that he had conquered the enemy in many battles. 9. It often happens that men are de- lighted with glory. Lesson LXXI. GERUNDS. 352. Lesson from the Geammae. I. Gerunds and Gerundives. 541-544. II. Genitive of Gerunds and Gerundives. 542, I. ; 544, 1. III. Dative of Gerunds and Gerundives. 542, XL ; 544, 2. IV. Accusative of Gerunds and Gerundives. 542, III.; 544, 2, N. 2. 353. Models. I. The power of speech en- I. Eloquendi vis ej^^cit ables us to teach others ut ea quae scimus those things which we alios docere possJ- know. mils. IL There have been formed II. Inita sunt consilia plans for destroying nrbis delendae. the city. HI. The season is suitable for IH. Tempus demetendis gathering fruits. fructibu^ accom- raoddtum est. 144 LATIN COMPOSITION. IV. The day will furnish IV. Dies altquid ad cogi- something for medita- tandum dahit. tion. V. He assigned the citizens V. Attrihuit cives inter- to Gahinius to put to Jiciendos Gabinio. death. 354. Remarks. 1. Model I. — The power of speech, eloquendi vis, lit. the power of speaking. We know, scimus, not attracted into tlie Subjunctive. See G. 529, 11. N. 1, 2.) 2. Model II. — Plans for destroying the city, consilia urhis delendae, lit. plans of the city to he destroyed. For urhis delendae we may use urhem delendi. 3. Model V. — To put to death, or to be put to death, interjici- endos, agreeing with cives. See G. 644, 2, N. 2. 355. Synonymes. Mind, soul, intellect, talent ; ammus, mens^ ingenium. 1. Animus^ % m. ; mind, soul, — especially as the seat of the emotions. 2. Mens., mentis., f ; the intellect, the understanding, 1 HE REASONING FACULTY. 3. Ingenium., ii., n. ; talent, mental endowment. 356. Vocabulary. Abandon, relinquo, ire, llqui, lic- tum. Accumulate, trans., augeo, ere, auxi^ auctum. Assign, iribuo, ire, i, idum. Bestow upon, impertio, ire, tvi of ii, itiim. Desire, libido, litis, f. GERUNDS. 145 Endowed with, praeditus, a, iim. For, after idoneus, ad, prep, with ace. Furnish, orno, are, avi, atum. Government, regnum, i, n. Labor, labor, oris, m. Mind, soul, animus, i, m. Nature, naiura, ae, f. Object, thing, res, ret, f. Perceive, percipio, ere, cepi, cep- inm. Plunder, diripio, ire, ripui, rep- tum. Rejoice, laetor, art, atus sum. Secure, cause, conciliate, concihoy are, avi, atum. Sense, sensus, us, m. Strengthen, nourish, alo, ere, alui, altum. Suitable, idoneus, a, um. Talent, ingenium, ii, n. Torture, crucio, are, avi, atum. Understanding, mens, mentis, f. Very much, plurimum, adv. Well, bene, adv. 357. Exercise. 1. Wisdom is the art of living well and happily. 2. 1 rejoice that you are desirous of securing peace among i he citizens. 3. Avaricious men are tortured, not only by the desire of accumulating, but also by the fear of losing. 4. Cicero bestowed his labor upon the work of saving the republic. 5. Nature has furnished the mind with senses suitable for perceiving objects. 6. There were some who abandoned their country itself to be plundered. 7. Wliat is better than a soul endowed with virtue? 8, Great talent, even if it is not strengthened by learning, often avails very much. 9. Cicero says that the govern- ment of the whole mind has been assigned to the under- standing. 146 LATIN COMrOSIlION. Lesson LXXII. gerunds and supines. 358. Lesson from the Grammab. I. Ablative of Gerunds and Gerundives. 542, IV.; 544,2 II. Supine in um. 545, 546. 1. Its place supplied. 546, 4. III. Supine in it. 547. 1. Common Examples. 547, 2. I. 359. Models. The mind is nourished by learning. II. No art is able hy imita- tion to attain the skill of nature. III. They spen d all their time in learning. IV. I was then thinking of (concerning) sending the boys into Greece. V. Verres sends to ask for the vessels. VI. It seems difficult to say what the cause is. I. Mens discendo aUtur. II. Nulla ars sollertiam naturae conseqiii 2^0- test imitando. III. Omne temjyus in dis- cendo consmnunt. IV. Depueris in Gi'aeciatn transportandis turn cogitahain. V. Verres mittit rogatuni vasa. VI. Difficile dictu videtur quae causa sit. 360. Remarks. 1. Model III. — All their time, omne iempus. The possessive is unnecessary. GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 147 2. Model IV. — Of (about, concerning) sending the boys into Greece, de pv.eris in Graeciam transportandis, lit. concerniJig the hoys to he transported into Greece. 361. Vocabulary. Commit, commit to memory, edisco, ere, didUi. Exercise, exerceo, ere, ui, Hum. Gratitude, gratia, ae, f. Hearer, avdiens, entis, m. and f. Leisure, otium, ii, n. Memory, memoria, ae, f. More, magis, adv. G. 170. Necessary, necessarius, a, um. Requite a favor, gratiam refiro, ferre, tuli, latum. Salute, saliito, are, avi, atum. Spend, consumo, ere, sumpsi, sumptum. Understand, cognosco, ire, novi, nitum. Word for word, ad verhum ; lit. to a word. 362. Exercise. 1. We all have spent much time in reading. 2. Cicero spent much time in reading the orators and poets. 3. That day was spent in reading ; there was no leisure for writing. 4. The orator spent his leisure in writing history. 5. Let the memory be exercised by committing word for word the orations of Cicero. 6. He is the best orator who by his speaking both informs and delights the minds of his hearers. 7. No duty is more necessary than that of re- quiting a favor. 8. The ambassadors have come to salute the king. 9. The orations of Cicero are easy to un- derstand. ^ 148 LATIN COMPOSITION. ~\ /=» " Lesson LXXIII. ^ '^' ^ participles. 363. Lesson from the Gra I. Tenses of Participles. 550. II. Use of Participles. 548, 549. vj t 364. Models. Every evil is in the be- ginning easily sup- pressed. II. The sun by its rising causes the day. III. Aeschines, when con- demned, betook him- self to Rhodes. IV. I should think unpop- ularity incurred by virtue, not unpopu- larity, but glory. V. The mind, though it does not see itself, dis- cerns other things. VI. He assigned us to Cethe- gus to slaughter. VII. Homer Hved before the founding of Borne. I. 11. III. IV. Omnemalum nascens facile opjmmttur. /Sol oriens diem co7i- ftcit. Aeschines damnatus se llhodum contu- lit. Invidiam virtutepar- tam gloriam^ non invidiam, putdrem. V. Ammtis se non videns alia cernit. VI. Attribuit nos truci- dandos Cethego. VII. Homerus fuit ante Romxim condttam. 365. Remarks. 1. Model I. — In the beginning, nascens, lit. arising, beginning. 2. Model II. — By its rising, oriens, lit. rising. PARTICIPLES. 149 3. Model III. — When condemned, damnatvs, lit. having been con- demned. 4. Model V. — Though it does not see, non videns, lit. not seeing. 5. Model VI. — To slaughter, irucidandos, lit. to be slaughtered. 6. Model VII. — Before the founding of Rome, ante Romam condltam, lit. before Rome founded. 366. Vocabulary. Be born, nascor, i, natus sum, dep. Born for, natus, a, itm, ad with ace. Dated, datus, a, um; lit. given. Deed, factum, i, n.; lit. thing done ; good deed, rede factum ; lit. thing rightly done. Eternal, sempiternus, a, nm. Hand, manus, ks, f. Hero, vir, viri, m. Influence, induce, induco, ere, duxi, ductum. Letter from me, you, &c., epistola mea, tua, etc. ; lit. my, &c., letter. Also epistola a me, etc. Myself, yourself, &c., intensive, ipse, a, um. Keward, praemium, ii, n. Save, conserro, are, avi, atum. Seek, pursue, sequor, i, secutus sum, dep. So, tarn, adv. ; not so much — as, non tam — quam. Spend (of time), ago, ere, egi, ac- tum. Think, arbitror, ari, atus sum^ dep. Truth, verum, i, n. 367. Exercise. 1. The recollection of a well-spent life is eternal. 2. This brave hero, born for glory, has saved the republic. 3. I have received from you two letters dated at Rome. 4. Let us believe them when they speak the truth. 5. I think that you have never before read a letter from me, unless written by my own hand. 6. Wise men do not geek the rewards of good deeds, so much as good deeds 11 150 LATIN COMPOSITION. themselves. 7. The Aeduans, having accomplished these things, began to favor Caesar. 8. The Belgians, influenced by the love of glory, and relying upon their valor, waged many wars with the Germans. Lesson LXXIV. particles. 368. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Use of Adverbs. 551-553. II. Use of Prepositions. 432-435. ITT. Use of Coordinate Conjunctions. 554. ■^ <*■■ ---va c/ 369. Models. Fiirius Philus spoke I. Furhis Philus per- Latin extremely well. bene Latine loqite- bdtur. II. I eagerly await your IL Litteras tuas vehe- letter. menter exspecto. III. I will most carefully IIL Quae tihi prornitto. I)erform what I prom- diligentisstme fad- ise you. am. IV. I will write on this sub- IV. Hac super re scri- ject. bam. V. These things have taken V. JIaec intra decern place ~ within ten annos facta sunt. years. VI. Understanding, reason, VI. Mois et ratio et con- and counsel are found silium in senibus in old men. est PARTICLES. 151 VII. Pardon me that I write VII. Mihi ignosce quod to you so much and ad te scribo tarn so often. multa toties. 370. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Latin, Latlne, lit. in Latin. 2. Model II. — Your letter, litteras tuas or epistolam tuam. See Synonymes, 200. 3. Model VI. — Are found, est. In Latin the verb sum is much more freely used than the English verb to he. For the number of the verb est^ see G. 463, I. For the use oi ei — et, see G. 554, I. 5. 4. Model VII. — So much and so often, tarn multa toties, lit. so many things so often. 371. Synonymes. Temple ; templum, fanum., aedes. 1. Templum^ ^, n. ; temple, — the generic word for temple with all its sacred environs, but applied especially to the temples of the principal gods. 2. Fanum., 2, n.; temple, sanctuary, — regarded as a consecrated edifice — applied especially to the inferior gods. 3. Aedes.^ is, f. ; temple, — regarded simply as an edifice. 372. Vocabulary. Above, supra, adv. Anger, iracundia, ae, f. Be wont, soleo, ere, solltus sum. G. 268, 3. Bear, fero, ferre, tuli, latum. Build, make, facio, ire, feci, fac- tum. Excellently, excellenter, adv. Honestly, honeste, adv. Impudence, impudentia, ae, f. 152 LATIN COMrOSITION. Obstinacy, pertinacia, ae, f. Pompey, Pompeius, ii, m. Refute, refello, ire, felli. Sacred, sanctus, a, um. Temple, templum, i, n. ; aedes, is, f. ; fanum, i, n. Without, sine, prep, with abl. Worsliip, veniror, ari, atus sum, dep. 373. Exercise. 1. There is no doubt that the good and wise live well and happily. 2. To live well and happily is to live honestly and rightly. 3. The Romans bore this calamity bravely and wisely. 4. All these things were done bravely and excellently. 5. Let us always be prepared to refute without obstinacy, and to be refuted without anger. 6. Pompey, Scipio, and Caesar conquered the enemy in many battles. 7. I have said above, that the senate had as- sembled in the temple of Jupiter Stator. 8. /?i this most sacred temple the Romans were wont to worship Jupiter. 9. The Athenians built a temple to Impudence. Lesson LXXV. PARTICLES — Continued. 374. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Subordinate Conjunctions. 555. II. Interjections. 556, 557. 375. Models. I. I did this while it was I. IToc fed, dum lawful. ' cuit. PARTICLES. 1^6 II. It is as you desirerl. 11. Ui Ojytasti, ita est. III. He is a great orator, if III. Is magnus orator not the greatest. est., si non maxi- mus. IV. I exhort you to read IV. Te hortor iit hos de these books on phi- philosophia libros losophy. legas. V. You had inquired V. Quaesieras nonne whether I did not putarem verum think that the truth inventum esse. had been found. VI. Lo, your letter ! VI. Ecce tuae litterae ! VII. 0, deceptive hopes ! VII. spes falldces ! VIII. 0, the very great power VIII. vim maximam of error ! err oris ! 376. Remarks. 1. Model FV. — These books on philosophy, A^os de philosopTiia lihros. The rule for the phice of the Genitive, G. 565, 2, is ap- plicable to the Ace. or Abl. with a Preposition, when similarly used. 2. Model VI. — Lo, your letter ! ecce tuae litterae ! For the Nominative, litterae, see G. 3G7, 8: 381, N. 3. A 377. Synonymbs. Wall ; murus^ paries^ moenia, 1. Murus^ i, m. ; wall, — the generic term for a wall of any kind. 2. Paries, parietis, m.; the wall of a house; the wall OF ANY BUILDING. 3. 3foe7iia, ium, n. pi. ; the walls of a city, city w^alls^ 154 LATIN COMPOSITION. 378. Vocabulary. As soon as, quum primum. Because, quia, conj. Cover, to clothe, adorn, vestio, ire, ivi or ii, Hum. First, primum, adv. For = about, concerning, de, prep. with abl. Inner, interior, ius. G. 166. More, plus, pluris. G. 165, N. 1. Paint, pingo, ere, pinxi, pictum. Painting, tabula picta ; lit. painted tablet. Practical knowledge, experience, Surround, cingo, Sre, cinxi, cine- tum. Tablet, tabula, ae, f. The = that, emphatic, ille, a, ud. Unhappy, infelix, icis. Wall, murus, i, m. ; moenia, ium, n. pL, G. 131, 1, 4) ; paries, etis, m. Walls of the city, city walls, moenia ; walls of my, your, &c., own house, w«t, etc., pariUes ; lit. my walls. Wonderful, mirus, a, um. 379. Exercise. 1. Marcus Cato was called wise because he had a practical knowledge of many things. 2. I will write more, if I have more leisure. 3. As soon as I came to Rome, I wrote to your father. 4. I exhort you to read studiously, not only these orations, but also these books on philosophy. 5. Within the walls of the citi/ we have nothing to fear. 6. We must defend the citi/ walls. 7. Cicero feared for his life within the walls of his own house. 8. The enemy were surrounding this place with a wall. 9. O, your wonderful memory, Mar- cus ! 10. O, that unhappy day on which Sulla was made consul ! 11. The inner walls of the temple were covered with ])ainting8. FORMS FOR EXPRESSESTG PURPOSE. 155 ¥ Lesson LXXYI. FORMS FOR EXPRESSING PURPOSE. 380. Lesson from the Grammar. I. The Subjunctive with a Conjunction — ut^ ne, etc. 497, 11. IL The Subjunctive with a Relative. 497, I. IIL The Accusative (especially of the Gerund) with ad,^ 542, III. N. 2 ; 408, IV. IV. The Genitive with Causa, Gratia, etc. 416 and foot- note. V. The Supine in um. 546. VI. The Participle. 549, 3. 381. Models. I. I explained my opinion, that I might ascertain your judgment. II. Nature gave reason to man that he might be ruled by it. IIL It has been set before me for imitation. IV. We have written many things to you for the purpose of exhorting you. I. Explicdvi sententiam meam, tumn judici- um lit cognoscerem. II. Katura homini ratio- nem dedit, qua rege- retur. III. Ad imitanduni 7nihi propositum est. IV. Multa ad te cohor- tandi gratia scripsi- mus. ' The use of the Gerund in any other construction to express purpose should not be imitated by the learner. 156 LATIN COMPOSITION. V. We have come to re- miTid you, not to im- portwie you. VI. Lentulus assigned the city to Cassius to burn. V. Admonitimi venimus t€y nan flagitatum. VI. Lentulus attrihuit ur- bem iiiflammandain Cassio, 382. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Your judgment, tuum judicium. Emphasis places these words at the beginning of the clause, even before ut. See G. 569, III. 1. 2. Model II. — That he might be ruled by it, qua Q-egeretuVj Relative clause expressing purpose, lit. by which he might be ruled. 3. Model IV. — For the purpose of exhorting you, cohortandi gratia. Te is omitted because expressed just before. The Genitive precedes gratia. 4. Model V. — To remind, admonitum, Supine. See G. 546. But ut with the Subjunctive might be used instead of the Supine. 383. Vocabulary. Achieve, perform, ago, Ire, egi, ac- tum. Advantage, gsim, emolumentum, i, n. As — as possible, with adjectives, quam, adv., with superlat. ; as soon as possible, quam pri- Cause, causa, ae, f. Deliver, give over, trado, ere, dldi, ditvm. Desire, opto, are, avi, atiim. Example, exemplum, i, n. For the sake of, causa with gen. G. 416 and foot-note. Profit, usefulness, uiiliias, aiis, f. Set before, propOno, ere, posui, posltum. Somebody, something, aliquis, qua, quid. FORMS FOR EXPRESSING CONDITION. 157 384. Exercise. 1. We desire to see you as soon as possible in this city. 2. Cicero was striving to save the republic. 3. Young- men, devote yourselves to this study, that you may be wise. 4. Devote yourselves to study, that you may be able to be both an honor to yourselves and an advantage to the republic. 5. Ambassadors were sent to Caesar to say that the town had been taken, 6. Scipio was born to achieve something worthy of a man. 7. Let us set before our sons examples for imitation. 8. He delivered the city to the soldiers to plunder. 9. Ambassadors came to Rome to ask for peace. 10. The consul did many things for the sake of defending himself. Lesson LXXVII forms for expressing condition. 385. Lesson fkom the Grammar. I. Clauses with certain Conjunctions. 507 ; 513. II. Relative Clauses. 507, 2. III. Participles. 507, N. 7 ; 549, 2. ""^ ^ IV. Oblique Cases with Prepositions. 507, N. 7. V. Imperative Clauses.' 487, 3. ' To these five forms a sixth might be added, the conditional sentence with Si omitted. See 507, 1. This form, however, can not be safely imi- tated by the learner. 158 LATIN COMPOSITION. 386. Models. I. Arms are of little value abroad, unless there is wisdom at home. II. If any one should see these things, he would be delighted. III. We are not wont to be- lieve a liar, even if he speaks the truth. IV. What would the life of men have been with- out philosophy ? V. Provoke him; you will at once see him fran- tic. I. Parvi sunt forts ar- ma, nisi est consili' um domi. II. Ilaec qui videat, de- lectetur. III. Mendaci homini ne verum quidem di- centi credere sole- mus. IV. Quid vita hominum sine philosophia fuisset f V. Lacesse ; jam videbis furentem. 387. Remarks. 1. Model II. — If any one should see, si quis mdeat, or qui videat, lit. whoever may see. The former is the common form, but in illustrating the various expressions for condition^ the latter is here ad- missible. 2. Model III. — If he speaks, dicenii, lit. speaking. 388. Vocabulary. Associate, socius, ii, m. At once, immediately, jam, adv. Attempt, Conor, Uri, Htus sum, dcp. Crime, scelus, Iris, n. Cultivate, colo, ire, colui, cultum. Fail, deflcio, ire, feci, fectum. Leisure, otium, ii, n. Punishment, supplicium, ii, n. FORMS FOR EXPRESSING CONCESSION. 159 Bemove, tollo, erCy sustuli, subla- tum. Restrain, arceo, ere, ui, arctum. Set forth, expromo, ire, prompsi, promptum. Wicked, imprdbus, a, um. 389. Exercise. 1. I would write more to yuu if I had more leisure. 2. The day would fail me if I should attempt to set forth all that can be said in regard to philosophy. 3. If we wish to be both good and happy, we must cultivate virtue. 4. If any one should free the state from fear, h«? would be praised by all. 5. WithoiU associates Catiline would never have attempted to form a conspiracy against the republic. 6. What would restrain the wicked from crime, if the fear of punishment were removed? 7. Sol- diers, defend the city ; you will be at once praised hy all. J Lesson LXXVIII. forms for expressing concession. / 390. Lesson from the Grammar. I. Clauses with certam Conjunctions. 515. II. Relative Clauses. 515, III. III. Participles.' 549, 2. ' To these three forms one or two others might be added, but they would not be safe models for the learner. 160 LATIN COMPOSITION. 391. Models. I. Though all excellence attracts us to itself, yet liberality does this in the highest degree. II. Who is there who does not praise Socrates, though he never saw him? III. The eye, though it does not see itself, discerns other things. II. Quamquam omnii virtus nos ad se al- Itcit, tamen liberali- tas id maxime effi- cit. Quis est, qui Socratem non laudet, quern nunquam viderit f III. Oculus, se non videns, alia cernit. 392. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Vb.ai&y., laudet. SeeG. 503, I. Though he never SAW HIM, quern nunquam viderit, lit. whom he never saw. 2. Model III. — Other things, alia. See G, 441. 393. Synonymes. Happy, prosperous, fortunate ; heatus., felix., fortunutus. 1. JBeatus, a, ^iin ; haity. 2. Felix.^ Ids ; (1) happy, prosperous, — happy because successful and prosperous ; (2) transitively, giving joy and happiness. 3. Fortunatus^ o, um ; fortunate, successful, favored BY fortune. FOKMS FOR EXPRESSING CONCESSION. 161 394. Vocabulary. A-Cquit, absoho, ere, i, soliitum. Death, mo7-s, mortis, f. Excel, excello, ere, cellui, celsum. Fear, to fear greatly, pertimesco, ere, timui. Friends, my, your, &c., friends, Tnei, tui, etc. G. 441, 1. High, ample, amplus, a, um. However much, qvantumvis, adv. Mucins, Mucius, ii, m. Prosperous, felix, lets. Raise, conduct, perdiico, ire, duxij ductum. Rescue, erlpio, ere, ripui, reptum. Slay, interficio, ire, feci, fectum. 395. Exercise. 1. Although they do not dare to praise Catiline, they are yet to be feared. 2. You would not be able, however much you may excel, to raise all your friends to the highest honors. 3. They dare to defend Catiline, though he is endeavoring to destroy the republic. 4. We know that the conspirators, though acquitted, cannot be rescued from the hands of the Eoman people. 5. Caius Mucius attempted to slay king Porsena, though death was set before him (as the penalty). 6. We cannot be happy without virtue. 7. We all desire that you should be happy. 8. All desire that we should be prosperous. 9. There are some who seem to be always fortunate. 162 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson LXXIX. forms for expressing time. - 396. Lessor prom the Grammab. I. Accusative of Time. 379 ; 430. II. Ablative of Time. 429. III. Clauses with Conjunctions. 518-521 ; 555, 1. IV. Participles. 549, 1. ^ l V. Appositive. 363,3,2). ^ ^ '] 397. Models. I. Pericles presided over Athens forty years. II. He lived three hundred years since. III. Socrates on the last day of his life discoursed much on the immor- tality of souls. IV. He obeyed when it was necessary. V. While they are quiet, they approve. VI. The grape, when it has ripened, becomes sweet. VII. Cicero learned many things when a boy. I. Pericles quadragin- ta annos praefuit Athenis. II. Abhinc annos tre- centos fuit. III. Socrates supremo vi- tae die 7nulta de immortdlitdte ani- morum disseruit. IV. Pariiit qutim necesse erat. V. Quiim qiciescunt, pro- bant. VI. Uva maturata dul- cescit. VII. Cicero puer mttlta didicit. FORMS FOR EXPRESSING TIME. 163 398. Remabks. 1. Model II. — Lived, fuity lit. was. The verb sum is often thus used. 2. MoDEi^ VI. — When it has ripened, maturaia, lit. having ripened. 3. Model VII. — Ciceko when a boy, Cicero puer, lit. Cicero a hoy. 399. Synonymes. Daily, day by day ; quotidie, in dies, i7i shigulos dies. 1. Quotidie; daily, day by day, — the usual adverb for daily, whether with or without increase. 2. In dies, or in siiigulos dies ; daily, day by day, — used with comparatives and with words which involve in- crease or decrease. 400. Vocabulary. Arganthonius, Arganfhonius, ii, m. At the age of, natus, a, um, with the ace. of time. At the age of twenty, viginti annos natiis, lit. having been born twenty years. Daily, quotidie, adv. Die, morior, mori, moHuus sum, dep. Eighty, octoginta, indecl. Entitle, inscrlbo, ere, scripsi, scrip- turn. Expect, exspecto, are, avi, atum. From day to day, in dies. Govern, guberno, are, avi, atum. House, one's house, domus, i, f. G. 119, 1. Hundred, centum, indecl. Isocrates, Isocrdies, is, m. Marius, Marius, ii, m. Panathenaicus, Panathenaicus, i, m. Plato, Plato, onis, m. Seventh time, septimum, adv. 164 LATIN COMPOSITION. The = that, not emphatic, is, ea, id. Twenty, viginti, indecl. Vice, vitium, ii, n. Weep at, illacrlmor, ari, Stus sum, dep. G. 386. 401. Exercise. 1. When virtue governs the republic, the citizens are happy. 2. Having come to Athens, I devoted myself to the study of philosophy. 3. Arganthonius is said to have reigned eighty years. 4. Cicero says that this king lived one hundred and twenty years. 5. Cato died at the age of eighty-five. 6. Isocrates is said to have written a book in his ninety-fourth year. 7. This book is entitled Pana- thenaicus. 8. Cicero, while reading Plato, wept at the death of Socrates. 9. Marius, while consul for the seventh time, died in his own house. 10. I will send a letter to you daily. 11. We are daily expecting your brother. 12. There are some who say that vice increases from day to day. Lesson LXXX. forms for expressing cause. 402. Lesson from the Grammar. L Ablative of Cause. 416. 1. A Preposition with its Case. 416, I. 2. A Perfect Participle with an Ablative. 416, N. 1. II. Clauses with Conjunctions. 516, 517. III. Relative Clauses. 517. IV. Participles. 549, 1. FORMS FOE EXPRESSING CAUSE, 165 w > 403. Models. I. The father exults with joy. II. Death, because of the shortness of life, is never far distant. III. They seek frieyidship^ led by the hope of a re- ward. IV. Since a thanksgiving has been decreed, celebrate those days. V. O fortunate youth, since you have obtained Ho- mer as the herald of your valor. VI. I affirm nothing, since I am in doubt and dis- trust myself. I. Pater exsidtat laeti- tia. II. Mors propter brevitd- tem vitae niinquam longe abest. III. Amicitiam spe mer- cedis adducti expe- tunt. IV. Quoniam supplicatio decreta est, celebra- tote illos dies. V. fortunate adoles- cens, qid tuae virtu- tis Homerum prae- conem inveiieris. VI. Nihil affirmo, ditbi- tans et raihi diffi- dena. 404. Remarks. 1. Model V. — Since you have obtained, qui inveniris, lit. who \ave found. For the mood, see G. 517. 2. Model VI. — Since I am in doubt, dubitanSj lit. doubting. 405. Syxoxy]SIES. The right, law ; fas, jus, lex. 1. Fas, indecl. n. ; the right, — that which accords with the divine law. 12 166 LATIN COMPOSITION. 2. Jus^ juris^ n.; the right, justice, legal eight, — that which accords witli law in general. 3. Lex, legis, f. ; law, enactment, — human law. 406. Vocabulary. Ahala, Ahala, ae, ra. Annoyance, molestia, ae, f. Clodius, Clodius, ii, m. Consult for, consiilo, ere, sului, sul- 2!wm, with dat. G. 381, 3. Enact, sancio, ire, sanxi, sanc- tum. Fabricius, Fahricius, ii, m. For my, your, &c., sake, mea causa, tua causa, etc. G. 416 and ft. n. Influence, to influence, adduco, ire, duxi, ductum. Maelius, Maelius, ii, m. Nation, gens, gentis, f. The law of nations, jus gentium. Regal power, regnum, i, n. Right, /as, n. indecl. Seek, appHo, ire, petivi, petltum. Slay, occido, ire, i, cisum. Spurius, Spurius, ii, m. 407. Exercise. 1. We do many things for the sake of our friends which we would never do for our own sake. 2. I thank you because you have freed me from all annoyance. 3. Cicero praises Fabricius because he was just. 4. There are some who obey the laws on account of fear. 5. The commander, influenced by the hope of peace, sent am- bassadors to the king. 6. Cicero is especially to be praised, because he consulted for the safety of the citi- zens. 7. Nothing which is right delights Clodius, 8. This was done in accordance with the law of nations. 9. The senate enacted many laws. 10. Servilius Ahala slew Spurius Maelius because he was seeking regal power. P^RT THIRD. ELEMENTS OF LATIN STYLE. CHAPTER I. CHOICE OF WORDS AND CONSTRUCTIONS. Lesson LXXXI. abstract nouns. number. 408. Abstract nouns designating the periods of life, as boi/hood, youth, old age, are generally best rendered into Latin, nut by pueritia, juventits, and seiiectus, but by puer, fiwenis, and senex. See Part II. 165, IV. 409. Names of offices, as consulship, generalship, leader- shi]), when used to designate time, should be rendered into Latin by the corresponding names of officers, as consul^ imperdtor, dux. See Model I. 410. Verbal nouns, designating the action in the abstract, may often be rendered into Latin by Participles : The violation of the laws, violatae leges. For (concerning) the re- covery of the captives, de captivis recuperandis. See Model II. 411. Substantives which are sinsjular in Encjlish are sometimes rendered by those which are plural in Latin. Thus, — 0671 168 LATIN COMPOSITION. 1. Many names of cities are plural : Athens, Athenae ; Thebes, Thebae; Syracuse, SyracHsae. See G. 131, 1. 2. Many nouns, which are singular in English, are plural in Latin, because they are so used as really to involve that number ; To have in hand,^ in mariihus habere. To go on foot,' pedlbus ire. To urge night and day, tiodes atque dies urgere. 412. The force of the English expressions, kinds of^ in- stances of, examjjles of, is often denoted in Latin by simply putting the following noun in the plural, especially if it be an abstract noun : All instances of avarice, omnes avaritiae. There are two kinds of memory, sunt duae memoriae. Examples of glorious death, clarae mortes. 413. Models. I. Piso proposed this law I. Piso hanc legem Cen- in the consulship of sorlno et Manilio Censorinus and Manil- consulibus tulit. ius. II. "Precepts are given for II. Officii conservandi the observance of praecepta tradun- duty. tur. III. I have a great work in III. Ojnis magnum in hand. m,anibus habeo. 414. Remarks. 1. Model I. — In the consulship of, etc., lit. Censorinus and Manilius being consuls. * Tlie words hand and foot, as hero used, involve tlie plural," as the action is by no means confined to one liand or one foot. The plural is also involved in the expression night and day, meaning night after night and day after day. Hence the Latin uses the plural in such in- stances. ABSTRACT NOUNS. NUMBER. 169 2. Model II. — For the observance of duty, lit. of duty to he observed. 415. Vocabulary. Adorn, exorno, are, avi, atum. Africanus, Africdnus, i, m. Appius, Appius, ii, m. Arise, exsisto, ere, siiti, stltum. Guide, dux, ducis, m. and f. Highest results, highest things, summa, drum, n. adj. used as substant. Attain, consequor, i, secutus sum, \ Just, with numbers, ipse, a, urn dep. Attendant, comes, Itis, m. and f. Censor, censor, oris, m. Claudius, Claudius, ii, m. Complain, queror, i, questus sum, dep. Desire, cupidltas, dtis, f. Find, reperio, ire, peri, pertum. G. 452, 3. Manilius, Manilius, ii, m. Manius, Manius, ii, m. Monument, monumentum, i, n. Plautus, Plautus, i, m. Power, potentia, ae, f. Statue, signum, i, n. Tarentum, Tarentum, i, n. 416. Exercise. 1. I find that Plato came to Tarentum in the consul- ship of Lucius Camillus and Appius Claudius. 2. Plau- tus died during the censorship of Cato. 3. Cato the censor died in the consulship of Lucius Marcius and Manius jManilius, just eighty-three years before the con- sulship of Cicero. 4. You have attained the highest results under the guidance of virtue, with the attendance of fortune. 5. They were complaining of the loss of liberty. 6. Scipio Africanus always had Xenophon in hand. 7. Pericles adorned Athens with the most beauti- ful statues and monuments. 8. There are some who devote themselves day and night to study. 9. You have from boyhood devoted yourself to study. 10. In the gi^eatest minds there often arises the desire for honor, power, and glory. 170 latin composition. Lesson LXXXII. substantives united by prepositions. 417. In English, substantives are often brought into im- mediate relation to each other by the simple use of preposi- tions, as the march into Italy^ the army in Macedonia, the temples around the forum. In Latin, the same construction is admissible, but is used much more cautiously in the best writers. 418. This construction may be used in Latin with cer- tain Prepositions and in certain senses. Thus, — 1. With cum and sine. Cupid with a lamp, Cupldo cum lampdde. A man without hope, homo sine spe. 2. With m, erga, adversus, contra, and pro, before the name of the object with reference to which the feeling is ex- ercised or the action performed : Hatred of the liuman race, odium in (towards) hominum genus (the race of men). Love to you, erga te amor. See G. 396, III. N. 1. 3. With de, ex, inter, in a partitive sense : A plebeian, homo de plebe (a man of the people). One of the heroes, unus ex viris. See G. 396, III. N. 1. 4. With de in the sense of concerning, from, out of, ex, from, out of, inter with se or ipsos, and with ad and apiid in expressions of place : A book on civil law, liber de jure civiH. The marble tables, mensae t marmore (tables made from or of marble). The naval battle near Tenedos, apud Ten^dum pugna navcLlis. 419- This combination of substantives, by means of prepo- sitions, may be somewhat more freely used when the prepo- sition with its case is placed between the leading noun and its modifier : The most disgraceful flight from the city, fuga ah urbe turpissima. SUBSTANTIVES UNITED BY PREPOSITIONS. 171 420. When good authority cannot be furnished for this construction, it will be advisable either to insert a Rela- tive Clause or a Participle before the preposition, or to give the sentence such a form as to bring the preposition with its case into relation to the verb : In the temple near the city, in fano, quod est propter urbem (which is near the city). 421. Models. I. Behold the silver Cupid I. Vide argenteum Cu- with a lamp. pidinem cum lam- pude. II. Aristotle, in his third II. Aristoteles in tertio book on philosophy, de philosophia libro does not dissent from a Platone non dis- Plato. sentit. III. They admire the neck- III. Monile ex auro et lace of gold and gems. gemmis admiran- tur. IV. In most things the mean IV. In plerisque rebus between too much inediocrttas quae and too little is the est inter niniiu^n best. et parum optimum est. 422. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Of gold, ex auroj lit. from gold. 2. Model IV. — The mean between too much, etc., mediocritas fuae est inter, etc. 423. Synonymes. Teacher, preceptor ; doctor., praeceptor., magister. 1. Doctor., oris, m.; teacher, — regarded simply as one who imparts knowledge. 172 LATIN COMPOSITION. 2. Praeceptor^ oris, ni. ; rRECEPTOR, instructob, teacher, . — regarded as one who moulds the character of his pupils. 3. Magister, tri, m. ; master, teacher, — with refereuce to his superiority and power. 424. Vocabulary. Abundance, copia, ae, f. Around, circum, prep, with ace. Attention, study, zeal, studium, ii, n. Bestow, confero, ferre, tuli, colla- tum. Credit, Jides, ei, f. Edifice, aedes, is, f. G. 132. Elegance, elegantiq, ae, f. Epicurus, Epicurus, i, m. 'F ovum, forum, i, n. In == situated in, placed in, posUus, a, urn, in with abl. Instruct, teach, doceo, tre, docui, dodum. Means, property, res, rei, f. Occult, occultus, a, um. On = concerning, de, prep, with abl. Present one's self, se praehere ; praebeo, ere, ui, Hum. Refinements, culture, cultus, us, m. Sedition, seditio, dnis, f. Select, selected, exquisxtus, a, um. Set fire to, burn, incendo, hre, cendi, censum,. Station, to place, colldco, are, clvi, aium. Sure, certus, a, um. Teacher, doctor, Oris, m. ; as mas- ter, magister, tri, m. Too, nimis, adv. Upon, in, prep, with ace. and abl. G. 435, N. 1. 425. Exercise. 1. Your letter on friendship was most acceptable to me. 2. The refinements of life, with elegance and abun- dance, delight us. 3. All the philosophers before Socrates bestowed too great attention upon occult subjects. 4. ^^his man, without means, without credit, without hope, the leader of sedition, set fire, with his own hands, to the sacred edifices. 5. True wisdom presents itself to us as the surest guide to happiness, 6. Valor even in an SPECIAL WORDS AND EXPRESSIONS. 173 enemy delights brave men. 7. The army was stationed in the forum and in all the temples around the forum. 8. This preceptor will instruct us in regard to philosophy. 9. We send our sons to the teachers of wisdom. 10. Epicurus boasted that he had had no teacher (master). 11. Tiberius Gracchus always had select teachers (mas- ters) from Greece. Lesson LXXXIII. special woeds and expressions. 426. Such words as property^ duty^ business^ mark, char- acteristic, after the verb to be, are generally omitted in rendering into Latin, as their force is fully expressed in the Predicate Genitive : It is the duty of a judge, judicis est. It is the mark of a narrow mind, angusti anlmi est. 427. Substantives after as, when, for, of, are often ren- dered by Appositives, the particles as, xohen, etc., being omitted. See Model 11. 428. But in such cases, as is sometimes rendered by ut, and then the appositive shows in what capacity or light the person or thing denoted by the leading substantive is viewed. See Model III. 429. While the relation denoted by the preposition of is generally rendered by the Genitive, that denoted by some other prepositions, as to, for, from, in, on account of, is sometimes so rendered : Gratitude for a favor, heneficii gratia. Escape from labors, lahorum fuga. See above, 413, Model II. 174 LATIN COMPOSITION. 430. Models. I. It is the part of barbari- ans to live for the day only. 11. Philip procured Aristo- tle as a teacher for Alexander his son. III. I have often praised Cato as a citizen. I. Barharorurn est in diem vivere. II. Philippus Aristotelem Alexandra Jllio doc- torem accHvit. III. Catonem ut civem saepe lauddvi. 431. Synontmes. Pride, arrogance, insolence ; superbia, arrogantia, inso- lentia. 1. Superhia^ ae^ f.; peide, haughtiness, self-suffi- ciency. 2. Arrogantia, ae, f. ; arrogance, haughtiness, — as shown in great pretensions and assumptions. 3. Insolentia, ae, f ; insolence, — an offensive display of superiority in an insulting manner. 432. Vocabulary. Achilles, Achilles, is, m. Antiochus, Antidchus, i, m. Antony, Antonius, ii, m. Arrogance, arrogantia, ae, f. As, ut, adv. But, vero, etc., conj. G. 654, III. 2. Caius, Caius, Caii, m. Consider, eogito, Sre, Hvi, Stum. Contrary to, contra, prep, with ace. Excite, condto, are, Hvi, Sttum. Hatred, odium, ii, n. Insolence, insolentia, ae, f. Narrow, angustus, a, um. Obtain, find, invinio, ire, vini, ventum. Perceive, perspicio, ire, spexi, specttim. Perfect, perfectus, a, um. Popilius, Popilius, ii, m. Pride, sitperhia, ae, f. Prudence, prudentia, ae, f. RENDERING OF CERTAIN NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 175 Regard, habeo, ere, ui, Uum, lit. to have, hold. Require, compel, cogo, ere, coegi, coactum. Riches, divitiae, arum, f. pi. G. 131, 1, 4). Senator, senator, oris, m. Wickedness, scelus, iris, n. 433. Exercise. 1. To love riches is the mark of a narrow mind, 2. It is the part of a wise man to do nothing contrary to the laws. 3. It is the duty of a good man to cultivate all the virtues. 4. Caius Popilius was sent as an ambassador to Antiochus the king. 5. Achilles obtained Homer as the herald o£ his valor. 6. Jupiter was regarded both as the king and as the father of all the gods. 7. It is the duty of a judge to consider, not what he himself wishes, but what the law requires. 8. To defend that which is right, I have ever thouorht a characteristic both of brave heroes and of great men. 9. To think this, is a mark of pru- dence ; to do it, of fortitude ; but both to think and to do it, of perfect virtue. 10. Great hatred is often excited against pride and arroga7ice. 11. We have perceived, not only the audacity and wickedness of A^ntony^ but also his insolence and pride. 12. All greatly praise your Cato, as a senator, as a commander, and as a man. . Lesson LXXXTY. ^ rendering of certain nouns and adjectives. 434. In English, Adjectives are used substantively only in the Plural, but in Latin they are occasionally so used even 176 LATIN COMPOSITION. in the Singular, especially in the Neuter with an abstract sense : The truth, verum (a true thing). No sincerity, nihil sinceri (nothing of the sincere). 435. Proper names of places, when used with of or from to designate 7iativity or origin^ are usually rendered by Latin Adjectives : Archytas of Tarentum, Archytas Tarentlnus. Gorgias of Leontini, Gorgias Leontinus. See G. 395, N. 2. 436. Proper names with prepositions, as of in^ are often rendered by Latin Adjectives : Ulysses in Homer, Homericus Ulixes. Hercules in Xenophon, Hercules XenophontSus. The battle of Pharsalia, proelium Pharsah- oum. The battle of Cannae, Cannensis pugna. See G. 395, N. 2. 437. The English expressions, the first part of the middle (part) of the last part of the highest part of the loicest part of and the like, are generally rendered by Latin Adjectives: The first part of the province, prima provincia. The middle of sum- mer, media aestas. See G. 440, notes 1-3. 438. Substantives, which designate persons as the agents of actions, may often be best rendered into Latin by Relative Clauses : Hearers, ii qui audiunt (those who hear). Statesmen, ii qui rei puhllcae praesunt (those who preside over the republic). Lawgivers, ii qui leges scrihunt (those who write laws). 439. Participial nouns and verbal nouns with of should generally be rendered into Latin by a Passive Participle or a Gerund : In liberating the country, in liheranda patria. Desirous of hearing you, cupidus te audiendi. See G. 549, N. 2 ; 541-544! 440. Many adjectives are best rendered into Latin by the Genitive of nouns. Thus, — 1. Spiritual, MENTAL, must be rendered by animi^ merUiSj or ingenii ; bodily, by corporis : RENDERING OF CERTAIN NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 177 By mental diseases, awtmi morhis. Bodily pain, dolor corpdris. Mental culture, cultura aiilmi. 2. Literary may be rendered by litterdrum ; learned, sometimes by doctrmae^ doctrindrum ; artis^ artium ; phi- losophical, by philosophiae^ or de philosophia : Literary pursuits, litterarum studia. Learned studies, doctrinae siudia. 441. Adjectives with adverbial modifiers may often be best rendered into Latin by the Genitive or Ablative of Char- acteristic. See Model III. 442. Models. I. The temple of Diana of Ephesus was burned. II. Many are careless selecting friends. m III. Hoio blameless ought commanders to be. I. Templum Ephesiae Didnae deflagrdvit. II. Multi in amicis eli- gendis negligentes sunt. III. Quanta innocentia de- bent esse impera- tores. 443. Remarks. 1. MoDEiv II. — In selecting friends. See G. 549, N. 2. 2. Model III. — How blameless, quanta innocentia, lit. with (of) how great innocence. 444. Vocabulary. Advantage, uiilitas, atis, f. Atticus, Attlcus, i, m. Battle, fight, pugna, ae, f. Between, inter, prep, with ace. Ceus, of Ceus or Cea, Ceus, a, itm. Crotona, Croto, Onis, m. and f. Delight, oblecto, are, IZvi, atum. Difference, there is a difference, interest, fuit. Enact, write, scriho, tre, scripsi, scriptum. Epaminondas, Epaminondas, ae. m. Gorgias, Gorgias, ae, m. 178 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lawgiver, be a lawgiver, leges scri- bere, lit. to enact laws. Learned = of learning, doctrlnae, f. sing. gen. Leontine, of Leontini, LeontlnuSf a, um. Less, minor, us, comp. of parvus. G. 165. Leuctrian, of Lenctra, Leuctrlcus, a, um. Lighten, levo, are, avi, atum. Literary = of letters, Utterarumj f. pi. gen. No, non, adv. Of = out of, e, eXf prep, with abl. Old age, senedus, utis^ f. Pharsalian, of Pharsalus, or Phar- salia, Pharsalius, a, um. Prodicus, Prodicus, i, m. Propose to one's self no other aim, nihil sihi aliud nisi proponere; propone, ire, posui, posltum ; lit. to propose to one^s self nothing else except. So, sometimes rendered by is, ea, id ; so virtuous, ea virtute, lit. of that virtue; so wise, ea sapientia, lit. of that wis- dom. G. 419, n. Statesman, be a statesman, ret pub- licae praesum, esse,fui; lit. to superintend the republic. Suffering, pain, doloj', oris, m. Superbus, Snperbus, i, m. Tarquinius, Tarquinius, ii, m. Useful, be useful, utilitatem affiro, ferre, attXdi, allatum, lit. im- part advantage. Warrior, be a warrior, bellum gero, ire, gessi, gestum, lit. to wage war. While, when, quum, conj. Wrong, pravus, a, um. 445. Exercise. 1. As there is a difference between the right and the wrong, so is there between the true and the false. 2. Gorgias of Leontini, the teacher of Isocrates, lived one hundred and seven years. 3. Prodicus of Ceus was in great honor. 4. After the battle of Pharsalia, Cicero wrote to Atticus. 5. After the battle of Leuctra, Epami- nondas was in great honor. 6. Solon the lawgiver was regarded as wise, one of the Seven. 7. Statesmen are no less useful than warriors. 8. Pythagoras came to ADJECTIVES — CONTINUED. 179 Crotona in the fourth year of the reign of Tarquinius Superbus. 9. Literary studies delight old age. 10. Many while in exile have lightened their suffering by learned studies. 11. Our forefathers were so virtuous and wise, that, in enacting laws, they proposed to them- selves no other aim than the safety and advantage of the republic. Lesson LXXXV. ADJECTIVES - Continued. 446. When two or more Adjectives belong to the same substantive, as attributives, — 1. They may be separate and independent modifiers of that substantive, and must then be connected by conjunc- tions. • 2. One of them may modify the substantive directly, while the others modify the complex idea formed by the substan- tive and adjective uuited. The connective is then omitted : Obscure and difficult subjects, res ohscuras atque difficiles. All Latin words, omnia verba Latina. 447. By a difference of idiom, the Latin generally uses the connective after multi, permuUi^ plurtmi^ etc., though the English omits it in similar cases : Many large states, multae ei magnae civitates. 448. The Positive with too^ someichat^ unusually^ may be rendered by the Latin Comparative, and the Positive with very^ exceedingly, by the Superlative : Too short, brevior. Very short, brevissimus. But instead of the Latin Comparative in the sense of too^ the Positive with nimis may be used, and instead of the Superlative in the sense of very, the Positive with valde : 180 LATIN COMPOSITION. Too great, nimis magnus. Very great, valde magnus. Here the emphasis rests upon too and veryy rather than upon the ad- jective itself. 449. The Positive with as — as possible is rendered by the Superlative with quam or quantus, with or without possum : As great as possible, quam maximus, with or without possum. See Model II. 450. When in English two comparatives occur with the — the, or with the — so much the, they are generally best rendered into Latin by Comparatives with quanto — tanto, quo — eo or quo — hoc. See Model III. 451. Models. I. This state has been re- I. ITaec civitas omni lieved of the whole aere alieno liberdta debt. est. II. He led the army to II. Quam potuit maximis Rome with as rapid itineribus JR,om,am marches as possible. exercitum duxit. III. The more difficult it is, III. Quo est difficiUus, eo the more honorable. praeclarius. 452. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Debt, aes altemtm, lit. copper or money belonging to another. 2. Model III. — The — the, quo — eo, lit. hy what or how much — by this or so much. 453. Synonymes. Good, upright, honorable ; homis, probus, honestus. 1. Bonus, a, um ; good, — the generic word for this quality, applicable both to persons and to things. ADJECTIVES CONTINUED. 181 2. Prohus^ a, mn ; upright, blasieless, — a negative quality, free from blame rather than worthy of praise. 3. Honestus^ a, um ; honorable, virtuous, noble- minded, — involving a delicate sense of honor and duty. 454. Vocabulary. Another's, belonging to another, alienus, a, um. Armenian, Armenius, ii, m. Contract, contraho, ere, traxi, tractum. Debt, aes alienum, lit. another's money. Drive, pello^ ere, pepuli, pulsum. Equity, aequltas, aits, f. Heavy, weighty, great, severe, gravis, e. Long-continued, very long, perdi- uturnus, a, um. Loud, great, magnus, a, um. Many of the, multi, ae, a, pi., in agreement with noun. Money, aes, aeris, n., lit. copper. Noble-minded, honesius, a, um. Occupy tlie mind, in antmo versor, ari, atus, lit. to move about in the mind. Princely, regalis, e. Pursuit, exertion, studium, ii, n. Release, libera, are, avi, atum. Seem, videor, eri, visus sum. Since, ago, abhinc, adv. Syllable, sylldba, ae, f. The — the, with comparatives, quo — eo. G. 423. Lit. by how much — by so much. Thought, cogitatio, onis, f. Tigranes, Tigranes, is, m. Till, colo, e7'e, colui, cultum. Upright, probus, a, um. Verse, versus, us, m. Voice, vox, vocis, f. 455. Exercise. 1. Cicero says that the good are always happy. 2. Nothing seems to Xenophon so princely as the pursuit of tillino: the field. 3. The Romans waojed a severe and long-continued war with Tigranes the king of the Arnne- niaris. 4. Cicero released the state from a false debt. 5. The consuls contracted no new debt for the state. 6. 13 182 LATIN COMPOSITION. This large and heavy debt was contracted many years since. 7. Many weighty thoughts occupied the mind of the commander. 8. This verse is too h)ng by one sylla- ble. 9. No one can be too honorable. 10. The orator spoke with as loud a voice as possible. 11. The greater the fault is, the greater the pain. 12. Nothing is more worthy of a great and good man than virtue. 13. All upright men love equity itself. 14. Many of the best citizens and most noble-minded men were driven into exile. r Lesson LXXXVI. / PRONOUNS. — PERSONAL. REFLEXIVE. 456. The Nominatives 7, you^ ice, wlien not emphatic, are omitted in rendering into Latin. See Model I. 457. Jle, she, it, they, him, her, them,, when not emphatic, are usually omitted in rendering, if they can be omitted with- out ambiguity. See Model II. 458. When necessary, these Pronouns are rendered (1) generally by is ; but (2) if more demonstrative in force, in the sense of this otie, that one, by hie or ille ; and (3) if em- phatic, but not reflexive (G. 448), he himself, himself, by ipse. See Models I. and III. 459. But these Pronouns must sometimes be rendered by the Reflexive se. Thus,— 1. The Objectives himself, herself, itself, themselves, must be rendered by se. See Model IV. 2. In a Subordinate Clause expressing the sentiment of the Principal Subject, the Objectives him, her, it, them, must be rendered by se when they refer to the Principal Subject. See Model V. PRONOUNS. — PERSONAL. REFLEXIVE. 183 3. In a Subordinate Clause which must be rendered by the Accusative with the Infinitive and which expresses the sentiment of the Principal Subject, he^ she^ it^ they^ must be rendered by se when they refer to the Principal Subject. See Model VI. 460. The Objectives myself^ ourselves^ yourselves^ are rendered by the Personal Pronouns ego and tu. See Model YII. 461. But when special emphasis rests upon the Objectives myself, ourselves, yourselves, ipse is added to the Personal Pronoun. See Model VIII. 462. Personal Pronouns with prepositions are sometimes rendered by Possessives, especially with such words as epistola, litterae, etc. See Model IX. 463. Models. I. You know how highly I prize them. II. It is necessary that you should praise this plan, for it can- not be changed. III. It is fitting that he should himself be a good man. IV. The boys conduct themselves very pru- dently. V. Caesar asks me to come to him. VI. The consul thinks that he has friends. VII. We console ourselves. VIII. See that you guard yourself. I. JEos quanti faciam sets. II. JToc consilium lau- des necesse est / mutdri enim non potest. III. Oportet ipsum esse virum honum. IV. Putri valde pru- denter se gei^nt. V. Caesar ut veniam ad se rogat. VI. Consul se amicos habere arbitrdtur. VII. iVo5 consoldmur. VIII. Fac ut te ipsum Gustodias, 184 LATIN COMPOSITION. IX. I have received three letters from you. IX. Accept tuas epistolas. tres 464. Remarks. 1. Model I. — How highly, quanti. See G. 404. 2. Model II. — That you should praise, laudes. See G. 502, 1. 3. Model V. — To come, ut veniam, lit. that I may come. See G. 498, II. 4. Model VIII. — See that you guard, fac ut custodias, lit. do or make that you guard. See G. 498, II. 5. Model IX. — From you, a te, or tuas agreeing with epistolas. 465. YOCABULARY. Admit, confess, confiteor, eri, fes- sus sum, dep. Again and again, etiam atque eti- am, adv. Allow, concedo, ^re, cessi, cessum. As, for, pro, prep, with abl. As much, quantus, a, um, relative to tantus. Await, exspecto, are, avi, atum. Be ignorant of, ignore, are, avi, atum. Born, be born, nascor, i, natus British, of or from Great Britain, Britannicus, a, um. Dutiful affection, piHas, atis, f. I, emphatic, eg6met. G. 184, 3. Indeed, quidem, adv. Joy, laetitia, ae, f. Move, affect, afflcio, tre, feci, fee- turn. Myself, reflexive, not intensive, ego, mei. G. 448. Others, the others, the rest, ceteri, ae, a, pi. Satisfy, satisfacio, tre, feci, fac- tum. G.18, 2, 2); 385, II. N. 3. So much, tantus, a, um, antecedent to quantus. State, say, dico, ire, dixi, dictum. Take, appropriate, sumo, ire, sumpsi, sumptum. Thyself, yourself, reflexive, not intensive, tu, tut. G. 448. To, towards, of friendly feelings and conduct towards a person, erga, prep, with ace. PRONOUNS. PObSESSlVE. . 185 466. Exercise. 1. You, Cato, were born not for me, not for yourself, but for your country. 2. You will not deny that you are very desirous of glory. 3. I have never denied that they (these) are very desirous of glory. 4. There were some who called themselves wise. 5. I was moved with the greatest joy, when I heard that you had been made consul. 6. Philosophers admit that they are ignorant of many things, and that they have to learn many things again and aoain. 7. As much time as is allowed them for o pleasures, / shall take for myself for my studies. 8. There is nothing new, which, indeed, either you would wish to hear, or which I should dare to state as certain. 9. 1 satisfy all the others by my dutiful affection to you ; my- self I never satisfy. 10. I am awaiting your letter from Great Britain. Lesson LXXXVII. pronouns. — possessive. 467. The Possessive Pronouns, m,y, your, his, etc., when not emphatic, should be omitted in rendering into Latin, if they can be supplied from the context. See Model I. 468. When necessary, the Possess! ves of the Third Per- son, his, her, its, their, are rendered, — 1. By suus. This occurs (1) when they refer to the sub- ject of the clause in which they stand, and (2) when in a Subordinate Clause expressing the sentiment of the Principal Subject, they refer to that subject. See Models II. and III. 2. By the Genitive of a Demonstrative or Relative. This occurs when suus is not admissible. See Model IV. 186 LATIN COMPOSITION. 469. The Latin Possessive belonging to two or more nouns is generally expressed but once. See Model V. 470. The Possessive with own — my own, you?' own, etc. — is generally rendered by the simple Possessive; but if own is emphatic, it must be rendered by the Genitive of ipse. See Model VI. 471. Models. I. Socrates already held in I. Socrates in maniijam his hand the deadly mortiferum illud te- cup. nehat poculum. II. He instructed his brother. II. Fratrem suum erucli- vit. III. They know what their III. Sciunt quid sui cives feWow-citizens think. cogitent. lY. Socrates and all his dis- IV. Socrates atque omnes ciples were delighted ejus discipuli studio with the study of phi- philosophiae delec- losophy. tati sunt. V. I impart a share of my V. Ontris mei partem ne- burden to no one, of mini impertio, glo- my glory to all the riae bonis omnibus. good. VI. He is moved by his own VI. Sua m (or sua ipslus power. vi) 7novetur. 472. Remarks. 1. Model I. — The deadly cup, mortiferum illud poculum, lit. that deadly cup. See G. 450, 4. 2. Model IV. — All his, omnes ejus. Here his is not reflexive, and is accordingly rendered by ejus, not by situs. 473. Synonymes. City, town, state, republic ; urbs, oppidum, civitas, res publtca. PRONOUNS. POSSESSIVE. 187 1. Urbs^ urbis, f. ; city, — the usual word for city. 2. Oppidum^ % n. ; fortified town or city. 3. Cwita,% dtis, f. ; state, — as a political organization, with its laws and institutions. 4. Hes publtca, rei publicae, f. ; commonwealth, bepublic. 474. Vocabulary. Achievement, res gesta, ret gestae, lit. thing performed. Admire, admiror, art, atus sum, dep. Approach, accedo, ere, cessi, ces- sum. Catulus, Catulus, i, m. Cimbrian, Cimhricus, a, iim. A victory over the Cimbrians, Cimhrlca victoria. Colleague, collega, ae, m. Consider, judge, existlmo, are, ilvi, atum. Dignity, dignitas, diis, f. Discourse, oratio, onis, f. Esteem, facio, ere, feci, factum, lit. to make. Except, praeter, prep, with ace. Exhort, cohortor, art, atus sum, dep. Genius, ingenium, ii, n. How highly, with verbs of valuing, quanti. G. 404, N. 1. Life, period of life, aetas, atis, f. Milesian, of Miletus, Milesius, a, um. Most exalted, summus, a, um, superlat. of superus. G. 163, 3. Rest upon, be situated in, esse posltus, a, um, in with abl. Share, communico, are, avi, atum. Thales, Thales, is, m. ; ace. em or en. Worth, moral worth, virtus, ntis, f. 475. Exercise. 1, The orator spent his life in the study of eloquence. 2. Marius shared with his colleague Catulus the glory of his victory over the Cimbrians. 3. All the seven wise men, except Thales of Miletus, presided over their states. 4. It is a characteristic of your wisdom to consider that 188 LATIN COMPOSITION. all your dignity rests upon your worth and achievements. 5. Socrates said that he knew nothing. 6. His whole discourse was spent in praising virtue, and in exhorting all men to the pursuit of virtue. 7. There is no doubt that Rome was a most beautiful city. 8. All the states are compelled to await youi' aid. 9. You all' know how highly I esteem the republic. 10. Our forces were ap- proaching the town of Antioch. 11. Many admired Plato on account of his most exalted genius. Lesson LXXXVIII. pronouns. — demonstrative. relative. 476. The Demonstratives, this^ that, these, those, are ren- dered into Latin, — 1. Literally by hie, ille, iste. For the difference in the use of these forms, see G. 450. See Models IV. and VI. 2. By the Relative, to mark a close connection with the preceding sentence or clause. See Model I. 3. The expressions, and that too, and that indeed, are ren- dered by is with a conjunction. See Model II. 4. Before an objective with of, this, that, these, or those, referring to a noun already expressed before a preceding of, is generally omitted in rendering. See Model III. 477. The Relative is generally rendered by the Latin Relative, but certain differences of idiom require attention. 1. As the Relative clause in Latin often precedes the An- tecedent clause, the Antecedent itself is often introduced into the Relative clause. It is then usually represented in its own clause by a demonstrative, is, idem^ hie, etc. See Model IV. PRONOUNS. — DEMONSTRATIVE. RELATIVE. 189 2. When the real Antecedent is an Appositive, it must in Latin be introduced into the Relative clause. See Model V. 3. Adjectives belonging in sense to the antecedent some- times stand in the Relative clause, in agreement with the relative, especially comparatives, superlatives, and numerals. See Model VI. 478. Models. I. The fact itself speaks, and this always has very great weight. II. You have a memory, and that too an unbounded one. III. Whose eloquence was more conspicuous than that of Pisistratus ? IV. Let every one occupy himself in the art with which he is acquainted. V. Thence I hastened to Amanus, a mountain which separates Syria from Cilicia. VI. Agamemnon vowed to Diana the most beau- tiful thing which had been born that year in his kingdom. I. Res loquitur ipsa; quae semper valet plurimum. II. Hahes tneraoriam^ et earn infinitam, III. Cujus eloquentiapyrae- stahilior fuit quam Pisistrciti ? IV. Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se ex- erceat. V. Inde a4 Amdnum contendi^ qui mons Syriam a Cilicia dividit. VI. Agamemnon devovit Didnae quod in suo regno pulcherri- mum natum esset iUo anno. 479. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Whose, cujus, lit. of whom. 2. Model IV. — Norit, Potential Subj., lit. whatever art each one may know. 190 LATIN COMPOSITION. 3. Model V. — A mountain which, qui mons, lit. which mountain. 4. Model TI. — The most beautiful thing which, quod pul- cherrlmum, lit. which the most beautiful. 480. VOCABULAEY. And that too, et is, ea, id; et is quidem. As to, after so, ut, conj. with subj. Astyages, Astydges, is, m. Be held = to be, sum, esse, fui. Compare, confSro, ferre, tuli, col- latum. Conduct one's self, se gerere ; gero, ere, gessi, gestum. During, in, in, prep, with abl. Eclipse, defectio, onis, f. Entertain, hold, teneo, ere, ui, tentum. Expose one's self, se opponSre ; oppono, ere, posui, posUum. Famous, clarus, a, um. The fa- mous, sometimes rendered by iUe, a, ud. Foolish, demens, entis. He, she, etc. = the same one, idem, eddem, idem. Joyful, laetus, a, um. Of after superlatives = among, inter, prep, witfi ace. Predict, praedlco, ere, dixi, die tum. Rhetorician, rhetor, oris, m. Say, relate, /ero, ferre, tidi, la- tum. Small, contracted, angustus, a, um. Sufficiently, satis, adv. Suitably = worthily enough, satis digne, adv. Surpass the folly = be more fool- ish, esse dementior, ins. Take place, happen, Jio, fi^ri, fac- ius sum. G. 294. Unpopularity, invidia, ae, f. Well-known, sometimes rendered by ille, a, ud. G. 450, 4. Worthily, digne^ adv. 481. Exercise. 1. Gorgias of Leontini, the well-known ancient rhetori- cian, was held in great honor. 2. At Rome there were some who exposed themselves to unpopularity for the safety of their country, 3. Cicero was in Athens just ten days. PRONOUNS. INTERROGATIVE. INDEFINITE. 191 4. Nothing can surpass the folly of those who, in a free state, so conduct themselves as to be feared. 5. That which is base is never useful. 6. Thales of Miletus, who is said to have been the wisest of the Seven, has never been suitably praised. 7. He is said to have predicted the eclipse of the sun which took place in the reign of Astyages. 8. Epicurus, in one house, and that too a small one, entertained many friends. 9. Of the many most joyful days which Scipio had seen during his life, that day was the most famous. 10. Let us compare the life of Demosthenes with that of Cicero. Lesson LXXXIX. PRONOUNS. — INTERROGATIVE. INDEFINITE. 482. Why ? how is it that ? may be rendered by Why then ? what indeed ? by quid enim f What of the fact that? by quid quod? See Model I. 483. The article a, or aii^ is generally omitted in ren- dering, unless it has the force of a certain^ some^ any^ in which case it may be rendered by aliquis^ sometimes even by quidam or quispiam. See Model II. 484. The article the is generally omitted in rendering ; but when it has the force of that^ especially before a relative clause, it is rendered by the pronoun is, and sometimes by ille. See Model III. 485. Every with an ordinal, and, in most instances, all with a superlative or ordinal, should be rendered by quisque. See Models I. and IV. 486. One another^ each other^ may be rendered by inter 192 LATIN COMPOSITION. S6, or i7iter ipsos, and one, one — another, another, by alius — alium. See Model V. ; also above, 270, Model VIII. 487. Models. I. What shall we say of the fact that the best men ever die with the greatest equanimity? II. Cicero did not discuss a part of the case, but spoke upon the whole subject. III. Xenophon, the pupil of Socrates, wrote his- tory. IV. At every third word of his oration, he threat- ened me. V. They were unlike each other. I. Quid, quod optimus quisque aequissimo ammo moritur f II. Cicero non partefm egit causae, sed de tota re dixit. III. Xenophon, Socraticus ille, scrips it histori- am. IV. Tertio quoque verba orationis suae mihi minahatur. V. Dissimiles inter se fuerunt. 488. Remarks. 1. Model I. — What shall we say of the fact that, quid, quod, lit. what, that, i. e. what of the fact that, or what shall we say ? &c. 2. Model II. — The pupil of Socrates, Socraticus ille, the -' emphatic rendered by ille. 489. Synonymes. I. Who, which, what ; quis, uter, qui f 1. Quis, quae, quid; who, which one, which? — who, which, of any number. 2. Titer, utra, utrum ; who, which one ? — which of two. 3. Qui, quae, quod ; what, op what character or PRONOUNS. — INTERROGATIVE. INDEFINITE. 193 KIND, — inquires after some distinguishing characteristic of the object, while quis and uter inquire after the object itself. IT. All, every ; omnis, quisque, unus quisque. 1. Omnis, e ; all, every, every one, every part, — with the idea of including the w^hole. 2. Quisque^ quaeque^ quidqice or quodque ; e vj:ry, every ONE, EACH ONE, — giving prominence to the individual, rather than to the whole of which he is a part. 3. Unus quisque (imus, a, um) ; every one, every single ONE, every individual OBJECT, — Stronger than quisque, as it admits no exception. 490. Vocabulary. Age, period of life, aetas, atis, f. All, each, every, quisque, quaeque, quodque and quidque or quic- que ; G. 190, N. 1; omnis, e. Each topic, quidque. All the good, opttmus quisque, lit. each best man. Commend, make acceptable, ^ro&o, are, avi, atum. Commit to writing, litUris mando, are, avi, atum. Condition, state, status, us, m. Constantly, assiduus, a, um. G. 443. Conversation, sermo, onis, m* Desirable, optabllis, e. Fifth, quintus, a, um. For the reason that, propterea quod, conj. Friend of the people, popularis, e. Individual, one, unus, a, um. G. 176, N. 1. Is doing, is done, agltur, actum est, pass, ot ago. Lightly, levlter, adv. On the subject of, concerning, rf«, prep, with abl. Once, formerly, quondam, adv. Praetor, praetor, oris, m. Roscius, Roscius, ii, m. Seek, expeto, ire, petivi, petltum. Sextus, Sextus, i, m. Take the census of, censeo, ere, ui, censum. The census of Sicily is taken, Sicilia censetur. Touch, tango, ere, tefigi, tactum. Which, which one, of two, uter, utra, utrum. G. 151. With each other, inter se. G 448, N. 194 , LATIN COMPOSITION. 491. Exercise. 1. Who saluted him? 2. Which one of us is the friend of the people, you or I? 3. What is the condition of the republic? 4. I have committed to writing the conversation which Crassus and Antony once (formerly) held with each other on the subject of eloquence. 5. The census of Sicily was taken every fifth year ; it was ta- ken in the praetorship of Verres. 6. What is more desirable than wisdom? what more worthy of a man? 7. Those who seek this are called philosophers. 8. Death is common to every age. 9. Each of your friends will write to you. 10. I will touch lightly each individual topic. 11. The consuls so conducted themselves that they commended their plans to all the good. 12. Sextus Eoscius not only was not at Rome, but did not know at all what was doing at Rome, for the reason that he was constantly in the country. Lesson XC. VERBS. — ACTIVE. PASSIVE. TRANSITIVE. INTRAN- SITIVE. 492. With transitive verbs a thought may in general, at the pleasure of the writer, be expressed either actively or passively ; but if the subject of the active construction would be an abstract noun with a genitive of the real agent, the passive construction is preferred. See Models I. and II. 493. Those verbs which in English are used both transi- tively and intransitively must be rendered into Latin with VERBS . ACTIVE . PASSIVE . 195 special care, as we often find in such cases that the transitive sense must be rendered by one verb and the intransitive by another. Thus the verb to increase, when used transitively, must be rendered by augeo, but when used intransitively by cresco. 494. The English Impersonal Construction in the passive voice is often rendered personally in Latin. This is espe- cially common with verbs of perceiving, declaring, saying, t J linking, finding, seeming, and the like. See Model III. 1. But in the Compound tenses of verbs of saying and thinking, the Latin prefers the Impersonal Construction : tradltum est, dictum est, dicendum est, credendum est, etc. See Model IV. 495. But the English Personal Construction may some- times be rendered into Latin by the Impersonal. Thus, — 1. The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation is often Imper- sonal. See Model V. 2. Latin verbs which are intransitive in the active — i. e. do not govern the accusative — in the passive can be used only impersonally. See Model VI. 496. Models. I. All things were ordained by God. II. The prudence of Cicero liberated the republic from the greatest dan- gers. III. It is related that Aristi- des was the most just of all. IV. It has been said that the law is a silent magis- trate. V, The plans of audacious I. A Deo omnia con- stituta sunt. II. Ciceronis prudentia res puhlica maxi- mis periculis est liherdta. III. ArisUdes omnium jus- tissimus fuisse tra- ditur. IV. Dictum est legem esse muttim magistrd- tum. V. Audacium civium con- 196 LATIN COMPOSITION. citizens must often be resisted. VI. An unsuccessful battle was fought by the con- suls. siliis saepe est re- sistenduni. VI. A consultbus male pugndtum est. 497. Remarks. 1. Model II. — In this sentence, though the Active construction ie used in the English, the Passive is preferable in the Latin. 2. Model III. — Observe the Personal construction. 3. Model V. — The Impersonal construction is necessary in the Passive, because resisto does not admit the Accusative. 4. Model VI. — An unsuccessful battle was fought, male pug- natum est, lit. it was fought badly. 498. Vocabulary. Acquire, paro, are, avi, atum. Act, do,facio, ere, feci, factum. Admire, wonder at, miror, 3,ri, atus sum, dep. Be eminent, mnus, a, um, emineo, ere, ui, or emineo alone. Commonwealth, res puhllca, rei puhlicae, f. Desert, desero, Sre, semi, sertum. Diminish, minuo, (ire, ui, utum. Eminent, excelling, excellens, entis. Esteem lightly, despise, contemno, ire, tempsi, temptum. Great, illustrious, amplus, a, um. Increase, trans., augeo, ere, auxi, aucium. Kind, every kind, omne genus ; genus, iris, n. My, your, etc., own productions, mea, tva, etc. G. 441, 1. Old, senex, senis ; as substant., an old person. Oratory, dicendi, o, um, a, ger. of dico, lit. of, for, etc., speak- ing. Resources, means, opes, opum, f. pi. G. 133, 1. Scaevola. Scaevdla, ae, f. So far, tantum, adv. So far am I from, tantum, abest ui with subj., the clause with ut being the subject of abest. Spirit, courage, animus, i, m. Withdraw, decCdo^ ire^ cessi, ces- sum. VERBS. — GENERAL STATEMENTS. 197 499. Exercise. 1. Money has always been lightly esteemed by all the greatest and most distinguished men. 2. He defended the commonwealth when he was a young man; he will not dese7't it now that he is old, 3. I have always praised Cato as a commander. 4. Cato, as a man emi- nent (excelling) in every virtue, has been praised by all, 5. It seems to me that Crassus acted more wisely than Scaevola. 6. So far are we from admiring our own pro- ductions, that Demosthenes himself, who is eminent among all 171 every kind of oratory (speaking) , does not satisfy us. 7. Your plans will not dhninish^ but increase, the calamity. 8. There is no doubt that the resources and spirits of the enemy are increasing from day to day. 9. The valor of Scijno compelled Hannibal to withdraw from Italy. 10. We must not only acquire wisdom, but also use it. Lesson XCI. verbs. — general statements. 500. In general statements the second person singular, or the first and third persons pkiral, are often used in Latin to denote an indefinite subject, as people, persons in general. Thus, — I. The second person singular is used when the remark is conceived of as addressed to any one who may chance to hear or read it; you, anyone. The second person of the sub- junctive is frequently so used. See Model III. 14 198 LATIN COMPOSITION. II. The first person plural is used when the speaker wishes to include himself in the general statement ; we ought^ every one ought. The third person plural is used in such general expressions as they say^ they report^ they think^ etc. See Models I. and II. III. But in such general statements, the third person singular of the passive voice is often used in Latin. See Model III. 501. Models. I. We envy those who I. lis aemulamur qui have the things which ea habent^ quae nos we long to have. habere cuptrmts. II. They say that Solon II. Solonem dicunt Athe- was the wisest of the niensium sapientis- Athenians. simum fuisse. III. Having obtained a vie- III. Parta victoria^ Us tory, you should con- quos vi deviceris suit for those whom constdendum est. you have subdued by force. 502. Remarks. 1. Model II. — For the position of dicunt^ see Remarks 304, 1. 2. Model III. — You should consult for = one should consult for, consulendum est. 503. Synonymes. Knowledge, foresight, wisdom ; scientia, prudentia^ sapi- entia. 1. ^cientia^ ae, f. ; knowledge, skill, — knowledge both theoretical and practical, VERBS. GENERAL STATEMENTS. 199 2. Prudentia^ ae^ f. ; foresight, prudence, sagacity, SOUND JUDGMENT. .3. Sapientki^ ae, f. ; wisdom, — involving both discern- ment and culture. 504. Vocabulary. Adversary, adversarius, ii, masc. adj. used as substant. Author, adviser, anctor, oris, m. and f. Avoid, vito, are, avi, alum. Be on one's guard, caveo, erej cavi, cautum. Confidence, fides, ei, f. Have con- fidence in, fidem habeo with dat. Contend, decerto, are, avi, atum. Easily, facile, adv. Injury, harm, injuria, ae, f. Instance, thing, res, rei, f. Know, understand, intelltgo, ere, lexi, ledum. Live, one lives, men live, vivltur, lit. it is lived. Magian, pi. the Magi, Magus, i, m. Mother, mater, iris, f. Muse, Musa, ae, f. Openly, palam, adv. An open ad- versary, palam adversarius. Possess, have, habeo, ere, ui, Hum. Quickly, celeriier, adv. Set fire to, inflammo, are, avi, atum. Suggestion, at the suggestion of, audor in the abl. abs. At the suggestion of the Magi, Magis audoribus, lit. the Magi being advisers. Think, arbltror, ari, atus sum, dep. Towards, adversus, prep, with ace. Undertake, susdpio, ere, cepi, cep- tum. Unharmed, sine injuria, lit. with- out harm, according to con- nection, without doing or with- out suffering wrong. Xerxes, Xerxes, is, m. 505. Exercise. 1. They say that he is the wisest who most quickly perceives in each instance what is true. 2. We have con- fidence in those whom we think to know (understand) 200 LATIN COMPOSITION. more than ourselves. 3. By being on your guard> you would easily avoid him w^ho is an open adversary. 4, It is said that Xerxes, at the suggestion of the Magi, set fire to the temples of Greece. 5. There are certain duties to be observed even towards those from whom you have re- ceived an injury. 6. Wars must be undertaken that men may live in peace unharmed (without injury). 7. Al- though the results of war are uncertain, yet one should contend for liberty at the peril of life. 8. While we sleep the Muses will not give us the knowledge of writing, reading, and the other arts. 9. Cicero says that wisdom is the mother of all good arts. 10. The knowledge of the liberal arts is more useful than money. 11. All statesmen ought to possess the highest prudence. Lesson XCII. verbs.— tenses. 506. In English the Present tense is sometimes used of an action which is really future, and must therefore be ren- dered into Latin by the Future tense. See Model I. 507. In English, the Present, the Future, or the Perfect, is sometimes used of a future action which must be completed before some specified event. In such cases it must be ren- dered into Latin by the Future Perfect. See Model II. 508. When the English Imperfect or Past tense simply states an historical fact, without any reference to the con- tinuance of the action, it must be rendered into Latin by the Perfect; but when it pictures a scene, or represents the ac- tion as continuing, it must be rendered by the Imperfect- See Models III. and IV. VERBS. TENSES. 201 509. The Imperfect with while is often best rendered by dum with tlie Present. See Model IV. 510- The Perfect with Jiave, when used of an action which has been going on for some time, is best rendered by the Present, generally with jamdiu, jamdudum, etc. See Model V. 511. Models. I. If we follow nature^ we shall not go astray. II. When I reach Rome, I will write to you. III. They saw the gleaming swords. ly. While our soldiers were collecting these things, the king himself es- caped from their hands. V. I have not known for a long time what you are doins:. I. Naturatn si sequetnur, non aberrabimus. II. Homam quum venero, scribam ad te. III. Fidgejites gladios vi- deba?it. IV. JTaec dam nostri col- ltgun% rex ipse effu- git e mantbus. V. Jamdiu ignoro quid agas. 512. Remarks. 1. Model I. — If we follow, Latin idiom, if we shall follow. The action really belongs to the future. 2. Model IT. — When I reach, Latin idiom, when I shall have reached, ^— a future action to be completed before the time of writing. 3. Model IV. — "While our soldiers were collecting, Latin idiom, while om' (soldiers) collect. 4. Model V. — I have not known for a long time, Latin idiom, for a long time Ida not know* 202 LATIN COMPOSITION. 513. Synonymes. Innocence, honesty, integrity, virtue ; in7iocentia, honestas^ integntas^ virtus. 1. Innocentia^ ae^ f. ; innocence, blamelessness, — free- dom from guilt. 2. ITonestas^ atis, f. ; honesty, moral worth, — especially as shown in character and intention. 3. Integritas, atls, f.; integrity, uprightness, — involv- ing the idea of soundness and complete7iess of moral char- acter. 4. Virtus, utis, f. ; virtue, moral worth, — as shown both in life and in character, more comprehensive than either of the other three words. 514- Vocabulary. Accommodate one's self to, yield to, ohstquor^ i, secutus sum, dcp. Assiduously, siudiose, adv. Consider, consider as, arhliror, ari, atus sum. Defendant, reus, rei, m. Eagerly, cupide, adv. For a long time, jamdudum, adv. Good will, henevolentia, ae, f. Happen, befall, accido, Sre, cidi. If any, si quis, quae or qua, quid. G. 190, 1. Indeed, I, thou, etc.: a personal pronoun with a conj. is often best rendered by the relat. qui, quae, quod. G. 453. Inhabitant, incola, ae, m. and f. Innocence, innocentia, ae, f. Less, minus, adv. Let = cause that, facio, ire, feci, factum, vt with subj. Means, by no means, nulla re, lit. by no thing. Moral worth, honor, lionestas, atis, f. More fully, pluribits verbis, lit with more words. VERBS. TENSES. 203 Obtain, nanciscor, i, nactus sum, dep. Occasion, there is occasion, need, opus est,fuit. One's, one's own, suus, a, um. Others', of others, another's, ali- enus, a, um. Preceptress, praeceptrtx, icis^ f. Proof, testimonium, ii, n. World, mundus, i, m. Yesterday's, of yesterday, hester- nus, a, um. Yesterday, hes- terno die. G. 429. 515. EXEECISE. 1 . Socrates considered himself an inhabitant and citizen of the whole world. 2. If anything new shall happen, we will let you know. 3. If there shall be any occasion, you will let us know. 4. I will write to you more fully when I obtain more leisure. 5. Our forefathers assidu- ously cultivated their own fields ; they did not eagerly seek those of others. 6. I never pleased myself less than yesterday ; indeed, while I accommodated myself to the young men, I forgot that I was old. 7. The defendant has given me the proof of his innocence. 8. I have often admired the moral worth of jSocrates. 9. With wisdom as a preceptress, one can live in tranquillity. 10. States- men can by no means more easily secure the good will of the multitude than by integrity and virtue. 11. I have /or a long time desired to visit Athens. 12. We had for a long time desired to visit Rome. 804 lATIN COUPOSITIOM. Lesson XCIIT. VERBS. — INDICATIVE. 516. The English Indicative mast often be rendered by the Latin Subjunctive. Thus, — 1. Often in clauses denoting Cause, or Time and Cause. See Model I. 2. In Indirect Questions. See Model 11. 3. In the Subordinate Clauses of Indirect Discourse. See Model III. 4. In Relative Clauses defining indefinite antecedents. See Model lY. 5. In Clauses denoting Kesuh, and sometimes in Condi- tional and in Concessive Clauses. See Model V. 517. The Indicative with thaty in a clause which is use<.l either as the subject or the object of a verb, is generally best rendered into Latin by the Infinitive with a Subject Aecussi* tive. See Moilel VI. 518. MoDHLs. I. Panaetius praises Scipio I. PamutiMS Seipiomiem Africanos, because he was temperate. II. It is ai^ed whether one II. duty is greater than another. m. Ennius does boI think HL that one should mourn over death which iia- mortality follows*. YEBBS. — mDICATIVE. 205 IV. There is no one who is not able to attain to virtue. V. I would not decline the labor, if I had any- leisure time. VI. We hear that Catiline qK>ke of the republic with some in one way and with others in another. V. Nemo est qui ad vir- tutem pervemre non posmt. V. Labdrem. non recusal rem, H rnihi uUum esset vacuum teni- pus. VL Catitinam aJtUer cum aliis de re piMica loctUvm audimus. S19. Remabks. 1. MoDEX. m. — That oxe should moubv otes death, lugetidam esse mortem, lit. ihat death should be mourned. 2. Model VI- — With some ijt oke way am> with othebs nr AMOTHEK, dUter cum aliis, lit. in another wa/y wOk others. • 520. VOCABULABT. Alone, stilus, a, vm. G. 151. Aristotie, Aristotdes, is, m. Delightful, chaimiiig, duleis, e. Destxtute of, expers, ertis. 6. 399. Do, act, ago. Ire, egi, actum. Entirely, omnlno, adr. Erening, vaper, iris, m. At eren- ing, respiri. For ihe sake of, gratia or causa with gen. G- 416, L Justice, justitia, ae, f. Justfy, fuste, adr. Learning, erudition, erudiiio, onis, f. Offer, afflro, ferre, attHi, aUstum. Opinion, opinio, dnis, £. Prince, prineeps, tpis, m. Recall, call to nund, cowamamtro, are, Svi^Sttmi. Say — not, deny, nego, are. On, ahan. Saqr that no one = deny fliat ai^ one, nego, etc Wont, be wont, s(Aeo, Ire, sotUus sum. G. 268,8. 206 LATIN COMPOSITION. 521. Exercise. 1 . Brutus has written to me ; but what he wishes I do not know ; for what counsel can I offer him, since I need coimsel myself? 2. For the sake of exercising my mem- ory, I recall at evening what each day I have said, heard, and done. 3. When boys, we had the opinion that Socrates, the prince of philosophers, was entirely destitute of all learning. 4. Epicurus says that one can- not live happily, unless one lives wisely, honestly, and justly. 5. Cicero says that no one, who does not live honestly, can live happily. 6. Publius Scipio was wont to say, that he was never less at leisure than when at leisure, nor less alone than when alone. 7. The poets are so delightful that they are not only read, but also committed to memory. Lesson XCIY. * verbs. —potential mood. 522. The English Potential Mood, with the signs, may, ca7i, might, could, loould, should, is generally best rendered by the Latin Subjunctive. See Model I. 523. But the Potential may sometimes be rendered by the Indicative, and sometimes even by the Infinitive. Thus, — 1. By the Indicative of the Periphrastic Conjugations in the historical tenses, especially in conditional sentences. See Model II. 2. The Potential may be rendered by the Indicative in VERBS. POTENTIAL MOOD. 207 expressions of duty^ necessity^ ahility^ and the like, and in such expressions as, it would he fair ^ proper^ just^ tedious^ difficult, better^ more useful^ etc. See Model III. 3. The Potential after that may sometimes be rendered by the Infinitive. See Model IV. 524. In English, after the conjunctions, if unless^ except^ though^ although^ that^ lest, in order that, etc., the verb takes tliG form sometimes of the Indicative, sometimes of the Po- tential, and sometimes of the Subjunctive. But the verb after these conjunctions must generally be rendered into Latin either by the Indicative or by the Subjunctive, and in choosing between these two moods, the learner must be guided by the directions given him in his Grammar. See G. 497- 520; also Model V. 525. Models. I. What can seem great to him to whom all eter- nity is known ? II. This condition should not have been ac- cepted. III. It would be tedious to reply to all that has been said by you. IV, It is of great interest to us that you should come as soon as possi- ble. V If I ask you anything, wall you not reply? II. Quid videatur ei mag- num, cui aeternitas omiiis nota sit f Haec conditio non ac- cipienda fuit. III. Longum est ad omnia respondere quae a te dicta stmt. IV. Magni nostra interest te quani primum venire. V. Si te rogavero aliquid, nonne respondebisf 208 LATIN COMPOSITION. 526. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Should not have been accepted, Latin idiom, was not to he accepted, or did not deserve to he accepted. 2. Model III. — It would be tedious, Latin idiom, it is long, i. e. a long task. 3. Model V. — If I ask, si rogavero, lit. if I shall have asked. 527. Vocabulary. Appropriate to, apply to, confero, ferre, iuli, collatum, in with ace. As much — as, tantus — quantus : each, of course, to be in its proper construction in its own clause. Asia, Asia, ae, f. Beneficence, heneficentia, ae, f. Better, preferable, satiiis, properly neut. comp. from satis; lit. more satisfactory. Certainly, certe, adv. Depart from, exeo, ire, ii, Uum. Differently, allter, adv. Either — or, vel — vel, etc. G. 554, II., 2. Flaccus, Flaccns, i, m. Follow, sequor, i, secHtus sum, dep. To follow this course, that course, &c., hoc, illud, etc., sequor. Govern, rule, rego, ire, rexi, rec- tum. Impel, impello, ire, puli, pulsum. Important, is important to, intirest, fuit. G. 408. Inform, certiorem facio, ire, feci, factum ; lit. make more cer- tain. Liberality, liberalltas, atis, f. Mention, commemoro, are, avi, atum. Noble, honorable, honestus, a, um. Object of interest, quod visendum est ; lit. what should he visited. Silent, mutus, a, um. Sufficient, be sufficient, be able, possum, posse, potui. Think little of, despise, contemno, ire, tempsi, iempium. Understand, intelligo, ire, lexi, lectum. Unnecessary, not necessary, non necessarius, a, um. Vendor, venditor. Oris, m. Whole, the whole of, totus, a, um, acU. G. 16L VERBS. IMPERATIVE. 209 528. Exercise. 1. It would be tedious and unnecessary to mention all the objects of interest in the whole of Asia. 2. Flac-= cus thinks that it is important to him that I should write you as often as possible. 3. If I thought differently, certainly your admonition would be sufficient to impel me to follow the course which you think best. 4. I wish that you would write to me on what day you think that you will depart from Kome, that I may inform you in w^hat place I shall be. 5. Would it not be better to be silent, than to speak that which no one understands? 6. The republic should have been wisely governed. 7. Nothing is more noble than to think little of money, if you do not have it ; and if you have it, to appropriate it to beneficence and liberality. 8. What is there which cannot be purchased, if you give as much as the vender wishes ? Lesson XCV. VERBS. — IMPERATIVE. 529. The Imperative with let is generally best rendered by the First and Third Persons of the Latin Subjunctive, while other Imperatives are generally best rendered by the Latin Present Imperative. See Models I. and II. 530. Remember that the Imperative with a negative is best rendered by noli and noUte with the Infinitive. See Model III. 210 LATIN COMPOSITION 531. Models. I. See that you come as soon as possible. 11. Since life without friends is full of fear, let ms secure friendships. III. Do not think that the consul did this with- out great pain. I. Cura ut quam pri- mum venias. II. Quum vita sine ami- cis metus plena sit, amicitias compare- mics. III. Noli putdre consulem hoc sine m,agno dolore fecisse. 532. Remarks. 1. Model I. — See that, cura ut, lit. take care that. 2. Model III. — Do not think, noli putare, lit. do not wish to think. See G. 489, 1). 533. Synonymes. To approve, to praise, to extol ; probo, laudoy extoUo laudt- Ims or laudando. 1. Probo, are, avi, dtum, / to approve. 2. Laudo, are, avi, dtum ; to prats e, to commend. 3. Extollo, ere, laudibus or laudando / to laud, extol. 534. Vocabulary. Action, deed, /ad?/m, t, n. Arrange with reference to, refero, ferre, tali, latum, ad with ace. ; lit. refer to. Care for, euro, are, Hvi, Htum. Desire, volo, velle, volui, G. 293; opto, are, avi, atum. See Syn. 618. VERBS — IMPERATIVE. 211 Eagerly, vehementer, adv. Engaged, be engaged in, sum, esse, fui, in with abl. ; lit. to he 171. Extol, extoUo, ere, with laudlbus or laudando. Guard, defend, tueor, eri, tuUus sum, dep. Heaven, caelum, i, n. See G. 143, 1. Immortal, immortalis, e. Interests, profit, uiilUas, atis, f. Observe, retain, ieneo, ere, ui, ten- turn. Other, the other, the second of two, alter, era, irum. G. 151, 1, and foot-note 2. Proceed, pergo, ere, perrexi, per- rectum. Such — as, in quality, talis — qualis ; in character, is — qui; lit. the one who or which. See G. 186, 4, and 451, 4. That, not strongly demonstrative, especially as antecedent of relative, is, ea, id. Toil, labor, labor, oris, m. 535. Exercise. 1. Do not doubt that there were poets before Homer. 2. Proceed, young men, and devote yourselves to the study in which you are now engaged, that you may be both an honor to yourselves and an advantage to your friends. 3. Let us imitate those who, by their counsels and toils, have attained immortal glory. 4. Let us think that the most useful, which will be the best. 5. Let us be such as we wish to be regarded. 6. I am eagerly awaiting a letter from you, and indeed such a one as I especially desire. 7. Let us arrange all our plans and actions with reference to virtue. 8. We not only approve, ,but also praise, your plans. 9. There are some who, with their praises, extol Marcus Cato to heaven. 10. Let those who are to be statesmen observe two precepts of Plato, one that they should guard the interests of the citizens, the other that they should care for the whole state. 212 . LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XCVI. verbs. — infinitive. 536. When the English Infinitive is simply the subject or the object of a verb, it should be rendered by the Latin In- finitive. See Model I. 537. When the Enghsh Infinitive either expresses pur- pose or result, or is dependent upon a noun or adjective, it can seldom be rendered by the Latin Infinitive. When thus used, it should generally be rendered by one of the following constructions : 1. By the Subjunctive of Purpose or Result. See Model II. ; also G. 497-505. 2. By the Genitive of the Gerund or Gerundive with causa or gratia. See Model III. 3. By the Accusative of the Gerund or Gerundive with ad. See Model IV. 4. By a Relative Clause. See Model V. ; also G. 503, IL 2. 5. By the Supine in u. See Model VL 538. Models. I. All wished to hear Ci- I. Omnes Cicerdnem aii^ cero. ^tre voluerunt. II. I exhort you to read II. Te hortor ut hanc era- this oration. tidnem legas. III. He came to Rome to III. Bomam venit met vi- visit me. sendi causa. IV. Cicero arose to reply. IV. Cicero ad responden- dum surrexiU VERBS. — INFINITIVE. 213 V. The consul was worthy to command. VI. Let us inquire what it is best to do. V. Consul dignus fuit qui imperdret. VI. Quaerdmus quid opti- mum factu sit. 539. Remarks. 1. Model III. — To visit me, mei visendi causa, lit. /or the sake of visiting me. 2. Model V. — Worthy to command, Latin idiom, worthy who Should command, i. e. worthy that he should command. 640. Vocabulary. Advantage, commddum, i, n, Archytas, Archytas, ae, m. Assembly, concio, onis, f. Attention, exertion, oplra, ae, f. Connected, conftnens, entis. Curio, Curio, Onis, m. Deserve, mereo, ere, ui, Xtum ; mereor, Sri, Uus sum, dep. Devise, invSnio, ire, veni, ventum. Dion, Dio or Dion, onis, m. Discourse, oratio, onis, f. Early in the morning, mane, adv. Evident, be evident, consto, are, stUi, statum. Give heed, opSram do, dare, dedi, datum. Injure, noceo, ere, ui, itum. G. 385. Interrupt, interpetto, are, avi, atum. Know, know how, scio, scire, scivi, scitum. Lawful, it is lawful, licet, licuit or licHtum est. G. 299. Not, not at all, nihil. G. 378, 2. Pay one's respects to, saluto, are, avi, atum. Perhaps, forsltan, adv. Reply, respondeo, ere, spondi, sponsum. Syracusan, of Syracuse, Syracusi' us, a, um. Urge, impello, ere, pfili, pulsv/m. Wonderful, mirdbilis, e. 15 214 LATIN COMPOSITION. 541. Exercise. 1. If we wish to be both wise and happy, we must give heed to virtue. 2. Plato wrote to Archytas to remember that he was born, not for himself only, but for his country. 3. We are prepared to hear. 4. It is not lawful to injure another for the sake of one's own advantaire. 5. It is evident that laws were devised for the safety of citizens. 6. I will not interrupt you at all ; I prefer to hear a con- nected discourse. 7. Plato urged Dion of Syracuse to liberate his country. 8. Perhaps this which I am about to say may be wonderful to hear, but I will certainly say that which I think. 9. Pompey is a suitable person to command the Roman army. 10. Know that Curio came to me to pay his respects. 11. Early in the morning men come into the assembly ; they inquire what it is best to do. 12. Socrates replied to his judges that he had deserved to be presented with the highest honors. 13. All things are easily learned, if you know how to learn. Lesson XCVII. VERBS. — PARTICIPLES. 542. The English Participle may generally be rendered by the Latin Participle. See Model I. 543. The English Perfect Active Participle may be ren- dered by one of the following constructions : 1. By the Perfect Participle of a Deponent verb. See Model II. VERBS. PARTICIPLES. 215 2. By the Perfect Passive Participle in the Ablative Abso- iute. See Model III. 3. By Quum with the Subjunctive. See Model IV. 4. By Postquam with the Indicative. See Model V. 544. The English expressions, so called^ the so called, what they or you call, are rendered by Relative Clauses, qui dici- tur, qui vocdtur, qui appelldtur, quern dicunt or dicis, quern vocant or vocas, etc. See Model YI. 545. The English Participle in iny, when used substan- tively, must be rendered by the Gerund or Gerundive. See Model VII. 546. Models. I. I have received your carefully written let- ter. II. Having tarried a few days at Corinth, he came to Athens. III. The commanders, hav- ing conquered the en- emy, presented their secretaries with gold rings. IV. Mithridates, having be- taken himself into his own kingdom, made an attack upon the Roman army. V. The actor, having been hissed from the stage, fled to you for pro- tection. II. III. IV Accepi tuam diligen- ter scriptam episto- lam. Corinthi paucos dies commordtus, Athe- nas venit. Imperatdres, hoste su- perdto, scribas suos annulis aureis do- naverunt. Mithriddtes, quum se in regnuni recepis- set suum, i?i exerci- tumRomdnum im- petum fecit. V. Histrio, postquam e scena sihtlis explo- debdtur, ad te cou' fUgit, 216 LATIN COMPOSITION. VI. That law, as you call it, VI. is not a law. VII. We are animated with VII. the desire of living happily. Lex ista quam vocas non est lex. Beate Vivendi cupi' dilate incensi su- onus. 547. Remarks. 1. Model III. — Having conquered the enemy, hoste superdioy lit. the enemy having been overcome. 2. Model IV. — Having betaken himself, quum se recepisset^ lit. when he had hetaken himself. 3. Model VI. — As you call it, quam vocas, lit. which you call. 548. Synonymes. To be grateful, to thank, to reciprocate a favor ; gratiam {gratias) haheo^ gratias ago., gratiam refero. 1. Gratiam {gratias) habeo., ere, ui, itum ; to be grate- ful, — to have or feel gratitude. 2. Gratias ago, ere, egi, actum ; to thank, to return THANKS, — to express gratitude. 3. Gratiam refero, ferre, tuli, latum ; to reciprocate a FAVOR, TO RETURN Or REQUITE A FAVOR, — tO shoW gratitudo by deeds. 549. Vocabulary. Carefully, diligenter, adv. Deed, thing, res, ret, f. Entertain gratitude, be grateful, gratiam habeo, cre, ui, itum. Establish, firmo, are, S,vi, Stum. Express thanks, gratias ago, ire, egi, actum. Maiden, virgo, inis, f. Mantinea, Mantinea, ae, f. Novel, novus, a, um. Olympus, Olympus, i, m. Part, pars, partis, f. Poor, with limited means, inops^ dpis. VERBS. — PARTICIPLES. 217 Robber, praedo, onis, m. Sabine, Sablnus, a, um. Seize, rapio, ere, rapui, rapium. Servilius, Servilius, it, m. Some time = at some time, ali- quando, adv. Start, set out, proficiscor, i, profec- tus sum, dep. Surely, certe, adv. Tarry, commoror, art, atus sumy dep. Towards, versus, adv., usually after the word denoting place. 550. Exercise. 1. Having been asked my opinion, I said many things in regard to the republic. 2. Cicero, having been asked his opinion, said that which was most worthy of the re- public. 3. I received many letters from you on the sa^me day^ all carefully written. 4. We see all parts of Italy adorned with the most beautiful monuments. 5. Publius Servilius, the commander of the Roman army, having achieved the greatest deeds, took the ancient city of Olympus. 6. Epaminondas, having conquered the Lace- daemonians at Mantinea, died in joy and victory. 7. The robbers, having tarried one night at Capua, started towards Rome. 8. I entertain the greatest gratitude to you for your favor. 9. O that we some time may be able to requite your- favor ; we shall indeed ever be grateful. 10. A poor man, if he cannot requite a favor, can surely be grateful. 11. We desire to express our thanks to you in the strongest terms. 12. Romulus pursued a novel plan for establishing a state, when he ordered the Sabine maidens to be seized. / 218 LATIN COMPOSITION. Lesson XCVIII. distinction in the use of participles, relative clauses, and clauses with conjunctions. 551. Participles, Relative Clauses, and Clauses with Con- junctions, are in Latin kindred constructions, and must, ac- cordingly, be used with care and discrimination. Thus, — I. The Relative Clause is generally used when we wish to identify a person or thing by specifying some characteristic, or to call attention to some permanent and essential quality or habiti See Models I. and II. II. A Clause with a Conjunction is generally used when we wish to make the relation of time^ cause^ condition^ con- cession^ etc., particularly prominent. See Model III. III. The Participle may be used, — 1. Instead of the Relative Clause, when we wish to indicate only an accidental or temporary connection between a quality or an action and the noun to which it is referred ; and, — 2. Instead of a Clause with a Conjunction, when the rela- tion of time^ cause, condition, concession, etc., is not particu- larly prominent. See Models IV. and V. 552. Models. I. In the book entitled I. In eo lihro qui in- Laelius, Cicero wrote scrihitur Laelius, on the subject of Cicero de amicitia friendship. II. The virtue which boldly II. Virtus quae venienti- meets coming evils is his malis obstat called fortitude. fortitudo nomina- tur. DISTINCTION IN THE USE OF PARTICIPLES, ETC. 219 III. I seem to be in Rome III. Romae videor when I read your let- quum tuas epistolas ters. lego. IV. I have sent 7/02^ a letter IV. EpistolamGraececoni' written in Greek. positani misi ad te, V. Not knowing the true V. Ignorans verwn iter path of glory, he pre- gloriae^ metui a fers to be feared by the civibus qucum diligi citizens rather than mavult, loved. 553. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Entitled Laelius. This identifies the book thus entitled, and must therefore be expressed by the Relative Clause. 2. Model II. — Coming. This does not identify the evils, and may therefore be rendered by the Participle. 554. Synonymes. To remember, to recollect, to recall to mind; memmiy reminiscor^ recordor. 1. Mermni ; to remember, — to retain in memory. See G. 297. 2. Reminiscor, i; to remember, to recollect, to re- call TO MIND, — to recall by an effort of the memory. 3. Recordor^ dri, dtus sum ; to recall to mind, to cher- ish THE memory of, — to recall to mind and to dwell upon the recollection, generally with pleasure. 555. Vocabulary. Advice, give advice, advise, suadeo, j All, all together, cunctus, a, um. ere, suast, suasum. 'Any, ullus, a, um. G. 151. 220 LATIN COMPOSITION. Civil, belonging to the city, ur- banus, a, um. Excellent, good, bonus, a, um. G. 165. For the first time, primum, adv. Hearing, in the hearing of, pres. part, of audio in the abl. absol. ; e. g., in the hearing of Greece, audiente Graecia, lit. Greece hearing. Hippias, Hippias, ae, m. Hortensius, Hortensius, ii, ra. I myself, you yourself, he himself, &c., ipse, a, um. G. 452, 1. Inscribe, inscribe, ere, scripsi, scriptum. Military, pertaining to war, belU- cus, a, um. Nearly, paene, adv. Nineteen, undeviginti, indecl. Olympia, Olympia, ae, f. Recall to mind, recorder, ari, atus sum, dep. Trust, hope, spero, are, dvi, atum. Very, with nouns, ipse, a, um. G. 452, 2. 556. Exercise. 1. Do not philosophers inscribe their names in these very books which they write on the subject of despising glory? 2. Hippias, having come to Olympia, boasted, in the hearing of nearly all Greece, that there was noth- ing, in any art, which he did not himself know. 3. In the conversation held with Cato, Cicero said many things on the subject of virtue. 4. Isocrates wrote, in his ninety- fourth year, the book entitled Panathenaicus. 5. In the consulship of Lucius Crassus and Quintus Scaevola, Quintus Hortensius the orator spoke for the first time in the forum at the age of nineteen. 6. I remember what advice you then gave me. 7. I trust that you, who are wont to forget nothing except injuries, recall to mind many things in regard to this most excellent man, Marcus Cato. 8. Recall to mind those things which you learned when a boy. 9. Pericles, excelling in learning, in coun^ EXPKESSIONS OF DUTY, NECESSITY. 221 sel, and in eloquence, presided for forty years over Athens, both in civil and in military affairs. Lesson XCIX. expressions of duty, necessity. 557. The general meaning conveyed by the English word must is expressed in Latin in five different ways. These, however, must be carefully distinguished from each other. Thus, — I. Deheo^ I ought, denotes a moral obligation, I ought, or I must, because I ought : What ought we to do? Qtfid facere dehemus? What ought we to have done? Quid facere debuimus ? See Model I. II. Oportet, it behooves, also denotes moral obligation, but with the accessoiy notion of propriety. It also differs from deheo in expressing the obligation impersonally and ab- stractly^ as a duty in itself considered : This ought to be said, Hoc did oportet. See Model II. III. The Passive Periphrastic Conjugation and the Partici- ple in dus^ denote (1) a necessity growing out of the circum- stances of the case, and (2) propriety or desert: That plan must be commended, tllud consilium laudandum est. See Model III. IV. JVecesse est, it is necessary, is the strongest and most unqualified expression of stern necessity : This must be done, Hoc fieri necesse est. See Model IV. V. Opus est, it is needful, there is need, denotes only a qualified necessity, and has reference to the attainment of an object : It is needful that this should be done, Hoc fiSri opus est. See Model V. 222 LATIN COMPOSITION. 558. Models. I. We ought to have aided you. II. This ought long since to have been done. III. We ought to consider what we have to fear. lY. Why was it necessary for you to write that letter ? V. You will defend us, if it shall seem to be need- ful. I. Tejuvare debuimus. II. Hoc jampridem fac^ turn esse oportuit. III. Dehemus cogiture quid nobis sit me- tuendum. lY. Quid tibi necesse fu- it illam epistolam scribere ? Y. iVb5, si opus esse vi- debitur, defendes. 559. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Ought to have aided, Latin idiom, were under obli- gation (owed) to aid. See G. 537, 1. 2. Model II. — Factum esse is here used, instead of ^^rt, to em- phasize the completion of the action. 560. YOCABULARY. Accomplish, efflcio, Sre, feci, fec- tum. Admiration, a feeling of admira- tion, admiratio, Onis, f. Admit, concede, concedo, ^re, cessi, cessum. Amount, quantity, vis, vis, f. G. 66. Attempt, tenia, cLre, Hvt, dtttm. Change, to alter, mute, are, Hvi, atum. Choose, select, eligo, ire, Ugi, lec- tum. Depend upon, posUus, a, urn, esse, in with abl. ; lit. he placed in. Evil, malum, i, n. Exist, sum, esse,fui. EXPRESSIONS OF DUTY, NECESSITY. 223 Frequently, saepe, adv. ; comp. saepius, superlat. saepissime. Good, bonum, i, n. Learn, observe, acc^pio, ire, dpi, ceptum. Least, minimus, a, um, superlat. of parvus, G. 165 ; adv., minlme. Magistrate, magistratus, us, m. Minister, servant, minister, tri, m., ministra, ae, f. To minister to, minister or ministra esse with gen. ; lit. to be the min- ister of. of:^ More highly, with verbs of valuing, pluris, adv. Necessary, it is necessary, necesse est, fuit. Perhaps, /oWasse, adv. Possession, possessio, onis, f. Pray, I pray, parenthetical, quaeso. Prize, aestimo, are, avi, atum. Prompt, affect, commdveo, ere, movi, motum. Prove, probo, are, Rvi, atum. Silver, argentum, i, n. 561. Exercise. 1. That which ought to be accomplished by worth is often attempted by means o^ money. 2. We have learned from good men^ that of evils it behooves one to choose the least. 3. It must be admitted that an honorable life is a happy life. 4. No possession, no amount of gold and silver, must be more highly prized than virtue. 5. The arts which minister to pleasures are least to l)e com- mended. 6. It must be admitted that a happy life de- pends upon virtue. 7. Consider, I pray, what we ought to do. 8. All things should be arranged with reference to the highest good. 9. There is need of magistrates, without whose prudence and diligence a state cannot ex- ist. 10. Prompted by a feeling of admiration, I praise Plato more frequently, perhaps, than is necessary. 11. I will not prove to these judges that the praetor took money contrary to the laws. 224 LATIN COxMPOSlTION. Lesson C. / USE OF SPECIAL VERBS. ,/ 562. Permission may be expressed in Latin, — 1. By licet^ it is lawful, permitted by human law. See Model I. 2. By fas est^ it is right, permitted by divine law. See Model II. 3. By conceditm\ concessum est, it is allowed, permitted by all law. See Model I. 563. Power, ability, is expressed by possum, 1 am able, I can. See Model III. 564. Possibility, uncertainty, may be expressed, — 1. By fieri potest ut, with the Subjunctive, it can happen that, it may be that. See Model IV. 2. By the Potential Subjunctive. See Model V. 565. The Latin has three principal ways of expressing possession : I. Sum with the Ablative is used of necessary and per- manent possession. This is used especially when the thing possessed is a part, a quality, or a characteristic of the pos- sessor. See Model VI. II. Habeo is the most common equivalent for the Englisli verb to ham, but is used especially to denote external posses- sion. See Models VIL and VIIL III. Sum with the Dative has the same general force as habeo, but calls attention to the thing possessed by making it the subject of the verb. See Models IX. and X.' * In expressions of naming, as in Model IX., sum with the Dative is the regular construction. It is also tlie usual construction when the USE OF SPECIAL VERBS. 225 566. Models. I. We say that is lawful which is permitted by the laws. II. The consul defended you, as far as he was able, as far as was right, and as far as was lawful. m. They might have aided you very much. IV. It may be that I am mistaken. V. Who would hesitate to defend his country? VI. African us was possess- ed of the greatest eloquence. VII. He has an ancestral estate in Italy. VIII. Demosthenes possess- ed wisdom united with eloquence. IX. At Syracuse there is a fountain whose name is Arethusa. X. I have no dealings with him. I. Licere id dicimus quod legibus con- cedttur. II. Consul^ quoad pos- set^ quoad fas es- set, quoad liceret, vos defendit. III. Te plurtmum ju- vcii'e potuerunt. IV. Fieri potest ut fal- lar. V. Quis duhttet patri- am defendere f VI. Erat in Africano sutmna eloquen- tia. VII. Funduni in Italia paternum habet. VIII. Demosthenes sapi- entiam cum elo- quentia junctam. habuit. IX. Syracusis est fons cut nomen Are- thusa est. X. Nihil mihi est cum, illo. subject stands connected with an oblique case with or without a prepo Bition, as in Model X., nihil cum illo, no dealings with him. 226 LATIN COMPOSITION. 567. Remarks. 1. Model IV. — It may be that, Latin idiom, it can take place (be done) that. 2. Models VI. — VIII. — Observe the dififerent ways of express- ing possession. 3. Model IX. — Whose name is, Latin idiom, to which there is the name. 568. Vocabulary. Acquaintance, experience, usus, us, m. A very intimate ac- quaintance, summus usus. Administer, gero, ere, gessi, ges- tum. And yet = and, et, conj. Aware, be aware, know, scio, scire, scivi, scitum. By myself, by yourself, &c., me- cum, tecum, etc. ; lit. with my- self, &c. Correctly, rede, adv. Elegantly, polite, adv. Ever, unquam, adv. Express, utter, eUquor, i, locutus sum, dep. Fabius, Fahius, ii, m. Innumerable, innumeraMlis, e. Know, be acquainted with, cog- nosco, ire, ndvi, nUum. May be, it may be that, fidri potest ut with subj. Negligent, negligens^ enti's. No one, nobody, nemo, mis ; nul- lus, a, um. See G. 457, 2. Not, followed by either — or, = neither — nor, neque or nee — neqiie or nee. One, any one, any thing, quis, quae, quid. Repeat, reddo, ere, dXdi, ditum. So that, ut, conj. Strongly, valde, adv. Such — as = so great, or so much — as, tantus — quantus. Talent, mental ability, mens, men- tis, f. Think, ponder, cogito, are, SLvi, atum. Think out, commentor, Sri, Situs sum. Whoever, whatever, quisquis, quaequae, quodqnod and quic- quid ox quidquid. He — who, that — which, is — qui. Writing, scriptum, i, n. Wrong, nefas, n. indecl. PREPOSITIONS. 227 569. Exercise. 1. Whatever is not lawful we ought to regard as wrong. 2. It may be that one may think correctly, and yet not be able to express elegantly that which one thinks. 3. You would not be able to praise Plato either too strongly or too frequently. 4. I do not think that^Verres will deny that he has innumerable pictures. /5. O that there had been in Tiberius Gracchus such talent for ad- ministering the republic well, as there was genius for speaking well \ 6. It is not permitted me to be negligent in this thing. 7. I have, as I think you are aware, a very intimate acquaintance with Marcus Fabius. 8. Horfen- sius had such a memory as I think I have known in no one (else), so that, whatever he had thought out by him- self, he could, without writing, repeat in the same words in which he had thought it. J Lesson CI. PREPOSITIONS. 570. In many instances where the English idiom uses prepositions, the Latin adopts some different construction. 571. The preposition without may be variously rendered into Latin, but most frequently (1) by the preposition sine^ (2) by a participle with non or some other negative word, and (3) by ut non^ qui non^ or quin^ with the Subjunctive. See Models L— III. 572. The preposition for may generally be rendered (1) by the Dative of the Indirect Object, (2) by x^ro with the 228 LATIN COMPOSITION. Ablative, and (3) by other prepositions ; ad., oh., propter with the Accusative, or de with the Ablative. See Models IV. —VI. 573. The preposition to may be rendered, (1) by the Dative of the Indirect Object, (2) by ad with the Accusative, and (3) by the Accusative of Limit. See Models VII. — IX. 574. Models. I. I shall say without hesitation that which I think. II. It is sad to be troubled without accomplish- ing anything. III. I allowed 7io day to pass without writ- ing something to you. IV. We were born, not only for ourselves, but also for our country. V. The soldiers fought for liberty. VI. Publius Scipio seems to have been born for glory. VII. The commander will yield to the laws. VIII. I write to those who write to me. IX. Archias came to Rome in the consulship of Marius andCatulus, I. Dicam sine cuncta- tione quod sentio. II. Miserum, est nihil proficientem angi. III. Nullum intennisi diem quin aliquid ad te scriberem. IV. JVbn nobis solum., sed etiam patriae., nati sumus. V. Milites pro libertdte pugnaverunt, VI. Publius Scipio ad gloriam natus es- se videtur. VII. Imperdtor legibus cedet. VIII. Scribo ad eos qui ad me scribunt. IX. Archias Romam ve- nit Mario et Co- tvlo consulibus. PREPOSITIONS. 229 575. Remarks. 1. Model II. — Without accomplishing anything, nihil profici- entem, lit. accomplishing nothing. 2. Model III. — Without writing, quin scriberem, lit. but that 1 wrote. 3. Models IV. and VI.— For ourselves, nobis, Indirect Object. For globt, ad gloriam, the Object or End for which. 576. Synonymes. To think, to have an opinion ; optnor, puto, arbttror, sen- tio, censeo. 1. Opinor^ ari, atus sum, dep. ; to think, to have an IMPRESSION, — used especially of mere impression, as opposed to well-founded opinion. 2. JPuto, are, dvi, dtum / to think, to suppose, — imply- ing a more decided opinion than opinor. 3. Arbttror, dri, dtus sum, dep.; to think, to have a CONVICTION, — used especially (1) of opinions which rest upon one's own personal convictions, and (2) of opinions which have authority, as those of an arbitrator. 4. Sentio, ire, sensi, sensum / to think, to perceive, to FEEL, — used especially of one's sentiments, as dependent upon one's own experience, upon what one has perceived and felt. 5. Censeo, ere, ui, censum / to think, to decide, — to ex- press one's opinion authoritatively and officially, as a senator may do by vote or otherwise. 16 230 LATIN COMPOSITION. 577. Vocabulary. Allow to pass, iniermiito, Sre, ml- Appear, seem, videor, eri, visus sum, pass, of video ; lit. to he looked upon as. Attain, adipiscor, i, adeptus sum, dep. Conduce to, be conducive to, con- dnco, ere, duxi, ductum. G. 385. Consult, consult for, consult for the interest of, consulo, ere, sidui, sultum. G. 385, 1. Discord, discordia, ae, f. Encounter, go to meet, oppUo, ire, ivi and ii, Uum. Express opinion, think, censeo, ere, ui, censum. Give, deliver, trado, ire, didi, dltum. Glorious, gloriosus, a, um. Have reference to, refio'or, ferri, latus sum, ad with ace. ; lit. he referred to. In regard to, sometimes rendered by gen. ; e. g. a precept in re- gard to duty, officii praecep- tum, lit. a precept of duty. Introduce, bring in, induco, ere, duxi, ductuTn. Not even, ne quidem, with the em- phatic word after ne. Not even when, ne turn quidem, quum, lit. not then even, when. Point, thing, res, rei, f. Sacrifice, spend, profunda, ere, fudi, fusum. Suppose, think, arhitror, ari, atus sum, dep. ; puto, are, avi, atum. Tear, lacrtma, ae, f. Think, be of opinion, opinor, art, atus sum, dep. Thus far, adhjtc, adv. Without, variously rendered. See 571. Witness, testis, is, m. and f. 578. Exercise. 1. Death encountered for one's country is wont to ap- pear, not only glorious, but also happy. 2. Senators who consult for the interests of a part of the citizens, and* neglect a part, introduce sedition and discord into the ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 231 state. 3. I was writing to you those things which I sup- posed to be conducive to your safety. 4. All laws ought to have reference to the welfare of the state. 5. There were many in Rome who were prepared to sacrifice for their country, not only money, but also life. . fi~ We are not able to state these things without tears. [ 7. Who is there, indeed, who would dare to call himself a philoso- pher without giving some precepts in regard to duty. 8. The witness says that he does not think this, but knows it ; that he has not heard it, but seen it. 9. I think that you have heard what opinion I expressed on the other points, 10. The Athenians thought that whatever was not honorable was not even useful. 11. That which is base is never useful, not even when you attain that which you suppose to be useful. 12. He has thus far allowed no day to pass without consulting for the safety of the citizens^^ p Lesson CII. ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 579. The English Adverbs may sometimes be rendered literally by corresponding Latin Ad\'erbs, and sometimes by other parts of speech. Thus adverbs and adverbial expres- sions may sometimes be rendered, — 1. By Adjectives. See Model I. 2. By Pronouns. Thus also may sometimes be rendered by idem / alicays sometimes by quisque. See Model II. ; also G. 451, 3, and 458, 1. 580> N'ot very^ before adjectives and adverbs, may be 232 LATIN COMPOSITION. rendered by non ita ; and not very much^ before verbs, by noil ita valde. See Models III. and lY. 581. In negative sentences, the negative is commonly joined with the conjunction : And not, neque, or et non ; for not, neque enim, or non enim ; yet not, neque tamen, or non tamen. See Model V. 582- In a clause expressing j^urpose, that^ with a negative adjective, j3ronoun, or adverb, should be rendered by ne with the corresponding affirmative adjective, pronoun, or adverb : That no ono, nobody, nequis, not ut nemo ; that no, ne ullus, not ut nullus ; that nothing, 7ieqiiid, not ut nihil; that never, ne unquam, not ut nunquam. See Model VI. 583. Models. I. Jit that time Cicero was I. constantly at Rome. II. There is nothing wrong II. which is not also dis- graceful. III. These statues are very III. beautiful, but not very ancient. IV. We are not very much IV. moved by these things. V. I came to Athens, said V. Democritus, and no one recognized me. VI. Who does not know, VI. that it is the first law of .history, that noth- ing false should be said? J^o tempore Cicero Momae fuit assi- duus. Est nihil pravum^ quod idem, non tur- pe. Haec signa sunt pul- cherrima^ sed non ita antlqua. His rebus non ita valde mommur. Yeni Athenas, inquit Democritus, neque me quisquam agno- vit. Quis nescit, primam esse historiae legem, nequid falsi died- turf ADVERBS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 233 584. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Was constantly, /mY^ assiduus, lit. was constant. 2. Model II. — Which is also, quod idem, lit. which the same. Est is omitted because it can be so readily supplied. 3. Model III. — Not very ancient, non ita antlqua, lit. not so ancient. 585. Synonymes. To teach, to instruct, to cultivate, to educate ; doceo, eru- dio, praecipio^ instituo. 1. Doceo^ ere, ui, turn; to teach, — with the simple idea of imparting instruction or knowledge. 2. JErudio, ire, wi, Itum ; to instruct, to cultivate, to REFINE, — with special reference to the effect of the instruc- tion in refining the character. 3. Praecipio, ere, cepi, ceptum ; to instruct, to furnish WITH PRECEPTS, — with Special reference to the maxims and precepts imparted for the guidance of the pupil. 4. Instituo, ere, ui, utum ; to instruct, to train up, to EDUCATE, — more comprehensive than either of the above terms. 586. Vocabulary. Branch of learning, doctrlna, ae, f. But not, and not, neque, conj. By no means, minlme, adv. ; lit. least. Desirous, studiosus, a, um. See 218. Devote one's self to, apply one's § self to, se conftrre ad with I ace. ; confero, ferre, tuli, coU latum. Do, perform, gero, ere, gessi, ges- tum. Dream, somnium, ii, n. Fear, vereor, eri, Uus sum, dep. Give precepts, praecipio, ere^ cepi, ceptum. 234 LATIN COMPOSITION. Gravity, gravitas, atis, f. Hostile, unfriendly, inimlcus, a, um. Lysis, Lysis, idis, m. Much, exceedingly, valde, adv. No one, that no one, in clauses de- noting purpose, ne quis. G. 190, 1. Not very, non ita, adv. Perhaps, sometimes rendered by haud scio an ; lit. / know not whether. Perishable, caducus, a, um. Pythagorean, Fythagoretis, a, um. Teach, doceo, ere, ni, doctum ; train up, instituo, ire, ui, utum. Troublesome, molestus, a, um. Unwillingly, unwilling, invitus, a, um. G. 443. Well known, sometimes rendered by ille, a, ud. G. 450, 4. Wholly, whole, iotus, a, um. G. 151; 443. 587. Exercise. 1. There were some who devoted themselves wholly to learned studies. 2. You will perceive from these letters, both what I have done and what I have said. 3. Those things which seem to be useful, but are not so, are hostile to virtue. 4. Wealth, power, honors, and pleasures, are perishable and uncertain. 5. The consuls devoted them- selves wholly to the safety of the republic. 6. There were many who admired the gravity, justice, and wisdom of Caesar. 7. We did this most unwillingly. 8. These things are not, indeed, very troublesome to me. 9. Men are not very much moved by dreams. 10. The well- known Pythagorean Lysis taught the Theban Epami- nondas, perhaps, without exception, the greatest hero of all Greece, fil. To give precepts on the subject of elo- quence is by no means easy. 12. Let us teach those who are desirous of learning. 13. Plato instructed Dion of Syracuse in all branches of learning. 14. We all fear that no one may approve your plan. ARRANGEMENT OP WORDS. 235 CHAPTER II ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. Lesson CIII. x arrangement of words. 588. General Rules for the Arrangement of Words, See G. 560-564. 1. Effect of Emphasis and Euphony. G. 561. 2. Contrasted Groups. G. 562. 3. Kindred Words. G. 563. 4. Words with a Common Relation. G. 564. 589. Special Rules for the Arrangement of Words. See G. 565-569. 1. Modifiers of Nouns. G. 565. 2. Modifiers of Adjectives. G. 566. 3. Modifiers of Verbs. G. 567. 4. Modifiers of Adverbs. G. 568. 5. Position of Special Words. G. 569. 590. Models. I. We were occupied at I. Wos eo tempore nodes that time day and et dies in omnium night in the study of doctrinCirum, m>edi' all the branches of tatione versabam,ur. knowledge. / 236 LATIN COMPOSITION. II. We have heard that II. Iflttmas terras lus- Plato traversed the trasse Platonem ac- most distant lands. cepimus. III. New names must be as- III. Mebus novis nova sunt signed to new things. ponenda nomtna. IV. We admire the justice IV. Caesaris justitiam et and wisdom of Caesar. • sapientiam admird- mur. 591. Remarks. 1. Model II. — We have heard, accepimus, lit. we have received, i. e. we have received or learned by report. 2. Model III. — Must be assigned, ponenda sunt, lit. miisi be placed. For the order of words, see G. 562, observing that nomlna, which might stand directly before sunt, is made still more emphatic by its present position. 592 . S YNONYMES. To see, perceive, behold, visit ; video^ cemo, specto, viso. 1. Video, ere, vidi, visum ; to see, — the usual word in this sense. 2. Cerno, ere;^ to perceive, to see clearly, to discern, — involving the idea of discriminating, as well as that of seeing. 3. Specto, are, avi, utum ; to behold, to look upon, — with attention or interest. 4. Viso, ere, visi, visum ; to desire to see, to go to see, to visit. * In the best prose, the Perfect and Supine do not occur in this sense. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 237 593. YOCABULAKY. Affluent, copious, uber, eris. Aged, old, senex, senis. Beauty, pulchritudo, inis, f. Deserve, often expressed by the Pass. Periphrastic Conj. See G. 234. Ear, auris, is, f. Eye, oculus, i, m. For a long time, jamprldem, adv. G. 467, 2. Game, ludus, i, m. Invention, inventunif i, n. Lost, engaged, busy, impedltus, a, um. Necessity, necessltas, atis, f. Open, apertus, a, um. Perceive, discern, cerno, ere. Pursuit, study, studium, it, n. Remove, take away, toUo, ere, sus- tv2i, suUatura. Thought, cogitatio, onis, f. Thus, sic, adv. Tyranny, tyrannis, Idis, f. Unimpaired, integer, gra, grum. Witness, specto, are, avi, atum. 594. Exercise. 1. Young men are led by the precepts of the aged to the pursuits of vir'tue. 2. Who would not admire the beauty of virtue ? 3. We have been taught by our fore- fathers to arrange all our plans and actions with reference to virtue. 4. Who is more affluent in speaking than Plato? 5. There were some who said that Jupiter would speak thus, if he should speak Greek. 6. If these things deserve to be seen, you have often seen them. ^^^7. We, who have witnessed these games, have seen nothing new. 8. Often, when lost in thought, with eyes and ears open and unimpaired, we neither see nor hear. 9. Many things, which cannot be seen with the eyes, can yet be perceived with the mind. 10. I have been for a long time desiring 238 LATIN COMPOSITION. to visit you. '11. We cannot sufficiently praise Brutus and Cassius, whom you defend. 12. W6 see that tyranny remained, though the tyrant was removed.* 13. Those things which moved me would also have moved you. 14. The inventions of necessity are more ancient than those oi^ pleasure. ,, ^ f Lesson CIY. euphony and rhythm. 595. In arranging a Latin sentence, attention must be paid to Euphony and Rhythm. But here the best results can be secured only by the aid of a cultivated ear. A few practical directions, however, may aid the learner in avoiding obvious errors. I. Avoid the monotonous effect produced by a series of words of the same length, especially of monosyllables ; as, et fons et po7is. II. Avoid the frequent repetition of the same letters in corresponding parts of successive words, especially in the endings ; as, Graeciam quondam magnam vocCtam. III. Avoid the genitive plural of future active particij)les, -on account of the harshness of its sound ; as, moniturorum^ recturdrum. But the genitive plural of futurus is sometimes necessary. IV. Avoid placing a word which ends in two or more con- sonants before one which begins with two or more conso- nants ; as, ingens stridor. V. Aim at variety in the length, sound, and ending of suc- cessive words, and in the ending of euccessive clauses. See Models I. and II. EUPHONY AND KHYTHM. 239 VI. Special attention should be given to the end of the sentence. A^word of two or more syllables with a round and full sound should be selected for this place when the sense permits. A monosyllable should not be so used, unless it be the copula sum, es, est, etc., or some other word which blends readily, in sound and in sense, with what precedes. See Models I. and II. 596. Models. I. Publius Africanus, having I. Publius Africanus, destroyed Carthage, Carthagine deleta, adorned the cities of Siculdrum urbes sig- the Sicilians with the nis monunientisque most beautiful statues pulcherriniis exorna- and monuments. vit. II. I demand from you no II. Nullum ego a vobis reward of virtue, no praemixim. virtutis, badge of honor. nullum insigne hono- ris postulo. 597. Synonymes. To surpass, conquer, overcome ; supero, vinco, devinco. 1. Supero, are, am, alum ; to surpass, to overcome, to SURMOUNT. 2. Vinco, ere, vici, victum ; to conquer, — the usual word in this sense. 3. Devinco, ere, vtci, victum/ to conquer completely, TO overcome, to subdue, — stronger than vinco. 240 LATIN COMPOSITION. 598. VOCABULAKY. By = from, in accordance with, e, ex, prep, with abl. Clear, clarus, a, um. Communicate, relate, trado, Sre, didi, diium. « Conquer completely, devinco, Ire, vlci, vicium. Contend, contendo, ere, i, tentum. Dionysius, Dionysius, ii, m. Duillius, Duillius, ii, m. Fitting, it is fitting, oportet^ uit, impers. How, quam, adv. Invite, invito, are, avi, atum. Mention, say, dico, ere, dixi, dic" turn. Opulent, opulentus, a, um. Preserve, conservo, are, avi, atum. Prosperous, happy, beatus, a, um. Reason, ratio, onis, f. Short, brief, hrevis, e. Some, any, aliqui, qua, quod. Some time, at some time, ali- quo tempore. Thirty-eight, duodequadraginta. Young man, youth, juvinis, is, m. 599. Exercise. 1. Reason invites young men to justice, equity, and fidelity. 2. How many things do we do for the sake of 0U7' friends, which we would never do for the sake of our foes ! 3. Dionysius was^br thirty-eight years the tyrant of a most opulent and prosperous state. 4. I did not suppose even those things which I have mentioned above, to be new to you. 5. It is fitting that he who obeys should hope that he will some time rule, and that he who rules should consider that he must in a short time obey. 6. Those things which you have said are clearer than the sun itself. 7. Epaminondas, the commander of the The- bans, did not deliver the airmy to him who bylaw had suc- ceeded him as praetor, but, having himself retained it a few days contrary to law, he conquered the Lacedaemoni- ans. 8. Even if many should contend with you in valor ^ you would yet easily surpass them all. 9. Caius Duillius ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 241 completely conquered the Carthaginians in a very great battle. 10. Cicero, whose orations we read when boys, preserved the republic. 11. It is not easy to find one who does not communicate to another what he himself knows. Lesson CV. arrangement of clauses. 600- Rules for the Arrangement of Clauses. See G. 570-573. 601. A verb which has an Infinitive Clause as its object, may either precede or follow such clause, or may be inserted within it ; and, in the latter case, it usually stands directly after the Subject Accusative, or directly before it. See Model II. 602. A subject or object which is common to both the principal and the subordinate clauses, generally stands at the beginning of the sentence, and is followed by tlie subordinate clause. See Model III. 603. Models. I. Let us defend that which I. Befendamus quod sen- we think ; for our timxis ; sunt enim judgments are free. judicia libera. II. Thales said that water II. Thales aquam dixit was the first principle esse initium omni- of all things. um rerum. III. Cato, though born at III. Cato, quum, esset Tus- Tusculum, was ad- culi natus. in popu- mitted to the rights U Romdni civitd- of Roman citizenship. tern susceptus est. 242 LATIN COMPOSITION. 604. Remarks. . 1. Model II. — Dixit might have been placed before aquam, or even at the end of the sentence. 2. Model III. — To the rights of Roman citizenship, in popvli Romani civitatem, lit. into the citizenship of the Roman people. 605. Synonymes. To feign, invent, pretend, disguise ; fingo^ simulo, dissimulo. 1. Fingo^ ere, finxi^ Jictum ; to feigx, to invent, to de- vise, — with the leading idea of forming or devising some- thing, whether true or false. 2. Simulo, are, dvi, dti(>m, ; to pretend, to feign, — to represent as true that which is known to be false. 3. Dissimulo, are, dvi, dtum ; to disguise, to conOeal. 606. Vocabulary. Accomplish, attain, assSquor, i, secutus sum, dep. Accusation, crimen, inis, n. After, post, prep, with ace. Alexander, Alexander, dri, m. Bear, suffer, patior, i, passus sum, dep. Censure, reprehendo, ire, di, sum. Disguise, dissim'ido, are, avi, atum. Displease, dispUceo, ere, ui, itum. For tlie purpose, causa with gen. G. 416, I. Frequently, crehro, adv. How long? quousque? adv. Indeed, then, tandem, adv. ; lit. at length. Invent, devise, ^w^fo, ere, jinxi, fic- tum. Macedon, of Macedon, a Mace- donian, Macfdo, dnis, ni. Mad, be mad, furo, Ire, ui. Multitudes assemble, concursus fit ; lit. a concourse is made. Olive tree, olea, ae, f. Pretend, simfdo, are, avi, atum. Produce, bear, fero, ferre, tuli, la- tum. llcnder service, prosum, prodesse. ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 243 profui. G. 290; 385. To render a greater service, plus prodesse. Some time, at some time, aliquan- do, adv. State, commonwealth, o'es publtca, rei publicae, f. Teach, doceo, ere, docui, dodum ; instruct, erudio, ire, ivi or ii, itum. That, expressing purpose, when the dependent clause contains a comparative, qiw, conj. Without, be without, cai-eo, tre, ui, itum. G. 425. Work, memorial, monument, mon- umentum, i, n. 607. Exercise. 1. When Demosthenes was expected to speak, multi- tudes assembled from the whole of Greece for the purpose of hearing him. 2. Men do not wonder at what they frequently see, even if they do not know why it happens. 3. When I was praised by Cato, I could easily bear even to be censured by the others. 4. Philosophers have taught many to be better citizens and more useful to their states, as Lysis taught Epaminondas of Thebes ; Plato, Dion of Syracuse ; Aristotle, Alexander of Macedon. 5. And not only while alive do they instruct and teach those who are desirous of learning, but they also accomplish this same thing by their literary works even after death. 6. How long, indeed, shall he who has surpassed all ene- mies in crime be without the name of an enemy? 7. I shall not be able to disguise the fact that those things which have been done thus far displease me. 8. Solon pretended to be mad, both that his life might be more se- cure, and that he might render a greater service to the re- public. 9. They have invented many accusations against the consul. 10. The Athenians were wont to say that every land which produced the olive tree was theirs. ^^ 244 LATIN COMPOSITION. CHAPTEK III. STRUCTURE OF LATIN SENTENCES. Lesson CVI. compactness of structure. / 608. The Latin in the form and structure of sentences // differs widely from the English. Accordingly, in translating ^ from the vernacular into that language, it is often necessary to reconstruct the sentence to adapt it to the Latin idiom. 609. But the true type of the Latin sentence, with its compactness, symmetry, and beauty, cannot be learned from rules. It can be acquired only by a careful study of the best models. On this point, therefore, the learner must turn for instruction and guidance to the pages of Caesar and Cicero, those great masters of Latin style. It is only necessary, therefore, in this chapter, to call his attention to the leading characteristics of the Latin sentence, and to guard him against certain errors into which he is liable to fall. 610- Compactness of structure is a prominent characteris- tic of the Latin idiom. Accordingly an English sentence which is to be translated into Latin, if not already concisely expressed, must first be thrown into a compact form, pre- paratory to a literal rendering. Thus, — I. English sentences beginning with the impersonal forms, it is said that he, they, etc., it is reported that, etc., it is thought that, it seems that, the order is given that, and the COMPACTNESS OF STRUCTURE. 245 like, may be more compactly expressed in the personal form, and must, accordingly, be so changed to adapt them to the Latin idiom. The corresponding personal forms are, he is said, he is reported, he is thought, he seems, he is ordered. See Model I. II. English sentences beginning with it is, it was, before a predicate noun and a relative clause, must be so reconstructed that the thought contained in the two clauses, the antecedent and the relative, may be expressed in one. Thus': It was he who did it, becomes, He did it. See Model II. III. In English, with verbs of thinking, saying, knowing, and the like, the subject of discourse is sometimes introduced with a preposition, as, concerning, in regard to, in respect to, of, and then repeated in the form of a pronoun in a clause with that ; as, In regard to Socrates, we know that he icas wise. This construction, though admissible in Latin when the subject of discourse is especially emphatic, should in general be avoided. The above sentence when adapted to the Latin idiom becomes, We know that /Socrates was wise. See Model IIL 611. Models. I. It is said that Epami- I. Epaminondas fidibus nondas played upon praeclare ceciiiisse the lyre excellently. dicttur. 11. It was Pisistratus who 11. Pisistratus primus first arranged the Homeri libros sic books of Homer as we disposuit ut nunc now have them. habemus. III. It is related of Romulus III. Romulus bella cum, that he most success- Jinitimis m,idta fe- fully waged many licissime gessisse wars with his neigh- tradXtur, bors. 17 246 LATIN COMPOSITION. 612. Remaeks. 1. Model I. — It is said that Epaminondas, Latin idiom, Epami' nondas is said. 2. Model II. — It was Pisistratus who first, Latin idiom. Fists- tratus first. 3. Model III. — It is related of Romulus that, Latin idiom, Romulus is related. 613. Vocabulary. Achievements are accomplished, res geruntur. Admitted, it is admitted, constat, constitit. Apollo, Apollo, inis, m. As = that which, a thing which, id quod. G. 445, 7. Authority, auctoritas, atis, f. Banish, expel, expello, Sre, puli, pulsum. Bear, support, sustineo, ere, ui, tentum. Become acquainted with, cognosce, ere, novi, nitum. Bring to, adduco, Ire, duzi, ductum, ad with ace. Confirm, confirmo, are, avi, atum. Cypselus, Cypsdus, i, m. Delphic, DelpMcus, a, um. Demaratus, Demaratus, i, m. Endure, fero, ferre, tuli, latum. Etruria, Etru7'ia, ae, f. Flourishing, florens, entis. Live, alive, living, vivus, a, um. Milo, Milo and Milon, onis, ra. Money, sum of money, pecunia, ae, f. Open, aperio, ire, ui, pertum. Ox, hos, hovis, m. G. 66. Relate, trado, ire, dldi, dltum. Say, " they say," subject indefinite, ferunt. It is said, fertur, etc. Shoulder, humii'us, i, m. Stadium, stadium, ii, n. Syracuse, Syracuscte, drum, f. pi. Tarquinii, Tarquinii, drum, m. pi. Through, per, prep, with ace. Unable, to be unable = not to be able, non possum, posse, potui. Walk, go along, ingridior, i, gres- su^ sum, dep. Withdraw, call off", avdco, dre, dvi, dtum. Without a nomination from the people, injussu popvli. G. 419. III. UNITY OF THE LATIN SENTENCE. 247 614. Exercise. 1. It is related of Servius Tullius that he was the first who reigned without a nomination from the people. 2. It is said that Demaratus, the father of king Tarquin, hav- ing been unable to endure the tyrant Cypselus, fled with a large sum of money, and betook himself to Tarquinii, a very flourishing city of Etruria. 3. It is not by force, but by wisdom, that great achievements are accomplished. 4. It is not with the eyes, but with the mind, that we perceive those things which we see. 5. It was Lycurgus who confirmed his laws by the authority of the Delphic Apollo. 6. It is said that Milo walked through the stadi- um at Olympia, bearing upon his shoulders a live ox, 7. It was Socrates who first brought philosophy to common life. 8. It seems to me, as is admitted among all, that Socrates was the first to withdraw philosophy from occult subjects, and to bring it to common life. 9. They say that Plato came into Italy to become acquainted with the Pythagoreans. 10. It is said that Dionysius the tyrant, having been banished from Syracuse, opened a school at Corinth. > Lesson CYII unity of the latin sentence. A' 615. Unity, though important in the English sentence, is still more so in the Latin. All the various parts of the sentence should be nicely adapted to each other, and made to unite harmoniously in one complete organic whole. Thus, — 248 LATIN COMPOSITION. I. When a Latin sentence consists of two or more clauses, it is usually so constructed, if possible, that these clauses have the same subject. See Model I. II. When the subjects of successive clauses are not the same, they should, if possible, be of the same form. Thus they may all be nouns, or all infinitives, or all indirect ques- tions. See Model II. III. The objects of successive clauses should also, when practicable, be of the same form. See Model III. IV. The predicates of successive clauses should also, when practicable, be of the same form. Thus they may all be verbs, or all predicate nouns with the copula swm, or all pred- icate adjectives with the copula. See Model IV. V. The same general law also applies, though not with the same force, to the other elements of the sentence. See Model I. 616. Models. I. We see that the bless- I. Commodaquibusfrui- ings which we enjoy mur spiritumque and the air which we quern ducinms a breathe are given us Deo nobis dari vi- by God. demus. II. If hope is the expecta- II. Si spes est exspecta- tion of good, fear is tio honi^ metiis est the expectation of exspectatio mail. evil. III. I shall consider, not only III. N'on solum, quid te what it becomes you aicdlre, verum eti- to hear, but also what am quid me deceai it becomes me to say. dicere, considerabo. IV. Can that which is use- TV. Kum potest, qtiod iiy less to the republic utUe rei publicae sit^ be useful to any citi- id cuiquam civi es' zen ? se utile f UNITY OF THE LATIN SENTENCE, 249 617. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Air = hresith, spirltum. 2. Model IV. — Observe the position of id after the Relative clause. See G. 572, II. 618. Synontmes. To wish, desire ; volo, opto, cujno. 1. Vblo, velle, volui ; to wish, — used of the calm exercise of the will, but involviug the purpose to realize the wish. 2. Opto^ are, dvi, dtum / to wish, to desire, — used of the simple exercise of the will, without involving the purpose to act. 3. Ciqjio, tre, tvi, Ittmi ; to desire, to desire eagerly, — used especially of passionate and eager desire. 619. Vocabulary. Adversity, res adversae, f. pi. G. 440, N. 4. Apply one's self to, se applicare ad with ace. ; appllco, are, avi and wi, dtum and Uum. Arouse, erigo, ere, rexi, rectum. Attentive, attentus, a, um. Blessing, good, bonum, i, n. Day before, pridie, adv. Y ortunate, foriundtus, a, um. From that place, tlience, inde, adv. Future, yet to come, futurus, a, um. Greatest (in rank), highest, sum- mus, a, um. G. 163, 3. Hearer, auditor, oris, m. July, of July, Quintilis, e. Look forward to, exspecto, are, dvi, dtum. Nones, usually the fifth day of the month, but the seventh in March, May, July, and Oct., nonae, drum, f. pi. G. 642, I. 2. Overthrow, everto, ere, verti, ver- sum. Past, praeterltus, a, um. Pertain to, pertlneo, ere, ui, ad with ace. 250 LATIN COMPOSITION. Pleased, be pleased, rejoice, laefo7', Regard as, believe, statuo, ere, iii, ari, dtus sum, dep. Present, praesens, entis. Promise, polliceor, eri, itus sum, dep. Prosperity, res secundae, f. pi. G. 440, N. 4. Recall to mind, recordor, ari, atus sum, dep. atum. Show, demonsiro, are, avi, atum. Sixth of July, pridie Nonas Quin- tlles, lit. the day before the Nones of July. G. 642, I.- III. ; 437, 1. So, in such a manner, sic, adv. Temperate, temperans, antis. Unusual, inusitatus, a, um- 620. Exercise. 1. As we are aroused by those blessings which we ex- pect, so we are pleased by those which we recall to mind. 2. Some apply themselves to philosophy, some to the civil law, and others to eloquence. 3. The wise remem- ber the blessings which are past, enjoy those which are present, and look forward to those which are future. 4. It seemed to me that Caius Marius was one of the most fortunate of men in prosperity, and one of the greatest of heroes in adversity. 5. After the overthrow of the repub- lic, Cicero wrote more in a short time than in many years while the republic was standing. 6. Cicero, having been in Athens just ten days, set out from that place on tlie 6th of July. 7. You cannot be brave while judging pain the greatest evil, or temperate while regarding pleas- ure as the highest good. 8. They desire to know what can be done. 9. We wish to be both wise and happy. 10. We shall have attentive hearers, if we promise to speak of great, new, and unusual subjects. 11. We shall make them attentive, if we show that those things, which we arc about to state, pertain to the highest public welfare. PERSPICUITY. 251 Lesson CVIII. PERSPICUITY. 621. Perspicuity is another most important quality of Latin style. The best Latin writers express their thoughts with great fulness, clearness, and exactness. In the choice of words, they prefer the specific to the general, the concrete to the abstract. Thus, — I. Instead of pronouns or other general words, more spe- cific terms, referring not so much to the entire person as to some particular part of his nature, are often used. Thus am- mus may be so used when the action relates especially to the mind ; corpus when it relates to the body ; ingenium when it relates to natural endowments; tem,pus when it relates to time and opportunity; ocm/ws, awm, etc., when it relates to the senses. See Models I. and II. II. When a single word is insufficient to express the idea with the requisite fulness and clearness, two or more words are often employed. See Model II. III. The Latin has certain favorite circumlocutions. Thus,— 1. Facio u% with the Subjunctive, is often used to repre- sent the action as intentional ; though, in English, one verb would be sufficient, and that, too, generally in the Indicative See Model IIL; also G. 497 ; 500. 2. Accidit ut^ contingit ut^ or evenit ut^ with the Subjunc- tive, is often used to represent the action as accidental. See Model IV. 3. Fieri potest ut^ with the Subjunctive, is often used to represent the action as possible. See Model IV., under 566. 4. Here may be mentioned also the free use of res^ genus^ 252 Latin coMt»osiTioN. modus^ and a few other words : res secundae^ prosperity, res adversae, adversity ; res gestae^ exploits, achievements, deeds ; res publica^ republic ; in hoc genere^ in this respect ; quo in genere^ in which respect ; in omni genere^ in every respect ; omni genere virtutis^ in every kind of virtue ; omni modo^ in every way ; mirum in modum^ wonderfully. See Model V. 622. Models. I. I devoted all my time to the exigencies of my friends. II. The eyes of many will observe and watch you. III. I thought that I ought briefly to reply to your communication. IV. V. It was Cicero's good for- tune to be very dear to the senate. It is difiicult to bear adversity with equa- nimity. I. Omne meum tempus amicorum temport- bus transmisi. II. Multorum, te oculi speculabuntur atque custodient. III. Faciendum mihi pu- tdvi ut tuis litteris hreviter responde- rem. IV. Ciceroni conttgit ut esset senatui caris- simus. V. Adversas res aequo ammo ferre diffi^ cUe est. 623. Remarks. 1. Model III. — I ought to reply, faciendum mihij ut respondt» rem, lit. it was to be done by me that I should reply. 2. Model IV. — To bb, ut essetj lit. that he should be (was). PERSPICUITY. 253 624. Synonymes. To happen, to come to pass, to result ; aceido^ contingo^ tvenio. 1. Acctdo, ere, accidi ; to happen, — the most common word for this general meaning, used of unexpected occur- rences, whether favorable or unfavorable, but especially of those which are unfavorable. 2. Contingo, ere, contigi, co7itactum ; to happen, to be one's good fortune^ — used chiefly of fortunate occur- rences. 3. Evenio, ire, event, eventum ; to happen, to result, to TURN OUT, — used chiefly of events which are regarded as the results of antecedent causes. 625- Vocabulary. Aid, adjumentum, i, n. ; often in pi. Bring, affero, ferre, attuli, alla- tum. By letter, per liiUras. Communicate, converse, colloquor, i, locutus sum, dep. Contrary to, praeter, prep, with ace. Design, consilium, ii, n. Distrusting, diffisus, a, um, part. from diffido. G. 385. Empire, imperium, ii, n. Event, issue, eventus, us, m. ; thing, res, rei, f. i Expectation, opinion, opinio, 6nis,f. For, after paratus, ad, prep, with ace. For = during, per, prep, with ace. Happen, of desirable occurrences (be one's good fortune), con- tingo, ere, tlgi, factum ; of un- desirable occurrences, acddo, €re, i. Harmony, concordia, ae, f. Lasting, sempiternus, a, um. Military science, res militaris, f. More, of more value, pluris. Q^ 405. Native talent, ingenium, ii, n. 254 LATIN COMPOSITION. Now, nunc, adv. Offend, offendo, tre, i, sum. G. 385, I. Possess, possideo, ere, sedi, ses~ sum. Possessed of, praedUus, a, um. Gt* 420, 1, 4). Profitable, fructuosus, a, um. Quiet, otium, ii, n. Rather, more, magis, adv. Result, be the result, evBniOj ire, v6niy ventum. Since, because, quoniam, conj. So many, tot, indecl. Then, turn, adv. This = that, is, ea, id. Treasures, possessions, things, rw, rerum, f. pi. Wealthy, dives, itis. Willingly, libenter, adv. Would that, I would that, uiinam, adv. G. 483, 1. 626. Exercise. 1. I shall willingly communicate with you by lette? as often as possible. 2. Since it was not my good fortune to be with you, I would that I had been informed of your design. 3. It may be that the consul will offend the sen- ate. 4. I will admit, Cato, that, distrusting myself (my native talents), I sought the aid of learning. 5. May this event bring to you and to all the citizens, peace, tran- quillity, quiet, and harmony. 6. Those who are possessed of virtue are alone wealthy ; for they alone possess treas- ures both profitable and lasting, and alone are content with their possessions. 7. A leader skilled in military science is often of more value in battle than all the other soldiers. 8. Nothing could have happened so contrary to my expectation. 9. I, who then feared that the things which have happened would be the result, now fear noth- ing, and am prepared for every event. 10. Who of the Carthaginians surpassed in counsel, valor, and achieve- ments, that very Hannibal who, for so many years, con- t LOGICAL QUALITIES OF THE SENTENCE. 255 tended with the Romans for empire and glory? 11. I ought to expect letters from you, rather than you from me ; for there is nothing doing at Rome which I think you would care to know. Lesson CIX. logical qualities of the sentence. 627. The logical relations which subsist between the different parts of the Latin sentence should be expressed with great exactness and care. Thus, — I. If the actions are coordinate, they must be expressed in coordinate clauses or sentences. See Model I. II. If one action is subordinate to the other, its clause must also be made subordinate. See Model II. III. The relations of actions to each other in point of time must be indicated with great exactness by the Latin tenses. See Model III. IV. Correlative clauses, indirect questions, and clauses with conjunctions, are favorite constructions in the Latin. See Model III., imder 616. 628. Models. I. A brief life has been I. Brevis a Deo nobis given us by God ; but vita data est ; at the recollection of a memoria bene red- well-spent life is eter- d}itae vitae sempi- nal. terna. II. Even if I had anything II. Etiamsi haherem all- to say, I should yet qicid^ quod dice- 256 LATIN COMPOSITION. wish to hear you, be- cause I have myself spoken so much. III. You will assign to these vohmies as much time as you wish. III. rem, tamen te au- ctire vellem, quod ijyse tarn multa dix- issem. Tribues his volumim- bus temporis quan- tum voles. 629. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Is eternal, sempiterna. Est is omitted. See G- 368, 3. 2. Model II. — Dixissem. The pluperfect is here used to denote an action completed at the time of vellem. 3. Model III. — As you wish, quantum voles, lit. as you will wish- The action is really future. 630. Synonymes. To shun, to flee, to escape ; vito^fugio^ effugio. 1. Yito^ dre^ dvi, dtum ; to shun, to avoid. 2. Fugio^ ere, f'^gh fugitum ; to flee, — to attempt to escape by flight. 3. Effugio, ere, effugi ; to flee from, to escape. 631. Vocabulary. Academy, Academia, ae, f. Beginning, initinm, ii, n. Busy, be busy, occupatione disti- nCri ; lit. he distracted by busi- ness or occupation. How very busy one is, quanta occupaii- &ne, etc Celestial, coelestis, e. Celestial bodies, coelestia, turn, n. pi. Clear, perspicuus, a, vm. Commit one's self, se tradSre ; tra- do, are, dldi, dltum. Contemplate, contemplor, ari, atus sum, dep. LOGICAL QUALITIES OF THE SENTENCE, 257 Dictate, dido, are, dvi, aium. Distract, distineo, ere, ui, tentum. Entirely, totus, a, um. G. 151 ; 443. Escape, effugio, ere, fugi. Especially, praeseHim, adv. Flee, escape, profugio, ere, fugi. Flight, /w^a, ae, f. For, nam, conj. Heavens, caelum, i, n. Impel, incite, conclto, are, avi, aium. Infer, colUgo, ere, legi, ledum. Leisure, unoccupied, vacuus, a, um. Look upon, suspicio, ere, spexi, spedum. Manifest, apertus, a, um. Occupation, occupatio, onis, f. Only, modo, adv. Owe, deheo, tre, ui, Itum. Part, is the part of, often rendered by the gen. G. 402. Philo, Philo or Philon, onis, m. Principal, pi'inceps, Ipis, m. and f. Readily, easily, /aci^e, adv. Recover, restore, recreo, are, avi, aium. So — as, with adjectives and ad- verbs, tam — quam, adv. Such, talis, e. These lines, these things, haec, n. pi. Thought, sententia, ae, f. Voice, a feeble voice, vocula, ae, f. Walk, amhido, are, avi, Uium. 632. Exercise. 1. I have no one to whom I owe more than to you. 2. You have forwtten what I said in the beo^innin":, that I could say more readily, especially in regard to such sub- jects, what I do not think, than what I think. 3. What cat> be so manifest and so clear, when we have looked upon the heavens, and have contemplated the celestial bodies, as that there is a God by whom these are governed ? 4. This oration of Demosthenes, which I know you have often read, abounds in the most weighty words and thoughts. 5. When the principal of the Academy, Philo, fled from Athens and came to Eome, I committed myself entirely to him, impelled by a certain wonderful zeal for 258 LATIN COMPOSITION. philosophy. 6. He who fears that which cannot be avoided, can in no way live happily. 7. The Stoics say that it is not the part of a wise man to flee. 8. We do not doubt that the citizens are in flight ; only let them escape. 9. I think that you have never before read a letter from me, unless written with my own hand : from this you will be able to infer how very busy I am ; for, as 1 had no leisure time, and as it was necessary for me to walk for the purpose of recovering my voice, I dictated these lines while walking. Lesson CX. latin periods. 633. The favorite type of the Latin sentence is that of the period. The writer groups his thoughts in such a man- ner, as not only to show their logical connections, but also to give to each group unity and completeness. The thoughts, when thus arranged, are readily embodied in the periodic form ; but a flowing and well-rounded period is a work of great skill, and requires the hand of a master. In this les- son, therefore, we must be content to illustrate the general form of the Latin period, without attempting the higher qualities of style. See Models I. and II. 634. Models. I. If you will carefully con- I. Si diligenter^ quid Mi- sider what power Mith- tkriddtes potuerity et ridates had, what he quid effecerit, et qui accomplished, and what virfuvrit^ considerd- a hero he was, you will m, omnibus regibus LATIN PERIODS. 259 surely place this king quibuscum populus before all the other Bomanus helium ges- kings with whom the sit^ limic regem nimi- Roman people waged rum antepones. war. II. Cyrus in the conversa- 11. Cyrus eo sermone quern tion which he held at moriens habuit^quum the time of his death, admodum senex es- when he was very old, set^ negat se unquam said that he had never sensisse senectutem perceived that his old suam imbecillidrem age had become weaker factam^ quam ado- than his youth had lescentia fuisset, been. 635. Remarks. 1. Model I. — Observe, in studying this model (1), the compact structure of the whole, and (2) the unity of the sentence, especially as illustrated in the indirect questions, quid — potueritj etc. If you will CONSIDER, Latin idiom, will have considered. All the other ; here other may be either expressed or omitted in rendering into Latin. In this passage the corresponding Latin word is omitted in Cicero. 2. Model II. — At the time of his death, moriens, lit. dying. Said that he never, negat se unquam, lit. denies that he ever. Negat is in the Historical Present. See G. 467, III. 636. Synonymes. To destroy, tear asunder, overthrow ; deleo., diruo., everto. 1. Deleo^ ere., evi, etum ; to desteoy, — the generic word for this meaning. 2. JDiruo., ere., diru% dirutum ; to destroy, to ruin, — especially with the accessory idea of tearing asunder. 3. Everto, ere., everti^ eversum ; to overthrow, to sub- vert. 260 LATIN COMPOSITION. 637. Vocabulary. Agency, through my, &c., agency, per me, etc. ; lit. through me. Aid, adjuvo, are, juvi, jutum. Appoint, constituo, ere, ui, utum. At times, inierdum, adv. Chief, highest, summus, a, nm, superlat. of supSrus. G. 163, 3. Commit, do, facio, ere, feci, fac- tum. Connect, conjungo, ere,junxi,junc- tum. Connection, no connection, nihil conjunctum, n. ; lit. nothitig connected. Consistent, be consistent with one's self, sibi consentlre, with ipse, a, um, in agreement with sub- ject; consentio, ire, sensi, sen- sum. Define, definio. Ire, ivi, itum. Deserted, waste, desertus, a, um. Devote one's self to, se conferre ad with ace. ; confero, ferre, tXili, coUatum. Dissension, dissidium, ii, n. Excellence, goodness, honliaSi atis, f. Firmly established, firm, firmus, a, um. For = against, in, prep, with ace. He, she, it = this one, hie, haec, hoc. Hostility, enmity, odium, ii, n. Illustrious, most illustrious, high- est, summus, a, um. Kill, enico, are, enecui, enectum. Know, comprehend, perdpio, erCj cepi, ceptum. Measure, metior, iri, mensus sum, dep. Oppose one's self, se opponire ; op' pOno, tre, posui, positum. Overcome, vinco, ire, vici, victum. Right, the right, integrity, hones- tas, Siis, f. Ruin, demolish, diruo, (ire, ui, Mum. Several, compliires, a or ia, pi. So — as, with verbs, sic — ut. Such, so great, tantus, a, um. "* Utterly, fundltva, adv. 638. Exercise. 1. Solon, when he was asked why he had appointed no punishment for him who should kill a father, replied that LATIN PERIODS. 261 he had thought that no one would commit so great a crime. 2. Leonidas, the king of the Lacedaemonians, opposed himself to the enemy at Thermopylae, when either a disgraceful flight or a glorious death was set be- fore him. 3. He who so defines the chief good, that it has no connection with virtue, and who measures it by his own advantages, and not by the right, would not be able, if he should be consistent with himself, and should not at times be overcome by the excellence of his nature, to cul- tivate either friendship or justice. 4. There is no doubt that large forces of the enemy were destroyed in many battles. 5. I see that it is admitted among all that sev- eral cities, ruined and almost deserted, have, through your agency, been restored. 6. No state is so firmly estab- lished that it may not be utterly overthrown by hostilities and dissensions. 7. Those most illustrious men, Scipio Africanus, Caius Laelius, and Marcus Cato, would never have devoted themselves to the study of letters, if they were not at all aided by them in the knowledge and prac- tice of virtue. 18 NOTES PAGV 15. — 1. Is useful, uiXlis est, or est ulilis. In this exercise, the 7 learner will adopt the former order. — 11. Cicero; for the position of the object in Latin, see 13, I. 4. — Cicero, the most celebrated of the Roman orators. 20. — 4. Hannibal, a celebrated Carthaginian general. — Sagfun- 9 turn, a town in Spain. — 16. Their, suum. Remember that the Number, as well as the Oender and Case, of the possessive, is deter- mined, not by the noun to which it refers, but by that to which it be- longs. Here suum, their, refers to pueri, boys, which is in the plural, while it belongs to patrem, father, which is in the singular. 25. — 2. Consul. Under the Roman commonwealth, two consuls 11 were annually chosen as joint presidents. — 8. Socrates, a cele- brated Athenian philosoper. — 10. Herodotus, a Greek historian. 30. — 9. Catiline, the notorious conspirator against the Roman 12 government. — 12. Our pupils; omit the possessive our in rendering into Latin : so also your, in the next sentence. See G. 447. 35. — 1. Numa. The emphatic subject should be placed at the end 14 of the sentence. See G, 561, II. — Numa, the second king of Rome. — 12. — Athens, the capital of Attica, in Greece. 40. — 3. Is an honor to, Lat. idiom, is for an honor to. See G. 16 890. — 7. As a present =/or a present. — 8. I have = there are to me. 44. — 2. The orator, oratoris. See G. 48, 6 ; 363. — 3. Demos- 17 thenes, the greatest of Athenian orators. 49. — 1. Is a characteristic of, Lat. idiom, is of. See G. 402, 19 I. — 8. Our friends ; omit our in rendering. — 13. Us, nostra. See G. 408, L 2. 54. — 8. Talent, tdlentum, a sum of money somewhat more than 21 $1000. It consisted of ?\xij minae. — 10. Proud ot=provd because of. — 11. Scipio, a celebrated Roman general. (268) 264 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAGB 23 59. — 1 Cato, the name of several distinguished Romans. The most celebrated was Marcus Porcius Cato, the Censor. — 6. Five years older = older by Jive years. 24 64. — 1. There were, fuerunt^ or erant. — There — omitted in rendering into Latin. The Perf. fuerunt simply states the historical fact, that there were cities ; while the Impf . erard gives prominence to the continued existence of these cities. — 2. Were you P fuistme ? a ques- tion for information. See G. 351, 1, N. 1. — Corinth, a beautiful city in Greece. 26 69. — 6. Tarquin. Tarquinius Prisons, the fifth king of Rome, is meant. He came from Tarquinii, a city of Etruria. — In the reign of Ancus, Lat. idiom, Ancus reigning. See G. 431, 2. Ancus Marcius was the fourth king of Rome. 7. When Cicero was consul = in the cojisulship of Cicero. See G. 43 1 , 2. 29 79. — 1. Saguntum. Place the emphatic subject at the end of the sentence. Sec G. 561, II. — 3. How many books have you = how many books are there to you ? — 5. Was a man of, Lat. idiom, was of. See G. 402, 403. — 6. In your happiness = because of, etc. — 8. Servius. Servius TuUius, the sixth king of Rome, is meant. — 14. Pydna, a town in Macedonia. — At Pydna, ad Pydnam. 35 94. — 7. He had received, accepisset, Subj. by Attraction. See G. 529, II. — 8. Because they are diligent, quod diligentes su7it, — a positive reason on the authority of the narrator. Hence the Indie. su7it. See G, 516, I. But in 9, where the Indirect Discourse is used, sunt be- comes sint. See G. 524. 37 99. — 1. Boys, pu&i. Place the Vocative after the first clause. See G. 569, VL — The good. See G. 441, 1. — 3. Of the Roman people. For the position of the Genitive, see G. 565. — 4. Is the part of, Lat. idiom, is of. See G. 401. 39 104. — 5. Inclined to play, Lat. idiom, inclined to playing. — 8. To ask for = to seek. Supine in um. See G. 646. 41 111. — 2. Another, alfn' ; as only two persons are mentioned. See G. 459, 3.-4. Xenophon, a celebrated Greek historian. — 8. En- nius, a Roman poet. — 11. Let us be content. See G. 487. 42 116 1. Saturnia, an ancient citadel on the Capitoline Hill, the fabled beginning of Rome. — 2. Ascanius, the son of Aeneas, and founder of the city of Alba Longa in Italy. 43 118. — 2. What ought? etc. See G. 234 ; 629, L — 5. Camil- lus, a distinguished Roman general. — 1. Porsena, a king of Etruria in Italy. 44 120, — 1, New Carthage, a town in Spain. — 5, Cannae, a NOTES. 265 PAGE village in Apulia, famous for the victory of Hannibal over the Ro- mans. — 6. Many states of Italy. See G. 565, 3. — 8. Cartha- ginians, the citizens of ancient Carthage in Northern Africa. 122. — 1. Your country, patriae tuae, or patriae. See G. 447 ; 45 385.-2. To come. See G. 498, II. —4, Mithridates, a cele- brated king of Pontus. — 5. Sulla, a distinguished Roman general. — 7. Capua, the chief city of Campania in Italy. — 10. Caesar. Julius Caesar, a distinguished Roman general and statesman, is meant. — 11. Nile, a river in Egypt. 127. — 1. Gauls, the inhabitants of ancient Gaul, embracing mod- 47 em France. — 4. Lacedaemonians, the inhabitants of Lacedaemou, or Sparta, a celebrated city in Greece. — 5. Their king Leonidas, regem Leonidam. Place these words after the verb, directly before the Relative. — To occupy, qui occuparet. See G. 500. — Thermopylae, the celebrated pass in Greece where Leonidas fell. 129. — 8. As a present. See G. 390, II. — 10. Many years. 48 See G. 379. — 11. Leuctra, a town in Boeotia. 131. — 1. Pericles, a celebrated Athenian statesman. — 3. Philip, 49 a king of Macedonia. — 5. Chaeronea, a town in Boeotia, 136. — 3. Their own valor, mam virtutem. A possessive with 51 own, if not particularly emphatic, may be rendered by the Latin posses- sive standing before its noun. The Genitive of ipse is added when special emphasis requires it. See G. 452, 4. — 6. Belgians, a warlike people in the north of Gaul. — 7. Must be accomplished. See G, 234. — By us. See G. 388. 141. — 1. Helvetians, a people in Gaul. — Their. See G. 564, 53 I. — 3. To encounter, Infinitive, or ad with the Gerundive. — 6. Did see ; for person, see G. 463, 1. — 10. For me to speak, ui dicam, lit. thai I should {may) speak. 147. — 1. Of the Romans. Great freedom, it will be remembered, 55 is allowed in the arrangement of Latin words. A genitive or an ad- jective may often precede its noun, even when no emphasis is indicated ; especially if perspicuity or euphony can be thus promoted. Indeed, the arrangement may often be left to the option of the writer. — 3. In their language = 6y means of their language. See G. 418; 420. — 4. Very brave. See G. 444, 1. — 10. Them. See 457 ; also G. 451, 1. 152. — 1. Greatly. Place valde directly before the verb. See G. 57 567, 3. — 4. To be burned. See G. 535, II. — 5. Orgetorix, a Hel- vetian chieftain. — 6. To wage. See G. 498, II. — 7. Would be = was about to he. — 10, His forces, copias ; the possessive is unneces- ^66 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAOB sary. See G. 447. — Labienus, a distinguished oflBcer under Caesar in Gaul. — Arar, a river in Gaul, the Saone. 59 158. — 3. How large a force, quantas cojnas. In the sense of — force, forces, copiae (plur.), and not c<^a^ is generally used. — 10, Was Orgetorix ? etc. See G. 353, 1. — 13. Orgetorix. Either like the English or with the addition of the simple predicate — Orge- torix loas the bravest. See G. 362. — 14. Not, ne, or noh with the Infinitive. See G. 488. — 15. Let us encounter. See G. 483. 61 163. — 1. Had. See G. 529, I.; 492, 2.-4. Lemannus, the Lake of Geneva in Switzerland. — 5. The Rhone, Jihodanus, a river in Gaul. — 6. Their cities = the cities of them. See 468, 2. — 1. Aeduans, a powerful tribe in Gaul. — 9. Of the Romans. See G. 565, 2. 63 169. — 1. Caria, a province in Asia Minor. — 4. Was, fuisse^ re- ferring not to the time of dixisii, but to the age of Caesar. — 5. Car- thage, an ancient city in Northern Africa. — Numantia, an ancient city in Spain. 65 174. —4. For the order of words, see G. 562.-5. That Geneva is. See G. 535, I. — AUobroges, a powerful tribe in ancient Gaul. — 6. Brutus, CoUatinus, the first consuls in Rome. — 9. In combin- ing these names, connect Marcus and Quintus by a conjunction, and let the other parts of the names follow in the plural, Tullii Cicerones. See G. 439, 4. 68 180. — 6. At this place. See G. 425, 2. — Rhine, a celebrated river in Europe. — 10. That boast. See G. 371, II. (2). — 13. The same as, idem quod. See G. 451, 5. 70 186. — 1. Ariovistus, a German chieftain in the time of Caesar. — 2. By his own name, suo nomine. JpsHus is unnecessary. — 4. From his own name, e suo nomine. — 5. Whom. See G. 385. — Blind. See G. 561, II, — 9. Our opinion, scntentiam. The possessive should be omitted. — 12. My opinion. Here it is better to use the posses- sive to avoid all ambiguity. 72 191. — 6. His. The possessive before commander and home should be omitted in rendering into Latin. — To be permitted, ut liceat. See G. 498, II. — Y. Of what. See G. 875.-8. Of Ariovistus =from Ariovistits. 74 196. — 3. Tiberius Gracchus, a statesman famous in the po- litical history of Rome. — 4. Publius Scipio Nasica, a Roman citizen distinguished for his integrity. — 6. Spoke Latin, Lafine loculum esse. The Latin idiom uses the adverb Lafine where the English uses the noun Latin. — 9. To take. See G. 497, 1. — The NOTES. 267 PAGE city of Geneva, Lat. idiom, the city Geneva. See G. 363. — 10. To encounter. Use the Infinitive in this sentence, but see note on 141, 3. 202. — 3. Sent, muisse, referring to the historical fact that Ario- 77 vistus sent, etc. Mittere would mean tvas sending at the time of the statement. See G. 537. — 4. I said so = I said it; but it in such cases should be omitted in rendering into Latin. See 457. — 5. To the city of, etc. See G. 380, I. — 6. To their camp, etc., Lat. idiom, to Geneva to their camp. — 9. When a boy. See G. 363, 3. — 11. Your letter = t/our communication^ with no special reference to its form. 207. —2. The good. See 441, 1. — 3. Are envied. See G. 79 301, 1. — 7. Of Ephesus, Ephesus, in apposition with nomen. — 9. By alL See G. 388. — 10. What business, Lat. idiom, what of busi- ness. See G. 397, 3. — 11. Is a glory, Lat. idiom, is for a glory. See G. 390. 212. — 8. For whom = for whose interests, cai? See G. 385, 1. 81 — 11. Was a detriment. See G. 390. 218. — 3. Acceptable, — because of its value. — 6. Peculiar to 84 Athens, proprium Athenm'um. See G. 391, II. 4. — 8. Borders, finibus. See G. 384, 386. — 9. Very near the camp. See G. 392, II. 224. — 2. To make. See G. 497, I. — 3. In military ajffairs, 86 rei militaris. See G. 399, I. 2. — 5. They had more zeal, Lat. idiom, more of zeal was to them, — 6. Very desirous, avidi ; the force of very being involved in aindtcs. 229.-3. Of great valor. See G. 396, V. — 4. Is character- 89 istic of, Lat. idiom, is of See G. 396, II. — 7. Not ; for the position of non, see G. 569, IV. 235. — 2. With . . . forces, om7dhus copiis. SeeG. 419, 1. — As 91 aid, auxilio. See G. 390. — 4. More than five, etc. See G. 419, III. — 6. Antioch, Antiochla, an ancient city of Syria. — 7. Than that of. See G. 398, 1. — Themistocles, a celebrated Athenian general. — Solon, the famous lawgiver of Athens. 241. — 5. And your. Repeat et, but use the possessive only once. 94 See 469 ; also G. 554, I. 6. — 6. There was no need, nihil opus fuit. — 7. Make the best use of = use best, i. e. in the best man- ner. 247. — 7. Must be waged. See G. 234. — 10. Here the thought 96 requires that prominent places should be given to the Latin words for man and capable. 268 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAQB 99 252. — 1. Pythagoras, a celebrated Grecian philosopher. — Brutus, the deliverer of Rome from the oppression of Tarquin the Proud. — In which, quo. See G. 429.-3. On the first day of May, calcndh Mails, lit. on the May calends. — 6. In this sentence, omit his in ren- dering into Latin. — 6. Two years afterwards. See G. 423 ; 430. — 11. Is a man of such eloquence, Lat. idiom, is of, or with^ such eloquence. See G.41 9,11.— That he delights. See G. 500. 102 258. — 1. In the consulship, etc., Lat. idiom, Cassius being consul. See G. 431. — Under the yoke, sub jugum. The yoke was used as the symbol of submission and servitude. — 3. Having routed the army, Lat. idiom, the army having been routed. — Aqui- tanians, the inhabitants of ancient Aquitania in Gaul. — 4. To fight = to or for fighting, ad pugnandum. — 9. In the time, etc., Lat. idiom, Cicero being alive. 104 263. — 4. Frequently. See G. 443. — 5. Assembled in the temple, Lat. idiom, came together into the temple. — Jupiter Stator. Stator, the stayer, he who arrests the flight of soldiers and causes them to stand fast, is one of the epithets of Jupiter, the king of the gods. — 6. Was the first, etc., Lat. idiom, t?ie first accused. See G. 442, N. 107 268.-6. Who oppose. See G. 445, 3, N. 2; 463, 1. — 7. There are some. See Model VII. —Who fear. See G. 503, L — 8. As we ought, Lat. idiom, that which we ougJU. See G. 445, 7. — 9. To ascertain, Lat. idiom, loho may ascei-tain. See G. 497, I. ; 445, 5. — Are. See G. 529, I. — 10. Devoted himself to = studied. — Which, quod. See G. 445, 4. 110 274.-2. On the 8th of Nov., Lat. idiom, on the sixth day before the ides of November. See G. 642 ; 642, 3 ; 643. — 4. Such was . . . madness. See G. 453, 4. — 5. The best books which. See Model V. ; also G. 453, 5. — 7. Their money. See G. 447. XI 2 279. —1. It would be better. See Model V. ; also G. 476, 5. — 3. Should have been. See 476, 1. — 5. Could he not, etc., Lat. idiom, was lie not able to order. — 7. Did judge. See G. 500. — The best thing to do. See G. 547, 1.— 10. From the founding, etc., Lat. idiom, from the city founded. See 410 ; also G. 549, N. 2. 114 285. — 1. Like Catiline. See G. 891, IL 4. — That they dared. See G. 500 ; 493, 1.-6. When consul. See G. 863, 8. — For the safety, ad salutcm, lit. to the safety, i. e. to that end. See 880, III. — Has been called. See G. 495, VI. — 9. Rest. — NOTES. 269 PAGE In itself considered. — 10. Rest, i. e. as a means of invigorating its powers. 290. —4. Care must be taken, cavendum est. — 6. That = II7 but that, quin. — 8. I fear that. See G. 498, III. N. 1. — 9. To watch, vigilemus, lit. thai we should {may) watch. See G. 502, 1. — 10. From, defending, Lat. idiom, hy which he sliould less defend. See G. 497, 2. 296. — 1. Ambassadors, legatos. This word may stand after II9 the verb, directly before the Relative clause. — To establish, qui conjirmarent, lit. who should establish. See G. 497, I. — 2. Faesulae, a town in Etruria. — 4. Will lose, amittas. See G. 498, III.; 496. — 8. To be read. See G. 503, II. 2. 301. — 4. Unless you suppress = unless you shall suppress. See 122 G. 470, 2. — Conscript Fathers. The Roman senators were often thus addressed. — For inaction. See G. 409, II. — 8. This con- spiracy, etc. Sec 419. 307. — 4. That which, id quod. But it is often better to begin the 125 sentence with the Relative clause, and let the antecedent follow; as, quod est^ etc., id^ etc. — 5. "With your aid. See G. 420. — 6. Let not fear deter, ne timor deterreat. See G. 483, 3. — From watching. See G. 497, 2. — 8. What is right. See G. 529, II. 312. — 1. Came, venit. See G. 521, I. — 2. When they were. 127 See Model III. ; also G. 521, II. 2. — 3. Because he has driven, — the reason assigned by those who hate, not by the narrator. See G. 516, II. — 4. Because he has driven, — the reason assigned by the nar- rator himself. See G. 516, I. — 6. These things, quae, lit. which things. See G. 453.-8. Is recorded. See G. 519, II. 2. 317. — 2. At the command, etc., Lat. idiom, the consul com- 129 manding. See G. 431. — 3. Upon = co7icerning. — 4. Difficult to say. See G. 547. — 5. Would preserve, i. e. in the future. See G. 537. 323. — 1. When he received. See G. 524. — What mood would 131 be used in the direct discourse ? See G. 521, I. — 6. That, quin. See G. 504, 3, 2). — 7. Who does not desire, qui non cupiat, or qui7i ca- piat. See also Syn. 618. 329. — 5. Would have gone. See G. 527, III. N. 2. — 6. When 133 he comes. See G. 525, 2. In the direct discourse this would be, when I come = when I shall have come. — 9. Is the part of fortitude, Lat. idiom, is of fortitude. See G. 402. 334.-3. Do not think. See Model V.; also G. 489, 1). — 6. 135 Liet me know, Lat. idiom, make (or cause) that I may know. — Are 270 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAGE doing. See G. 529, I. — 8. At his own personal peril, suo sohiu periculo. See G. 398, 3. — 9. These books on philosophy, Lat. idiom, these concerning philosophy books. See 419. 138 340. — 6. To be happy. See Model II. — 8. In vain, i. e. with- out success, without accomplishing his object. — 10. To no purpose, i. e. not only without accomplishing the desired object, but absolutely without any good result. — Brought us, Lat. idiom, brought for us. See G. 385. — 12. To be wise. See G. 536, 2, 3). 140 346. — 1. Profess to be wise, Lat. idiom^ prof ess themselves fob' (that they are) wise. — 2. Who is unwilling. See G. 503, I. — 5- Upon the state. See G. 386. 142 351. —4. He also says, idem dicit. See G. 451, 8. — 5. It is my duty, meum est. See G. 401, N. 3. — 6. "What I think, an in- direct question. — What you have done = that which you have dfjne, a Relative clause. See G. 529, 5, 1). — 7. Whether — cr. See G. 529, 3, 1). — Of greater value, pluris. See G. 404, N. 1. — 8. That he had conquered. See Model VIII. ; also G. 540, IV. ; 535, III. N. ; 516, II. —9. That men are delighted. See G. 501, L 1. 145 357.-2. That you are. See G. 535, IIL— Of securing. See G. 542, I. — 4. Upon the . . . saving, etc., Lat. idiom, upon t/ie republic to be saved. — 5. For perceiving, ad with the Genmdive. — 6. To be plundered. See G. 544, N. 2. 147 362. — 3. Reading, writing. Place the Latin word for the former at the end of the first clause, and that for the latter at the be- ginning of the second. See G. 562. — For writing, seribendi, lit. o/ writing. See G. 393, N. — 6. Of his hearers, audientium^ or tm-um qui audiunt. See 438; also Gram. 441, 2. ; 549, 4. — 1. More neces- sary. See G. 169, 2 ; 170. — Than that of requiting, Lat. idiom, than requiting. — 8. To salute. See G. 546. 149 367. — 3. In this sentence the relation of the different parts will be best shown by placing the verb before the object. — 4. When they speak, Lat. idiom, speaking. See G. 549, 1. — 5. From me, meam, lit. my. See 462. — 7. Having accomplished. See G. 431, 2. 152 373. — 1. That. See G. 504, 3, 2). — 6. And; omit in rendering into Latin. See G. 554, I. 6. — Pompey, a celebrated Roman general. — 7. In the temple, — regarded simply as an edifice. — 8. In this temple ; use the most general word. 154 379. — 2. More, plura^ lit. more things. — Have, habuSro^ lit shall have had. — 5. Have to fear. See G. 888, ft. n. NOTES. 271 PAGB 384. — 1. To see. See G. 498, I. —4. To be aji honor, Lat. 157 idiom, to he for an honor. See G. 390. — 5. To say, qui dicerent, lit. who should say. See G. 497, I. — 6. To achieve, ad with Gerundive. See G. 544, N. 2. 389. — 2. To set forth; place the Latin Infinitive in this instance 159 at the end of the sentence. See 561,11.-4. If any one should free. See Model II. — 6. If the fear, etc. See G. 431, 2, (3). 395.-3. Though he is. See G. 515, III. — 5. Caius Mucins. IGl While Porsena was besieging Rome, Caius Mucius, afterwards surnamed Scaevola, attempted to deliver the city by slaying the king. 401. — 1. When virtue governs. See G. 431.-2. Hav- 164 ing come, Lat. idiom, ivhen I had come. See G. 521, II. 2. — 3- Arganthonius, a king of Tartessus in Spain. — 5. At the age of eighty-five, Lat. idiom, having been horn eighty-five years. — 6. Isocrates, a celebrated Athenian orator. — In his ; omit the posses- sive in rendering. See G. 447. — 8. Plato, a celebrated Greek philos- opher. — 9. While consul. See G. 363, 3. — Marius, a celebrated Roman general. 407. — 1. Which we, etc. See G. 572, L — 7. Clcdius, an un- 106 principled Roman, and a bitter enemy of Cicero. — 10. Servilius Ahala, Master of Horse under the Roman Dictator Cincinnatus. — Spurius Maelius, a v/ealthy Roman knight. — Because he was seeking. See G. 549, 1. 416. — 1. Tarentum, a town in Southern Italy. — 2. Plautus, 169 a celebrated Roman poet. — 3. Just eighty-three. See G. 452, 3. — Before the consulship, etc., Lat. idiom, before Cicero consul. See 409. — 4. With the attendance, etc., Lat. idiom, fortune being the attendant. — 5. Of, de. — 9. From boyhood, Lat. idiom, /rom a boy. See 408. — 10. The desire. See 411. 425. — 3. All . . . before Socrates. See 419. — 6. In an 172 enemy, in hoste po^ta. — 7. Temples around the forum. See 420. — 10. Epicurus, the famous Greek philosopher from whom the Epicureans have derived their name. 433. — 4. Antiochus, a king of Syria. — 5. Achilles, the most 1 75 famous Grecian hero in the Trojan war. — 7. Wishes. See G. 529, I. — 11. Of Antony, Antonii. Place this word at the beginning of the sentence. — His ; omit in rendering into Latin. 445. — 1. Begin with interest^ ut. — 2. Gorgias, a celebrated Greek 178 rhetorician — Leontini, an ancient town in Sicily. — 3. Prodicus, a Greek rhetorician. — Ceus, or Cea, an island in the ^ egean Sea. — 4. Pharsalia, a plain in Thessaly, famous for Caesar's victory over Pom- 272 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAGS pey. — Atticus, an intimate friend of Cicero. — 5. Leuctra, a town in Boeotia, famous for the victory of the Theban general Epaminoudas over the Lacedaemonians. — 6. One of the Seven, Lat. idiom, one from the Seven, i. e. the Seven Wise Men of Greece. — 7. Are no less useful, Lat. idiom, brinff {impart) no less utility {advantage), or like the English. — Warriors, Lat. idiom, those who wage war. See 438. — 8. Crotona, a town in Southern Italy. — In the fourth year, etc., Lat. idiom, Tar quinine Superbics reigning the fourth year. See G. 431 ; 879. — Tarquinius Superbus, the seventh king of Kome. — 10. "While in exile, Lat. idiom, while they were in exile. See G. 521, II. 2. — 11. So virtuous, ea virtute. See 441, and Model IIL — No other aim, Lat. idiom, nothing else if not {unless). 181 455. — 3. Armenians, a people in Asia. — 7. Many weighty, Lat. idiom, many and weighty. — 10. As possible. See 449. — 14. Many of the best, multi opttmi, lit. many best. 185 466. — 5. When I heard. This is intended to designate time simply. — 6, Have to learn. See G. 388, ft. n. — 7. As much time. See G. 397, 3; 561, 111—8. As certain, Lat. idiom, /or certain. 187 475. — 2. Cimbrians, a people of Northern Europe, who in- vaded the Roman empire and were defeated by Caius Marius. — 3. Miletus, a city in Asia Minor. — 6. His, ejzis, referring to Soc- rates. See 468, 2. — 10. The town of Antioch. See G. 380, L 190 481. — 2. For the safety of. See G. 669, IL 3. — 4. Place the Relative clause at the beginning of the sentence. See G. 672, II. — 7. He, i. e. Thales. — Astyages, king of Media in the sixth cen- tury B. C, — 10. That of Cicero. Sec 476, 4. 194 491. — 2. You or I? See G. 353, 1.-4. The conversation. See 484. — 11. All the good. See 485.-12. Sextvis Roscius, a citizen of Ameria in Italy, defended by Cicero in an oration still ex- tant. — Was constantly. See G. 443. 197 499. — 1. All the greatest. See 485. —2. Now that . . . old. See G. 363, 3. — 6. It seems . . . that Crassus, Lat. idiom, Crassv^ seems. See 494. — 6. So far . . . from admiring. See G. 502, 3. — 9. Valor of Scipio. See 492. 199 505. — 4. It is said that. See 494. — Xerxes, a celebrated king of Persia. — 6. Men may live. Use the impersonal construction. See 600, III. — 7. One should contend. See 495, 1. 203 515. — 4. When I obtain, Lat. idiom, wfien I shall have obtain^. — 6. Indeed while I, qui dtnn, lit. wJio while. See G. 453. — 9. One can live. Use the Impersonal Passive Construction. See 495 ; 500, IIL NOTES. 273 PAGE 521. — 1. What counsel, Lat. idiom, tohat of counsel. — 2. 206 Each, day = every day, quoque die. — 3. When boys. See G. 363, 3. — We had the opinion = the opinion was to its. — 4. That one cannot livi# Use the Pass. Impers. construction, non posse vivi. — 5. Says that no one = denies that any one. 528. — 1. In the whole of Asia. See G. 425, 2. — 3. Would 209 be ... to impel = would be able to impel. — You think, putares, not putas, as this clause is treated as a part of the conclusion, — which you loould in that event think best. — 4. I wish, velim., lit. / would wish, — a modest, respectful form of expressing a wish. — Would write. See G. 499, 2. — On what day. Place this clause, on account of its importance, at the beginning of the sentence. — 6. Should have been. See G. 476, 1. 535. — 1. That there were. See G. 504, 3.-2. The Study 211 in which, id studium in quo. See 484. — Be an honor to, Lat. idiom, be for an honor to. See G. 390. — 3. Have attained. See G. 503, I. — 5. As we wish = as we may wish. — 6. I desire, opto, — involving no purpose. See Syn. 618. — 8. Flans. Consilia should begin the sentence, to show its relation to both clauses. — 10. Who . . . statesmen. See 438. 541. — 1. We must give. See 557, III. — 2. Archytas, a Pytha- 214 gorean philosopher of Tarentum in Italy. — To remember = that he should remember, — indirect discourse. See G. 523, III. — 3. To hear. Use the Infinitive, or ad with the Gerund. — 5. For the safety, ad with the Ace. See 380, III. — 7. Dion, a brother-in-law of the tyrant Dionysius of Syracuse. — Of Syracuse. Sec 435. — To liberate, ut with the Subjunctive, or ad with the Gerundive. Use the latter. — 9. Suitable to command, Lat. idiom, suitable who may command. See G. 503, 112 —10. To pay his respects. Use Supine. — 12. To be presented, Lat idiom, that he should be presented. See G. 501. 550. — 2. Cicero. The subject may be placed either before or after 217 the participial clause. — 5. Having" achieved . . . deeds. Use the Abl. Abs. — The ancient . . . Olympus, Olympum urbem anti- quam. — 6. Having conquered. Use quum with the Subjunctive. — Mantinea, a city in Arcadia. — 9. Requite your favor = requite, or return to you, the favor. — Be grateful = have gratitude. Here gratiam may be omitted, as it can be so readily supplied from the pre- ceding clause. 556. — 1. On . . . despising glory; de with the Gerundive. 220 — 2. Hippias, a celebrated Greek rhetorician. — Olympia, a district in Elis, where the Olympic games were held. — 3. Held with Cato. 274 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAGB This identifies the conversation. See 551, I. — 5. At the age of nineteen, Lat. idiom, having been horn nineteen yearn. — 6. What advice you gave = wliat you advised. — 7. Except injuries, Lat. idiom, if not {unless) injuries. — 9. And j omit in rend^ing. See G. 554, I. 6. 223 561. — 1 By means of money, Abl. — 2. One. One should be omitted in rendering. — 3. It must be admitted. In the several sentences in this exercise, must is best rendered by the Periphrastic Conj. — That ... is. With concedo, either the Infinitive, or ut with the Subjunctive, may be used. — 7. Ought to do, i. e. in view of the circumstances of the case. See 557, III. — 8. Should be. Use the Impers. construction. — Be arranged with reference to = be re- ferred to. — 10. By a . . . admiration, admiratione. 227 569. — 2. That which one thinks, Id quod sentit. The Subjunc- tive would not be incorrect, but would be less definite. — 3. Not . . . either ... or — neither . . . nor. See 581. — 5. For administer- ing, ad with the Gerundive. See 380, III. ; 545. — 6. To be negli- gent. See G. 636, 2, 3). — 7. As I think you are aware = which I think you know. — Think. See Syn. 576. — I have acquaintance ■= there is to me an acquaintance. — 8. Whatever, quae — m, those things which. 230 578. — 2. Consult for the interests of a part, Lat. idiom, con- sult for a part. — 3. I supposed. See G. 503, I. — 4. Ought to have reference = ought to be referred. — 6. To sacrifice. Use the Infinitive. — 7. Without giving some precepts, etc., Lat. idiom, no precepts of duty being (in the mean time) given. This sense — being given, not having been given — is best expressed by the Fut. Pass. Part, traden- dis. — 11. Attain, suppose. Subjunctive. See G. 521, II. 2 ; 529, II. 234 587. — 1. Learned studies. See 440, 2.-4. And. See G. 554, 1. 6. — Are perishable. For gender of adjective, see G. 439, 2. — 10. Perhaps the greatest hero, haud scio an summnm. See G. 529, 8, N. 2. — Lysis, a celebrated Pythagorean philosopher of Tarentum. 237 594. — 3. Have been taught = educated, trained. See 585. — To arrange. Use Subj. of Purpose. — 5. Would speak. Use Pres. Infin. — 6. Deserve to be seen. Sec G. 234. — 7. Nothing new = nothing of new. — 8. Lost in thought, cogitatione impedlti, engaged, occupied with thought. — 10. I have been desiring. See G. 467, 2. — 12. Though the tyrant was removed. See G. 431, 2. — 13. Also ; render by the proper form of ideni. See G. 451, 3. 240 599. — 1. And ; omit in rendering. See G. 554, I. 6. — 2. Which we, etc. Insert this in the principal clause. See G. 672, I. — 8. Di- NOTES. 275 PAGK onysius, the tyrant of Syracuse. — 5. He who obeys, eum qui pareij OT pareat. The former is more definite, and, perhaps, preferable in this sentence. — 7. Having retained, quum with Subj. See 543, 3. — 9. Caius Duillius, a celebrated Roman commander, who gained a naval victory over the Carthaginians in the first Punic war. — 11. To an- other, alteri^ a second one, in contrast with himself. This contrast gives alteri an emphatic position at the end of the sentence. 607. — 1. Was expected to speak, dicturus esset, was about to 243 speak. — For the purpose of hearing him ; cama with the Ge- rund. See 380, IV. — 4. To be better, quo meliores essent. See G. 497, II. 2. In this sentence the Latin verb for have taught is treated as a Historical tense. Hence essent^ not sirU. See G. 495, I. — As Lysis taught Epaminondas of Thebes, ut Lysis Epaminondam Thehanum, or, inverting the order, as is often done in illustrations, ut TJiebdnum Epaminondam Lysis. The verb taught should be omitted in rendering, because it can be readily supplied. — 5. And not only = nor only, neque solum: See 581. — Literary works, monumenta litterarum. See 440, 2. — 7. To disguise the fact that those things, Lat. idiom, to disguise that those things. — 8. Solon. The Athenians had made it a capital offence to propose the recovery of Salamis from the Me- garians. Accordingly Solon pretended to be mad, that, in his supposed frenzy, he might with impunity urge the unpopular measure. 614. — 1. It is related of . . . that . . . first who reigned, 247 Lat, idiom, Servius Tullius is related first to have reigned. See 610, III. ; also G. 537. — 2. Having been unable, quum with the Subj. — To Tarquinii, a city of Etruria, Tarquinios^ in urbem Eiruriae. Ur- hem is not treated simply as an Appositive to Tarquinios, but with the preposition in it becomes a modifier of the verb. See G. 380, I ; 425, II. 3, N. — Cypselus, a celebrated tyrant of Corinth. — 5. Lycurgus, the celebrated Spartan lawgiver. — The authority of the Delphic Apollo, i. e. of the Oracle at Delphi. — 6. Milo, a famous athlete. — Bearing = supporting^ or sustaining the weight of. Use sustineo in the Imperf. Subj. with quum. — 8. As is admitted, id quod constat. See G. 445, 7. — To bring it ; omit the pronoun it in rendering. See 457. — 9. They say, ferunt. Place this verb after the Subject Ace. See 601. — 10. Having been banished, quum^ with Subj. 620. — 2. Themselves, se. Place this at the beginning of the 250 sentence to show its common relation to the several clauses. — And ; omit. — 3. The blessings which are past = past blessings. — 4. It seemed to me that. See 610, L; also G. 534, 1, N. l.~One of, unus ex, one from. See G. 397, 3, N. 3. — 5. After the overthrow 276 LATIN COMPOSITION. PAGE of the republic. Use the Abl. Abs. — 10. If we promise = if we shall promise. See 627, III. ; also G. 470, 2. — 11. If we show = if loe shall shoio. — Are about to state = shall be (at that future time) about to state. 254 626. — 1. I shall willingly communicate. See 621, III. 1. — 3. Will offend. Use Pres. Subj. See G. 496, N. 2.-4. Myself, referring especially to native talents, ingenium. See 621, I. Aid. Use Plur. in Latin, helps^ aids. See 411, 2. — 6. This event = this thing. — 6. Treasures, possessions, res, things. — 8. Could have hap- pened, Lat. idiom, was able to happen. See G. 537, 1. — 10. For em- pire, de imperio, lit. concerning empire. — 11. Letters, littSrae, written communications without special reference to epistolary form. See Syn. 200. 257 632.-2. Could say. Use Present Infin. See G. 537.-4. Weighty ; tor the position of the Adj. in Latin, see G. 564, I, — 5. Philo, a celebrated Grecian philosopher. The Academy at Athens was a famous school of philosophy. — 7. Say — not = deni/. — 9. A let- ter from me. See 462. — For the purpose of recovering my voice. Use causa with the Gerundive. 260 638. — 1. For him, m ewm, against him. — Should kill; Plup. Subjunctive, to denote a completed action with reference to the time of punishment. —Would commit, Fut. Infin. — 6. That it may not. Use the Relative. See G. 503, 1. — 7. If they were not. Insert the condition after the proper names, and observe that the words by them in the condition must be rendered by the noun litt^ris, and the words of letters in the conclusion, by the pronoun edrum, referring back to that noun. — In the knowledge and practice, ad with Gerundive, lit. to perceiving and practising virtue. \ ENGLISH-LATIN YOCABULARY. A. Relinquo, ere, Possum, liqui, A-bandon. lictum,. Able, be able. Possum, posse, potui. G. 290. Abound in. Abundo, are, ^vi, atum. About. To be about to, rendered by the Act. Periphras. Conj. G. 233. Above. Supra, adv. Absurd. Ahsurdus, a, wm. Abundance. Copia, ae, f. Academy. Academia, ae, f. Acceptable. Acceptus, a, um, ; gratus, a, um. See 216. Make acceptable, ^roio, are, avi, atum. Accommodate one's self to. Obse- quor, i, secutus sum, dep. Accomplish. Conficio, cfficio, ire, feci, fectum ; assiquor, i, secu- tus sum, dep. Achievements are accomplislied, res geruntur. Accordance, in accordance with, ii'a;, e, prep, with abl. G.434,N.2. According to one's desire. Ex sen- tentia. See 339. Account, on account of. Propter, prep, with ace. Accumulate (trans.). Augeo, ere, auxi, auctum. Accusation. Crimen, inis, n. Accuse. Accuse, are, avi, atum. ^Achieve. Ago, ire, egi, actum. Achievement. Res gesta. See 474. Achievements are accomplished, res geruntur. Achilles. Achilles, is, m. Acquaintance, experience. UsuSj us, m. A very intimate acquaint' ance, summus usus. Acquainted, be, become, acquainted with. Cognosce, ere, novi, nl- Pare, are, avi, atum. Absolve, ere, selvi, solu' turn. Acquire. Acquit. turn. Across. Trajfis, prep, with ace. iiAct. Ago, ere, egi, actum ; facie, ire, feci, factum. Action, deed. Factum, i, n. Adjacent, nearest. ProxXmus, a,um. Administer. Gere, ire, gessi, ges- turn,. Admiration, a feeling of admira- tion. Admiratio, onis, f. Admire. Mirer, admirer, art, atus sum, dep. Admit, confess. Cenfiteor, eri,fes- sus sum, dep. Admit, concede, concedo, ire, cessi, cessum. Admitted, it is admitted. Constat^ censtitit. Admonish. Moneo, admonto, ere, ui, itum. Admonition. Admenitio, onis, f, (277) 278 LATIN COMPOSITION. A-dorn. Exorno, are, avi, aium. Adorn, clothe, vestio, ire, ivi and a, Hum. Advantage. Emolumentum, i, n. ; commodum, i, n. ; utilUas, atis,f. Adversary. Adversarius, ii, m. See 504. Adversity. Res adversae, f. pi. G. 440, N. 4. Advice. Consilium, ii, n. To give advice, suadeo, ere, suasi, sua- sum. G. 385. Advise. Moneo, ere, ui, Uum ; suadto, ere, suasi, suasum. Adviser. Auctor, oris, m. Aeduans. Aedui, drum, m. pi. Affair, thing. Ees, rei, f. Military affairs, res militaris, sing. Affect. Afficio, ere, feci, fectum. Affect, prompt, commdveo, ere, movi, motum. Affection. Amor, oris, m. Duti- ful affection, pietas, atis, f. Affluent, rich, copious. Uher, iris. Africa. Africa, ae, f. Africanus. Africanus, i, m. After. Post, prep, with ace. Afterwards. Post, adv. Again and again. Etiam atque etiam. Against. Contra; in; prep, with ace. Age, period of life. Aetas, atis, f. Old age, senectus, utis, f. At the age of, natus, a, um, with ace. of time. See 400. Aged, old. Senex, senis. Agency — through one's agency. Per, prep, with ace. See 232, 5. Agis. Agis, idis, m. Ago. Abhinc, adv. Agreeable. Jucundus, a, um. See 210. Ahala. Ahala, ae, m. Aid. Auxilium, ii, n. ; adjumen- tum,, i, n. Means, opes^ opum, f. pi. G. 133, 1. Aid, to aid. Adpivo, are, jnvi, jn- tum. A.ini — propose to one's self no other aim. Sihi nihil aliud nisi proponire (propOno, ere, posui, posUum). See 444. Alba Longa. Alba Longa, Alba9 Longae, f. Alexander. Alexander, dri, m. Alive. Vivus, a, um. All. Omnis, e. Each, every, quis- que, quaeque, quodque and quic- que or quidque. All togetlier, cunctus, a, um. At all, omnmo, adv. Not at all, nihil. G. 378, 2. AUobroges. Allobroges, um, m. pi. Allow. Concedo, ere, cessi, cessum. Allow to pass, inter-mitto, i7-e, mlsi, missum. Ally. Socius, ii, m. Alone. Solus, a, um. G. 151. Without exception, unus, a, um. G. 151. Already. Jam, adv. Also. Etiam, adv. I, you, he, &c., also, idem, eddem, idem. See 350. Although. Etsi ; licet; etiamsi ; quamqvam ; quamvis. G. 515, I. II. III. Always. Semper, adv. Ambassador. Legatus, i, m. Among. Inter, prep, with ace Among, with, near to, apud, prep. with ace. Amount, quantity. Vis, vis, f. Ample. Amplus, a, um. Ancient. Antlquvs, a, um ; pris- flnus, a, um. See 162. Ancus. Ancus, i, m. And. Et ; que ; atque or ac, conj. G. 554, I. 2, 3. And yet = and, et. And not, neque, conj. And that too, et is ; et is quidem {is ea, id). Anger. Iracundia, ae, f. Annoyance. Molestia, ae, f. Another. Alius, a, vd. G. 151 ; 151, 1. Another (of two), a fel- low-creature, alter, ira, irum. G. 151 ; 151, 1. Another's, ali- enus, a, um. Antioch. Antiochia, ae, f. Antioclnis. Antidchus, i, m. Antipater. Antipdter, tri, m. ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 279 Antony. Antonius, ii, m. Any. Ullus, a, um ; G. 151 ; alx- qui, qua, quod. Any one, quis. Any thing, quid. G. 189. If any, si quis. G. 190, 1. Apollo. Apollo, inis, m. Apparel. VestUus, us, m. Appear, seem. Videor, eri, visus sum. See 577. Appius. Appius, a, m. Apply to. Confero, ferre, iuli, collatum, in with ace. Apply one's self to, se conferre ad with ace. {confero, ferre, tii- li, collatum) ; se applicare ad with ace. (appllco, are, avi, atuT/i). Appoint. Constituo, Ire, ui, utum. Approach. Appropinquo, are, avi, atum ; accedo, ere, cessi, cessum. Appropriate, take. Sumo, ere, sumpsi, sumptum. Appropriate to, apply to, confSro, ferre, tidi, collatum, in with ace. Approve. Proho, are, avi, atum. Aquitanians. Aquitani, 6rum,xn.-^\. Arar. Arar, dris, m. ; ace. Ard- rim, Archytas. Archytas, ae, m. A rganthonius. Argant}ionius,ii,m. Ariovistus. Ariovistus, i, m. Arise, become. Bxsisto, ere, stUi, sfltum. Aristotle. Aristoteles, is, m. Armenian. Armenius, ii, m. Arms. Arma, drum, n. pi. G. 131, 1, 4). Army. Exercltus, us, m. ; agmen, mis, n. ; acies, ei, f. See 178. Army on the march, agmen, inis, n. Around. Circum, adv., and prep. with ace. Arouse. Erigo, ere, rexi, rectum. Arrange (a line of battle). Instruo, ere, struxi, structum. Arrange with reference to, refero, ferre, tuli, latum, ad with ace. See 534. Arrive. Pervenio, ire, veni, ven- tum. Arrive, come, venio, ire, veni, ventum. 19 Arrogance. Arrogantia, ne, f. Art. Ars, artis, f. As. Ut, adv. As = since, quum, conj. As, after tam, quam, adv. As = for, pro, prep, with abl. As to, after ita, ut, conj. with subjunct. As — as possible, quam, adv. with superlat. See 449. As much, quantus, a, um. As much — as, tantus, a, um, — quantus, a, um. See 527. As soon as, quum. primum. As, relative, especially after idem, etc., qui, quae, quod. As = that which, a thing which, id quod. See 267 ; also G. 445, 7. Ascanius. Ascanius, ii, m. Ascertain. Cognosco, ere, novi, nitum. Ashamed, be ashamed. Pudet, pu- duit and pudltum est. See 228 ; also G. 299 ; 409, III. Asia. Asia, ae, f. Ask. Rogo, are, avi, atum. Ask (a question), interrogo, are, avi, atum. Ask, inquire, quaero, ere, quaesivi and ii, quaesitum. Ask for, peto, ere, ivi and ii, Itum. It is asked, quaerUur, quaesitum est. Assemble. Convenio, ire, veni, ventum. Multitudes assemble, concur sus fit. See 606. Assembly. Concio, onis, f. Assiduously. Studiose, adv. Assign. Trihuo, ere, ui, utum- Associate. Socius, ii, m. Astyages. Astydges, is, m. At. Apiid, ad, prep, with ace. At the age of, natus, a, um, with ace. of time. See 400. At the suggestion of, auctor, in abl. abs. At all, omnino, adv. Not at all, nihil. G.378, 2. At length, tandem, adv. At once, jam, adv. At times, interdum, adv. Athenian. Aiheniensis, 15, m. and f. Athens. Athenae, drum, f. pi. Attack. Adorior, iri, ortus sum, dep. 280 LATIN COMPOSITION. Attain. Consequor, assiquor, i, secutus sum, dep. ; adipiscor, i, adeptus sum, dep. Attempt. Conor, art, atus sum, dep. ; tento, are, avi, atum. Attend to, serve. Servio, ire, ivi, Hum. G. 385. Attendance, with the attendance of. Comes, Itis, in abl. abs. Attendant. Comes, Uis, m. and f. Attention, study. Studium, ii, n. Attention, exertion, work, opi- ra, ae, f. Attentive. Attentus, a, um. Atticus. Atticus, i, m. Attract. Allicio, Sre, lexi, ledum. Audacity. Audacia, ae, f. Author. Auctor, oris, m. and f. Authority. Auctoritas, dtis, f. Avail. Valeo, ere, ui, Mum. Avaricious. Avarus, a, um. Avoid. Vito, are, avi, atum. Await. Exspecto, are, avi, atum. Award. Tribuo, ere, ui, utum. Aware — be aware. Scio, scire, sci- vi, scitum. B. Bani^, throw off. Ahjicio, Ire, jeci, jectum. Banish, expel, ex- pello, ire, puli, pulsum. Base. Turpis, e. Battle. Proelium, ii, n. A battle is fought, pugnatur, atum est, impers. Be. Sum, esse, fui. Be a charac- teristic of. See 42G. Be a law- giver, leges scriho, ire, scripsi, scriptum. See 438. Be a states- man, rei puhUcae praesum, es- se,, fui. See 438. Be a war- rior, helium gero, ire, gessi, ges- tum. See 444. Be able, possum, posse, potui. Be about to. Act. Periphrast. Conj. Be acquainted with, cognosco, ire, nOvi, nltum. Be ashamed, pudet, puduit and puditum est. See 228; also G. 409, III. Be aware, scio, scire, scivi, scitum. Be born, nascor, i, natus sum. Be busy, occupa- tione distineri (distineo, ire, ui, tentuvi). See 631. How very busy one is, quanta occupatione, etc. Be conducive to, condu- co, ire, duxi, ductum. See 289. Be consistent with one's self, si- hi consentlre, with ipse, a, um, in agreement with subject (con- sentio, ire, sensi, sensum). Be delighted with, gaudeo, ere, ga- vlsus sum. Be destitute of, need, egeo, indtgeo, ere, ui. See 239, I. Be elated, effiror, ferri, elatus sum. See 295. Be eminent, unus, a, um, emlneOy ere, ui, or emineo alone. Be en- gaged in, sum, esse, fui, in with abl. See 534. Be evident, consto, are, stlti, statum. Be expected to, Act. Periphrast. Conj. Be free from, be without, vaco, are, avi, atum ; careo, ere, uiy itum ; egeo, ere, ui. See 239, I. Be grateful, gratiam habeo, ere, ui, itum. See 548. Be held = to be, sum, esse, fui. Be ignorant of, ignOro, are, aviy atum. Be in command of, prae- sum, esse, fui. G. 386. Be in force, vigeo, ere, vigui. Be in- timate with, familiarUer utor, i, usus sum, dep. G. 421, I. Be mad, furo, ire, ui. Be need- ful, there needs, is need of, opus €st,fuit. G.414,rV. Be on one's guard, caveo, ire, cavi, cautum. Be one's intention, in animo sum, esse, fui. See 206. Be subject to, obey, pareo, ire^ uiy Hum. G. 385* Be sufficient, be able, possum, posse, potui. Bo the duty, mark, part, &c., of, often rendered by the Pred. Gen. See 426. Be tlie result, evinio, Ire, vini, ventum. Be the slave of, servio, ire, ivi and ii. Mum. G. 385. Be unable, non pos- sum, posse, potui. Be unwilling, nolo, nolle, nolui. Be useful, utilis, e, sum, esse, fui ; utilitCi' ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 281 tern affero, ferre, attuli, allatum. See 444. Be willing, volo, velle, volui. Be without. See Be free from. Be wont, soleo, e,re, soli- tus sum,. Bear. Fero, ferre, tuli, latum. Bear, suffer, patior, patty pas- sus sum, dep. Bear, support, sustineo, ere, in, tentum. Beautiful. Pulcher, chra, chrum. Beauty. Pulchritudo, inis, f. Because. Quod, quia, conj. See Lesson LXXX. Because of, propter, prep, with ace. Become. Fio, fieri, factus sum. Become acquainted with, cog- nosco, ere, novi, nltum. Befall. Accido, ere, i. Before. Ante, adv., and prep, with ace. Begin. Coepi, isse. G. 297, I. Beginning. Initium, ii, n. Behalf, in behalf of. Pro, prep. with abl. Behooves — it behooves. Oportet, uit. Belgians. Belgae, arum, m. pi. Believe. Credo, ere, dldi, dltum. G. 385. Beneficence. Beneficentia, ae, f. Best. Optlmus, a, urn. G. 1G5. In the best manner, optlme, adv. Bestow. Impertio, ire, ivi and ii, Itum. Bestow upon, confero, ferre, tuli, collatum. Betake on»'s self. Se conferre (jconfero, ferre, tuli, collatum) ; se recipere {reclpio, ere, cepi, ceptum). Better. Melior, ius. G. 165. Bet- ter, preferable, satius. See 527. Between. Liter, prep, with ace. Bird. Avis, avis, f. Bitterly. Acerhe, adv. Blame. Vitupero, are, avi, atum. Blessing, good. Bonum, i, n. Blind. Caecus, a, um. Boast. Glorior, ari, atus sum,, dep. Book. Liber, hri, m. Booty. Praeda, ae, f. iJorders, territory. Fines, iM«i,m.pl. Born for. Natus, a, um, with dat., or ad with ace. Both — and. Et — et. Boy. Paer, pueri, m. Boyhood. See 408. From boy- hood, a puero. Branch of learning. Doctrlna, ae,L Brave. Fortis, e. Bravely. Foi-titer, adv. Break, offend against. Vidlo, are, avi, atum. Bring. Affero, ferre, attuli, alla- tum. Bring, bear, fero, ferre, tuli, latum. Bring to, adduco, ere, duxi, ductum. Bring to a close, ^;ito, ire, ivi and ii, itum. Britain — of or from Great Britain, British. Britannlcus, a, um. Brother. Frater, tris, m. Brutus. Brutus, i, m. Build, make. Facia, ere, feci, fac^ turn. Burn, burn up. Exuro, ire, ussi, ustum. Burn, set fire to, in- cendo, ere, cendi, censum. Business. Negotium, ii, n. To have business, negotium esse, with dat. of possessor. Busy, be busy. Occupatione disti- neri (distineo, ere, ui, tentum). See 631. How very busy one is, quanta occupatione, etc. But. Sed ; autem ; vero. G. 551, III. 2. But not, and not, neque. By. A, ah, prep, with abl. By = from, in accordance with, e, ex, prep, with abl. By = through, per, prep, with ace. By letter, per litteras. By myself, yourself, &c., mecum, etc. See 568. By no means, minime, adv. See 586. Caesar. Caesar, dris, m. Caius. Caius, ii, m. Calamity. Calamltas, dtis, f. Call. Nomina, vaco, appella, Hre, avi, atum. See 184. Call to mind, commemoro, are, avi, atum, Camillus. Camillus, i, m. 282 LATIN COMPOSITION. Camp. Castra, drum, n. pi. Can, could. Possum, posse, potui. Cannae. Cannae, drum, f. pi. Capable. Capax, dcis. Capture. Capio, ere, cepi, captum. Capua. Capua, ae^ f. Care — take care. Caveo, ere, cavi, cautum. Care, care for. Cure, are, dvi, (Uum. Carefully. Diligenter, adv. Caria. Caria, ae, f. Carry. Porto, are, avi, dtum. Carthage. Carthago, inis, f. Carthaginian. Poenus, i, r\\.; Car- thaginiensis, is, ni. and f. Cassius. Cassius, it, m. Catiline. Catillna, ae, m. Cato. Cato, onis, m. Catulus. Catnlus, i, m. Cause. Causa, ae, f. Cavalry. EquUdtus, us, m. Celebrated. Clarus, a, um ; ceU- her, bris, bre. See 233. Celestial. Coelestis, e. Celestial bodies, coelestia, ium, n. pi. Celts. Celtae, drum, m. pi. Censor. Censor, oris, m. Censorship. See 409. Censure. Reprehendo, Sre, di, sum. Census — take the census of, cen- seo, ere, ui, censum. See 490. Certain. Certus, a, um. A certain, quidam, quaedam, quoddam and quiddam. Certainly. Certe, adv. Ceus, of Ceus. Ceus, a, um. Chueronea. Chaeronea, ae, f. Change. Muto, are, dvi, dtum. Characteristic. See 42G. Chariot. Currus, us, m. Cheerfulness. Ililarltas, dtis, f. Chief. Summus, a, um. G. 1G3, 3. Children. Libiri, drum, m. pi. Choice. Conquisitus, a, um. Choose, select. Ellgo, Ire, Ugi, ledum. Cicero. Ciciro, Onis, m. Cimbrian. Cimbrlcus, a, um. A victory over tlie Cinibrians, Cim- hrlca victoria. Citadel. Arx, arcis, f. Citizen. Civis, civts, ni. and f. City. Urbs, urbis, f. City walls, walls of the city, moenia, ium^ n. pi. Founding of the city, urbs condita. G. 649, N. 2. Civil. Civllis, e. Civil, domestic, domestlcus, a, um. Civil, be- longing to the city, urbdnus, a, um. Claudius. Claudius, ii, m. Clear. Clarus, a, um; perspicutis, a, um. Cleopatra. Cleopdtra, ae, f. Clodius. Clodius, ii, m. Close — bring to a close. Finio, Ire, ivi and ii, itum.. Coat of mail. Lorica, ae, f. Collatinus. Collatinus, i, m. Colleague. ColUga, ae, m. Come. Venio, ire, veni, ventum. Come to tlie relief of, svbvenio, ire, veni, ventitm. G. 386. lo come, future, futurus, a, um. Command. Impiro, dre, dvi, dtum. G. 385. Be in command of, prae- sum, esse, fui. G. 386. At the command of, Tres. Part, of Vm- pero in abl. abs. Commander. Imperdtor, oris, m. Commend, make acceptable. Pro- bo, dre, dvi, dtum. Commit, do. Facio, ire, feci, faC' tum. Commit one's self, se tradere ; irado, ire, dldi, dltum. Commit, commit to memory, edisco, ire, didlci. Connnit to writing, litteris mando, dre, dvi, dtum. Common. Communis, e. Conmionwealth. Res pubUca, ret publtcae, i. Communicate, relate. Trado, ire, dldi, dltum. Communicate, con- verse, coUdquor, i, locfitus sum^ dep. Companions — my, &c., compan- ions. Mei, etc. G. 441, 1. Compare. Confiro, ferre, tidi, col* Idtum. Compel. Cogo, ire, coigi, coacium. ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABLTLARY. 283 Complain. Qiieror, i, questus sum, dep. Completely 'conquer. Devinco, ere, met, victum. Conceal. Celo, are, avi, atum ; occulio, are, avi, atum. Concede. Coiicedo, ere, cessi, ces- sum. Concerning. De, prep, witli abl. Concerns, it concerns. Refert, tu- lit. G. 408. Condemn. Darano, condemno, are, avi, atum. Condition, state. Status, us, m. Conducive — be conducive to. Con- duco, ere, duxi, ductum. See 289. Conduct. Perduco, ere, duxi, duc- tum. Conduct one's self, se ge- rere {gero, ere, gessi, gesturti). Confess. Confiteor, eri, fessus sum, dep. Confidence. Fides, H, f. Confirm. Confirmo, are, avi, atum. Connected. Continens, entis. Connection — no connection. Nihil conjunctum. See 637. Conquer. Vinco, ere, vici, victum. Conquer completely, devinco, ire, vlci, victum. Conscript Fathers. Patres Con- scripti, m. pi. • Consider. Cogito, are, avi, atum. Consider as, arhUror, ari, dtus sum, dep. Consider, judge, ex- isiimo, are, avi, atum. Consistent — be consistent with one's self. Sihi consentire, with ipse, a, um, in agreement with subject [consentio. Ire, sensi, sensum). Consistently. Convenienter, adv. Conspiracy. Conjuratio, onis, f. Conspirators. Conjurati, drum, m. pi. Conspire. Conjuro, are, avi, atum. Constantly. Assiduus, a, um. G. 443. Consternation. Formldo, inis, f. See 305. Consul. Consul, Mis, m. Consulship. See 409. Consult, consult for, consult for the interest of. Consulo, ere, ui, sultum. G. 385, 1. Contemplate. Gontemplor, ai-i, atus sum, dep. Contend. DeceHo, are, avi, atum; contendo, ere, di, turn. Content. Contentus, a, um. G. 421, in. Contract. Contraho, ere, traxi, tractum. Contracted, small. Augustus, a, um. Contrary to. Contra, praeter, prep. with ace. Conversation. Sermo, onis, m. Convict. Convinco, ere, vlci, ^•ic- tum. Corinth. Corinthus, i, f. Correctly. Recte, adv. Costly. Pretiosus, a, um. Could, can. Possum, posse, potui. Counsel. Consilium, ii, n. Country. Patria, ae, f. ; rus, ru- ris, n. ; ager, agri, m. See 245. From the country, in the country. G. 426, 2. Courage. Virtus, utis, f. ; animus, i, m. Course — to follow this course. Hoc sequor, i, secutus sum, dep. Cover, clotlie. Vestio, ire, ivi and ii, itum. Crassus. Crassus, i, m. Credit. Fides, ei, f. Crime. Scelus, eris, n. Cross. Transeo, ire, ii. Hum. Crotona. Croto, onis, m. and f. Crown. Corona, ae, f. Cruelty. Crudelitas, diis, f. Cultivate. Colo, ere, colui, cul tum. Culture. Cultus, us, m. Curio. Curio, onis, m. Curtius. Curtius, ii, m. Custom, habit. Consuetudo, inis. f. ; mos, moris, m. See 167. Cypselus. Cypselus, i, m. 284 LATIN COMPOSITION. Daily. In dies, in dies smgulos ; quotidie. See 399. Danger. Periculum, i, n. Dare. Audeo, ere, ausus sum. Dated. Datus, a, um. See 366. Day. Dies, ei, m. and f. G. 120. Day before, pridie, adv. First day of the month, calendae, arum, f. pi. Fifth day of the month (generally), nonae, drum, f. pi. G. 642, I. 2. Seventh day of the month in March, May, July, and October, nonae, drum, f. pi. G. 642, I. 2. Three days, triduum, ui, n. From day to day, in dies. Dear. Cams, a, um. Death. Mors, mortis, f. Put to death, occldo, ere, cldi, clsum ; interflcio, ere, feci, fectum. Debt. Aes alienum, n. See 454. Decree. Consultum, i, n. Deed. Factum, i, n. Deed, thing, res, rei, f. Good deed, rede fac- tum. See 366. Defence. Praesidium, ii, n. Defend. Defendo, ere, di, sum. Defend, guard, tueor, eri, itus sum, dep. Defendant. Reus, i, m. Define. Definio, Ire, ivi, itum. Delight. Deledo, oblecto, are, dvi, dium. Delightful. Dulcis, e. Deliver, give over. Trado, ire, dldi, ditum. Deliver (an ora- tion), haheo, €re, ui, Hum. Delphic. Delphicus, a, um. Demand. Postulo, dre, dvi, dtum. Demaratus. Demardtus, i, m. Demosthenes. DemostMnes, is, m. Deny. Nego, dre, dvi, dtum. Depart, depart from. Discedo, ire, cessi, cessum. Depart, go from, exeo, ire, ii, itum. Depart, set out, projiciscor, i, profectus sum. Depart, go, eo, ire, ivi, itum. Depend upon. PosUus, a, um, esse, in with abl. See 560. Desert. Desiro, ire, serui, sertum. Deserve. Mereo, ire, ui, Itum; mereor, iri, Itus sum, dep. De- serve is often rendered by the Pass. Per. Conj. See G. 234. Design. Consilium, ii, n. Desirable. Optabllis, e. Desire. Cupidltas, dtis, f. ; libido^ Inis, f. According to one's de- sire, ex sententia. See 339. Desire, to desire. Cupio, ire, Iviy Itum ; opto, dre, dvi, dtum ; volo, velle, volui. See 618. Desirous of. Cupidus, a, um ; stu- diosus, a, um. Very desirous, greedy, avidus, a, um. See 222. Despair of. Despiro, dre, dvi, dtum, with ace, or de with abl. Despise. Contemno, ire, tempsi, tempt um. Destitute of. Expers, tis. To be destitute of, egeo, indlgeo, ire, ui. See 239. Destroy. Deleo, ire, ivi, itum. Deter. Deterreo, ire, ui, Itum. Detriment. Detrimentum, i, n. Devise. Invinio, ire, vini, ven- tum. Devote one's self to. Studeo, ire, ui ; G. 385; incumbo, ire, cuhui, cubltum, in with ace. Devote one's self to, apply one's self to, se conferre in or ad with ace. {confero, ferre, tuli, coUdtum). Dictate. Dicto, Are, dvi, dtum. Die. Morior, i, mortuus sum, dep. Difference — there is a difference. Intirest, fuit. Differently. Aliter, adv. Difficult. Diffxcilis, e. Dignity. Dignltas, dtis, f. Diligence. Diligentia, ae, f. Diligent. DiUgens, entis. Diligently. Diligenter, adv. Diminish. Minuo, ire, ui, Htum. Dine. Coeno, d)'e, dvi, dtum. Dinner. Coena, ae, f. Dion. Dio or Dion, onis, m. Dionysius. Dionysius, ii. m. Disagree. Dissentio, ire, sensi, ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULAKY. 285 Discharge, fulfil. Fungor, i, func- tus sum, dep. Discord. Discordta, ae, f. Discourse. Oratio, onis, f. Disgraceful. Turpis, e. Disguise. Dissim'iilo,dre,dvi,atu'm. Displease. Displlceo, ere, ui, Hum. G. 385. Dissension. Dissidium, ii, n. Distinguished. Clarus, a, um. See 283. Distrusting. Bifflsus, a, um. See 625. Divide. Divldo, ere, visi, visum. Divipe. Divlnus, a, um. Do. Facio, ere, feci, factum ; ago, ere, egi, actum. Do, perform, gero, ere, gessi, gestum. Is do- -/-ing, is done, agitur, geritur. Domestic. Domesticus, a, um. Doubt — there is no doubt. Non duhium est. See 322. Doubt, to doubt. DuhUo, are, avi, atum. Doubtful. Dulius, a, um. Dream. Somnium, ii, n. Drive. Pello, ere, pepuli, pulsum. Drive, cast out, ejlcio, i.re, jeci, jectum. Due — one's due. Suum, i, n. G. 441. Duillius. Duillius, ii, m. Dumnorix. Dumnbrix, Igis, m. During, in. In, prep, with abl. Dutiful affection. Pietas, atis, f. Duty. Officium, ii, n. To be the duty of, often rendered by the Pred. Gen. See 426; also G. 362; 401. E. Each, every. Quisque, quaeque, quodque and quicque or quidque. One each, singuli, ae, a. Each topic, quidque. Eager. Aldcer, cris, ere; studi- osus, a, um ; avldus, a, um. See 222. liagerly. Cupide ; vehementer, adv. Eagle. Aquila, ae, f. Ear. Auris, auris, f. Early, ancient. Anttqmis, a, um. Early in the morning, mane, adv. Easily. Facile, adv. Easy. Facilis, e. Eclipse. Defectio, onis, f. Edifice. Aedes, is, f. G. 132. Egypt. Aegypius, i, f. Eighth of November. Ante diem sextum idus Novemhres (a. d. VI. id. Nov.). G. 642. Eighty. Octoginta, indecl. Either — or. Aut — aut ; vel — vel. G. 554, II. 2. Elated — be elated. Efferor, ferri^ elatus sum, pass, of effero. Elegance. Elegantia, ae, f. Elegantly. Polite, adv. Eloquence. Eloquentia, ae, f. Eloquent. Eloquens, entis. Eminent, excelling. Excellens, en- tis. To be eminent, unus, a, um, emlneo, ere,ui; or emineo alone. Emolument. Emolumentum, i, n. Empire. Imperium, ii, n. Enact. Sancio, Ire, sanxi, sanc- tum. Enact, write, scriho, ere, scrip si, scriptum. Encamp. Castra pono, ere, posui, positum. Encounter. Suheo, oheo. Ire, ii, Itum ; oppito, ire, petivi or ii, itum. Endeavor. Conor, ari, dins sum, dep. Endowed with. Praedltus, a, um. G. 420, N. 1, 4). Endure. Fero, ferre, tuli, latum. Enemy. Ilostis, is, m. and f. ; inimicus, i, m. See 344. Engaged — be engaged in. Siim, esse, fui, in with abl. See 534. Engagement, fight. Proelium', ii, n. ; pugna, ae, f. See 256. Naval engagement, pugna navdlis. Enjoy. Fruor, i,fructus and/r?^?- tus sum, dep. G. 421, I. Enjoyment. Delectatio, onis, f. Enlarge. Amplio, are, dvi, dtum. Ennius. Ennius, ii, m. Entertain, hold. Teneo, €re, ui, 286 LATIN COMPOSITION. tentum. Entertain gratitude, ^ra- tiam habeo, ere, ui, Hum. See 648. Entertain the same senti- ments, eddem sentio, Ire, sensi, sensum. Entertainment. Convivium, ii, n. Entirely. Omnlno, adv. ; totus, a, urn. G. 161; 443. Entitle. Inscrlbo, ere, scripsi, scriptum. Envy, to look upon -with envy. Invldeo, ere, vldi, visum. Epaminondas. jEJpaminondas,ae,m. Ephesus. Ephesus, i, f. Epicurus. Epicurus, i, ra. Equal. Par, paris. Equity. Aequitas, atis, f. Erudition. Eruditio, onis, f. Escape. Effugio, ere, fugi. Especially. Maxlme, prnesertim, adv. Establish. Firmo, confirmo, are, avi, atum. Established — firmly established. Firmus, a, um. Esteem. Aestlmo, are, avi, atum ; facio, ire, feci, factum. Esteem lightly, despise, contemno, ere, tempsi, iemptum. Eternal. Sempiternus, a, um. Etruria. Etruria, ae, f. Even. Etiam, adv. Even if, eti- amsi, conj. G. 515, II. Evening. Vesper, iris, ra. In the evening, vesper-i. Event, issue. Eventus, us, m. Event, thing, res, rei, f. Ever. TJnquam, adv. Ever = al- ways, semper, adv. For ever, in iperpetuuvd. Every. Quisque, quaeque, quod- que and quicque or quidque ; omnis, e. Evident — be evident. Consto, are, stiti, stdtum. Evil. Malum, i, n. Exalted, most exalted. Summus, a, um. G. 163, 3. Example. Exemphim, i, n. Exceedingly. Vehementer, vaZde, adv. Excel. Excello, ire, ceUui, celsum. Excellence, goodness. Bonitas^ atis, f. Excellent. Praeclarus, a, um. Excellent, good, bonus, a. um,. Excellently. Excellenter, aav. Excelling. Excellens, entis. Except. Praeter, prep, with ace. Exception — without exception. Unus, a, um. G. 175, 1. Excessive. Nimius, a, um. Excite. Excito, are, avi, atum. Exercise. Exerceo, ere, ui, Uum. Exertion, zeal. Studium, ii, n. Exertion, attention, opera, ae, f. Exhort. Ilorior, cohortor, ari,dt>/s sum, dep. Exile. Exsilium, ii, n. Exist. Sum, esse,fui. Expect. Exspecto, are, avi, atum. To be expected to ; rendered by the Act. Periphrast. Conj. G. 233. Expectation, opinion. Opinio, 0- nis, f. Expel. Expello, ire, puli, puU sum. Experience. Usus, us, m. Expose one's self. Se opponire {oppono, ire, posui, posltum). Express, utter. Eloquor, i, locutus sum, dep. Express opinion, think, censeo, ere, ui, censinn. See 57G. Express thanks, gratias ago, ire, 'egi, actum. See 548. Extol. Extollo, ire, with laudlbus or laudayido. Eye. Oculus, i, m. P. Fabius. Fabius, ii, m. Fable. Fabida, ae, f. Fabricius. Fabricius, it, m. Faesulac. Facsulae, arum, f. pi. Fail. Deflcio, ire, feci, fectum. Faith. Fides, ii, f. False. Falsus, a, um. Familiarly. FamiliarXter, adv. Famous. Clarus, a, um. Tll« ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. 287 famous, sometimes rendered by tile, a, ud. G. 450, 4. Far — solar. 7'antum, ndv. So far am I from, tantum abest id with subj. See 498. Tims far, adhuc, adv. Father. Pater, tris, m. Conscript Fathers, Patres Consc7'ipii,m.p\. Fault. Culpa, ae, f. Favor. Beneficium, it, n. To re- quite a favor, gratiam refe.ro, ferre, tuli, latum. See 548. Favor, to favor. Faveo, ere, favi, fautum. G. 385. Fear. Metus, us, ra. ; timor, oris, m. See 305. Fear, to fear. Metuo, ere, ui ; timeo, ere, ui ; vereor, eri, veri- tus sum, dep. Fear greatly, pertimesco, ere, timui. Feast. Epulae, arum, f. pi. Feel the need of. Lidigeo, ere, ui. See239,I.;alsoG.414,I.;410,V.l. Feeling of admiration. Admiraiio, onis, f. Few. Fauci, ae, a, pi. Fidelity. FidelUas, atis, f. ; fides, ei, f. Field. Ager, agri, m. Fifth. Quintus, a, um. Fifth day of the month (generally), Nonae, arum, f. pi. G. 642, I. 2. Fiftieth. Quinquagesimns, a, urn,. Fight, battle. Pugna, ae, f. Fight, to fight. Pug no, are, avi, atum. Fight (a battle), lit. make, facio, ere, feci, factum. See 257. A battle is fought, pugndiur, atum est. Fill. Compleo, ere, evi, etum. Find, by accident. Invenio, ire, veni, ventum. Find, by search, reperio, ire, peri, pertuTn. Finish, bring to a close. Finio, ire, Ivi and ii, itum. Fire. Ignis, is, m. Set fire to, inflammo, are, avi, atum ; in- cendo, ere, di, sum. With fire and sword, ferro igneque. See 117. Firmly established. Firmus, a, um. First. Primus, a, um. First, for the first time, primum, adv. First day of the month, Calendae, arum, f. pi. Fitting — it is fitting. Oportet, uit impers. Five. Quinque, indecl. Flaccus. Flaccus, i, m. Flee. Fugio, ere, fugi, fugUum; profugio, ere, fugi' Flight. Fuga, ae, f. Flourishing. Florens, entis. Flow into. Influo, ere, fluxi, flux- urn,. Foe. Inimlcus, i, m. Follow. Sequor, consequor, i, se- cutus sum, dep. Follow this course, hoc sequor. Folly. Stuliitia, ae, f. Surpass the folly of, esse dementior. See 480. Fond of. Amans, antis ; cupldus, a, um ; dillgens, entis. Foolish. Demens, enticlssus s^im, dep. Suffering, pain. Dolor, oris, m. SuflSlcient — to be sufficient, be able. Possum, posse, potui. Sufficiently. Satis, adv. Suggestion — at the suggestion of. Auctor, in abl. absol. See 504. Suitable. Idoneus, a, um. Suitably = worthily enough. Satis digne, adv. Sulla. Sulla, ae, m. Sum of money. Pecunia, ae, f. Sumptuous. Sumpiiidsus, a, um. Sun. Sol, solis, m. Sunset. Solis occdsus, us, m. Superbus. Superhus, i, m. Supplicate. Suppllco, are, dvt, a- tum. Suppose, think. Arhttror, dri, d- tus sum, dep. ; puio, are, dvi, atum. Suppress. Comprlmo, Sre, pressi, pressum. Supreme. Summus, a, um. G. 163,3 Sure. Certus, a, um. Surely. Certe, adv. ^rpass. Supero, d7'e, dvi, dtum. To surpass the folly of = to be more foolish than, sum, esse,fuiy dementior, ius. Surround. Circumdo, Are, dtdi, datum; cingo, ire, cinxi, cine- tum. Sword. Ferrum, i, n. See 117. With fire and sword, /